905-2120-005 G, Text

REFERENCE COPY ONLY – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE
Refer to the Product Lifecycle Management system for the latest revision.
REVISION HISTORY
REV ECN/CN # DATE
P0 --
A 20171060 07-NOV-2017
B CN076879ECN 05-MAR-2018
C CN077951ECN 05-MAY-2018
D CN083454ECN 20-FEB-2019
E CN098270ECN 09-DEC-2019
F CN099776ECN 24-MAR-2020
G CN103771ECN 05-MAR-2021
TEXT FOR
CONSTELLATION™
OPERATOR'S MANUAL (CR5)
NOTES:
1. Inspect per Generic QIP Manual. 1
2. Safety critical component.
SHEET 1 of 303
BY DATE
Troy Hinzman 10/12/2017 TITLE
®
CHECKED
TEXT,MNL,OPS,CONST_REL 5
Jeff Naemura 10/12/2017
APPROVED DWG NO. REV

IRVINE, CA 92618-3818 905-2120-005 G
Ryan Takakawa 10/12/2017
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Manufacturer:
Alcon Laboratories, Inc.
6201 South Freeway
EC REP
Fort Worth, Texas 76134-2099 USA Alcon Laboratories Belgium
Made in USA with Global Materials Lichterveld 3
2870 Puurs-Sint-Amands
Belgium
Produced By:
Alcon Research, LLC.
15800 Alton Parkway
Irvine, California 92618-3818
USA
Telephone: 949/753-1393
800/832-7827
8065753060 Rev. Y, CATALOG NUMBER

905‑2120‑005 Rev. G, TEXT ONLY
©2017, 2020, 2021 Alcon Inc.
Issue Date: 02-APR-2021
Constellation™ Vision System
Constellation™ Vision System Operator's Manual
8065753060
MANUAL REVISION RECORD

DATE REVISION ECN NUMBER AND DESCRIPTION
11/2017 N ECN 20171060 - Initial release for REL_5.xx.xx.
03/2018 R ECN 20180190 - Updated Indication for use statement. Pages affected: i, ii, iii, vi, ix,1.2-1.10.
ECN 20180454 - Update to include information for REL_5.40.xx. Pages affected: i-v, vii-x, 1.8,
05/2018 T
2.5-2.7, 2.38, 2.47, 3.11, 3.13, 3.14, 5.7, and 7.1-7.4.
CN083454ECN - The main purpose of this update is to add the HyperVit Bevel accessory and
20-FEB-2019 V correct the laser core module warranty. Additional minor changes are included.
Pages affected: i-x,1.4, 1.8, 1.9, 1.11, 1.28, 6.3.
CN098270ECN - Change the description of occlusion sound from “alarm” to “occlusion tone,”
remove obsolete accessories, update consumable contact information, add RFID certifications,
09-DEC-2019 W
and correct figure 3-16. Affected pages include: i, ii, 1.16, 1.24, 2.103, 2.131, 3.16, and 6.2-6.5.
Revision letter updated on all pages.
CN099776ECN - Update to implement new EC REP address, BSI references, logo, trademarks,
24-MAR-2020 X
and add new accessory information.
CN103771ECN - Update to add information for the new solid state illuminator, correction to
05-MAR-2021 Y touchscreen calibration, change labeling diagrams, new BSS accessory codes, new EMC
information, and additions to the facility pressure notes.
Revision letters not used: A - M, O-Q, S, U
** Trademarks are property of their respective owners.
ii 8065753060 Rev. Y
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION ONE - GENERAL INFORMATION PAGE #
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Intended Use(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Indications for Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
System Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Constellation™ Vision System Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
System Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
Source Pressure Requirements (Air or N2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
Accessory Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
Environmental Issues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
User Information - Environmental Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
Universal Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration - Electromagnetic Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
Equipment contains radio transmitters: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
USA – Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
Canada – Industry of Canada (IC) Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15
Canada – Industry of Canada (IC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15
Europe – Radio Equipment Directive (RED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
Summary of Constellation™ RFID Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
INTREPID™ AutoSert™ IOL Injector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20
Diathermy, Cautery, Coagulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25
Product Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28
Illuminator Professional User's Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29
Laser Professional User's Information: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31
Laser Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32
SECTION TWO - DESCRIPTION PAGE #

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
Front Panel Displays And Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Startup Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Main Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Menu Bar: Footswitch Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Menu Bar: Doctor & Procedure Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
Menu Bar: Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL - INF/IRR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL - IOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL - REFLUX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL - PROBES/TIPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL - AutoSert™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL - OZil™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - FOOTSWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - FOOTSWITCH BUTTONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29
Default Footswitch Button Actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - FOOTSWITCH - RANGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - FOOTSWITCH - RAMPING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - FOOTSWITCH - GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - LASER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SOUND SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
Menu Bar: Options - SYSTEM SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37
8065753060 Rev. Y iii
Menu Bar: Options - SYSTEM SETTINGS - SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37
Menu Bar: Options - SYSTEM SETTINGS - CONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38
Menu Bar: Options - SYSTEM SETTINGS - REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39
Menu Bar: Options - SYSTEM SETTINGS - VIDEO OVERLAY (OPTIONAL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40
Menu Bar: Options - MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43
Menu Bar: Options - EXTRAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43
Menu Bar: Options - EXTRAS - AUTO GAS FILL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44
Menu Bar: Options - EXTRAS - CONSUMABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45
Menu Bar: Options - EXTRAS - UPDATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45
Menu Bar: Options - INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.46
Menu Bar: Options - INFO - VIEW/COPY/DELETE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.46
Menu Bar: Options - INFO - EVENT LOG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49
Menu Bar: Options - INFO - ON DEMAND UPLOAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
Menu Bar: Options - INFO - ABOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50
Menu Bar: Options - INFO - HELP (?) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51
Menu Bar: NEGENUITY™ Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.53
Menu Bar - Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57
Screen Navigation Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57
GLOBAL CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58
Infusion Global Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.58
Infusion Global Control States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.61
Fluid/Air Exchange (FAX) Global Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62
Irrigation Global Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.63
Decrease Value button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.63
Diathermy Global Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64
Illuminator Global Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.65
SYSTEM STATE AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66
Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.66
Basic Setup: The Fluidics Setup Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67
Basic Setup: The Probe Setup Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.68
Basic Setup: The Handpiece Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.69
Basic Setup: The Accessories Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.71
Basic Setup: Illuminators Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.72
Basic Setup: Lasers Setup Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.73
Basic Setup: Status Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.74
Step-by-Step Setup Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.75
Start Prime Button And Popup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78
Consumables Button And Popup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79
SURGERY SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80
Auto Gas Fill (AGF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.80
The General Purpose Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.81
Surgery Screen: Surgical Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.82
Surgery Screen: Surgical Controls - More Information Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.83
Surgery Screen: Surgical Controls - Surgical Control Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.83
Surgery Screen: Surgical Controls - Surgical Control Drop Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.84
Surgery Screen: Surgical Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.84
Surgery Screen: Surgical Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.84
Surgery Screen: Surgical Procedures - Accurus™ Classic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.85
Surgery Screen: Surgical Procedures - Custom Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.86
Surgery Screen: The Surgical Step Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.86
Surgery Screen: Surgical Submode Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.87
SURGICAL MODES AND SUBMODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.88
VITRECTOMY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.90
Vitrectomy: 3D SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.90
Vitrectomy: MOMENTARY SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93
Vitrectomy: PROPVAC SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.96
Vitrectomy: WETANT SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.99
Vitrectomy: VITDRY SUBMODE (available only when an anterior cassette is installed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.101
PHACO MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.103
Phaco Mode: 3D SUBMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.107
Phaco Mode: 3D SUBMODE - OZIL™ 3D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.109
Phaco Mode: BURST SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.110
Phaco Mode: CUSTOM SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.113
Phaco Mode: CUSTOM SUBMODE - OZIL™ CUSTOM PULSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.115
Phaco Mode: PULSED SUBMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.117
Phaco Mode: PULSED SUBMODE - OZIL™ PULSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.119
iv 8065753060 Rev. Y
Phaco Mode: CONTINUOUS SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.120
Phaco Mode: CONTINUOUS SUBMODE - OZIL™ CONTINUOUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.122
FRAGMENTATION MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.123
Fragmentation Mode: 3D SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.123
Fragmentation Mode: FIXED SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.125
Fragmentation Mode: LINEAR SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.127
Fragmentation Mode: MOMENTARY SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.129
IRRIGATION/ASPIRATION (I/A) MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.131
EXTRUSION MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.133
AUTOSERT™ IOL INJECTOR MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.135
LASER MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.138
FORCEPS MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.142
SCISSORS MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.143
Scissors Mode: MULTICUT SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.143
Scissors Mode: PROP SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.145
VISCOUS FLUID CONTROL (VFC) MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.147
Viscous Fluid Control (VFC) Mode: EXTRACT SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.147
Viscous Fluid Control (VFC) Mode: INJECT SUBMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.148
END CASE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.150
End Case Summary Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.150
Metrics Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.151
Setup Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.151
Setup Form: Editing the Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.152
Setup Form: Editing the Form - Customizing Table Cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.152
Setup Form: Editing the Form - Creating New Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.153
Demo Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.154
Probes and Handpieces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.159
Microsmooth™ Infusion Sleeves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.163
The Constellation™ Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.168
Consumable Pack Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.170
Consumable Pack Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.170
SECTION THREE - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS PAGE #

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Initial System Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Positioning the Instrument Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Connecting the Constellation™ Vision System to a Facility Pressure Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
Installation And Replacement of ISPAN** Gas Bottles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Connecting A Purepoint Laser to the Constellation™ Vision System in “Tethered” Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Standard Definition Video Overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
High Definition Video Overlay (HDVO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Negenuity™ 3D Visualization System Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Constellation™ Procedure Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
SECTION FOUR - CARE AND MAINTENANCE PAGE #

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Care and Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Upon Completion of the Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Sterilization Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Disposal of Xenon Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Replacement of Remote Control Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Laser Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Laser Power Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Laser Energy Matrix for Calibration Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Setting the Calibration Factor (Terminal Efficiencies). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Laser Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
8065753060 Rev. Y v
SECTION FIVE - TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE #
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
System Fault Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
System Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
System Advisory Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
System Information Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Power Lost/Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Recovery from an Unrecoverable Fault Screen or Unexpected Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
SECTION SIX - ACCESSORIES AND PARTS PAGE #

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
General Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
General Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Laser Accessories and Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Posterior Segment Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Anterior Segment Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
Alcon PurePoint™ Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope (LIO) - HEINE**. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
Alcon PurePoint™ Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope (LIO) - KEELER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21
SECTION SEVEN - INDEX PAGE #

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
vi 8065753060 Rev. Y
FOREWORD
This Operator’s Manual is designed to acquaint the operator and operating room personnel with
the Constellation™ Vision System. The manual presents an organized summary of the operating
principles, main components, safety features, and instructions for care and use of the instrument.
The information in this manual should be supplemented with reference works on laser theory and the
interaction of laser energy with biologic tissues. No attempt is made in this manual to answer all the
questions that arise during the use of the instrument in medical procedures.
Questions concerning technique, safety and effectiveness should be referred to pertinent publications
or recognized medical experts in laser surgery. Physicians should not attempt to treat patients with
this instrument if not thoroughly familiar with its operation, or if in doubt as to its safe operation. All
personnel authorized to use this instrument should be required to be thoroughly familiar with this
manual.
Please contact Alcon for complete technical support and service if you have questions concerning any
aspect of this instrument’s operation or if it fails to perform satisfactorily.
To order supplies in U.S.A.:

800-862-5266
FAX: 800-241-0677
Outside U.S.A.: Contact your local Alcon representative for supplies.
8065753060 Rev. Y vii

IMPORTANT NOTICE
Equipment improvement is an on-going process and, as such, changes may be made to the equipment
after this manual is printed.
Pay close attention to WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in this manual. WARNINGS are written to
protect individuals from bodily harm. CAUTIONS are written to protect the instrument from damage.
Illustrations contained in this manual are for reference only.
It is recommended that maintenance be performed by qualified Alcon Field Personnel.
Alcon Surgical shall not be liable for any damage resulting from failure to comply with the enclosed
instructions.
Alcon reserves the right to change specifications without further notice.
Operator Profile
The Constellation™ Vision System is designed to be operated by two basic groups; surgeons and
nurses/scrub techs. The surgeon focus is primarily constrained to the footswitch and display panel.
The design of the footswitch allows the surgeon to map any function to any switch position, assuming
the function is valid in a particular scenario. The display screen was designed to mount on an
articulating arm to allow optimum placement of the display so the surgeon can reference it at any
time. The design also incorporates items specifically for nurses and scrub technicians, who routinely
control the machine via the front panel and remote control. The design incorporates color coding on
all connectors and tubing to facilitate easy identification of the ports. In addition, the graphical user
interface closely resembles controls commonly found on web sites, which this operator profile is
expected to be highly proficient at using.
CAUTION
U.S. Federal Law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician only.
viii 8065753060 Rev. Y

WARNINGS!
For systems containing the optional laser module: Use of controls or adjustments, or
performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
laser radiation exposure.
A qualified technician must perform a visual inspection of the following components

every twelve months. In case of a deficiency, do not use the system; call Alcon Technical
Services.
- Warning Labels
- Power Cord
- Fuses
A qualified technician must check ground continuity and both polarities for leakage
current every twelve months to ensure they are within the applicable standard (for
example: IEC 60601-1). Values must be recorded, and if they are above the applicable
standard, or 50% above your first measurement, do not use the system; call Alcon
Technical Services.
Use of accessories and cables other than those provided may result in increased
emissions or decreased immunity of the system. Portable and mobile RF
communications equipment can affect this medical electrical equipment.
MAGNETIC AND ELECTRICAL INTERFERENCE - Magnetic and electrical fields are

capable of interfering with the proper performance of the device. For this reason make
sure that all external devices operated in the vicinity of the device comply with the
relevant EMC requirements. X-ray equipment, magnetic resonance tomography (MRT),
nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR), or magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) devices are
possible sources of interference as they may emit higher levels of electromagnetic
radiation. See the Magnetic Resonance Unsafe icon in Figure 1-3.
If you have questions, or want additional information, please contact your local Alcon representative
or the Alcon Technical Services Department at:

15800 Alton Parkway
Irvine, California 92618
(949) 753-1393
FAX (949) 753-6614
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, transmitted, or stored in a retrieval
system, in any form or by any means; photocopying, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise;
without prior written permission from Alcon Laboratories, Inc.
8065753060 Rev. Y ix
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
x LAST PAGE OF THIS SECTION 8065753060 Rev. Y

SECTION ONE - GENERAL INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION
The Constellation™ Vision System is a multifunctional surgical instrument for use in
anterior and posterior segment ophthalmic surgeries. The product’s capabilities include
driving a variety of handpieces that provide the ability to cut vitreous and tissues,
emulsify the lens, illuminate the posterior segment of the eye, and apply diathermy to
stop bleeding. Vacuum is used to remove ocular matter from the eye and is provided
by connecting tubing from the handpiece to a port on the fluidics cassette. Irrigation/
infusion capability is provided to replace fluid in the eye, and enters the eye directly
through either an infusion cannula or a handpiece. The graphical operator interface is
menu driven. The operator provides inputs using the touchscreen panel, the remote
control, and the footswitch.
An optional, fully integrated laser module is available that can be installed in the base.
The laser delivers a visible 532 nm green treatment beam designed for ophthalmic use.
Illuminator
Table Top
Tray Arm Assembly

Handpiece, Probe,
and Accessory
Connector Panel
Fluidics Module
(cassette inserted
Base her)
Auxillary Illuminator
Laser Module
Footswitch
(storage position)
Figure 1-1 The Constellation™ Vision System

The Constellation™ Vision System is a multifunctional surgical instrument used in anterior and posterior
segment ophthalmic surgeries.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.1

The NEGENUITY™ 3D Visualization System (NEGENUITY™ system) can be
connected to the Constellation™ system and operates as an adjunct to the surgical
microscope during surgery. It consists of a 3D stereoscopic, high-definition digital video
camera and workstation that displays images, real-time or from recordings, on a flat-
panel, high-definition, digital 3D display. Surgical parameters from the Constellation™
system can be overlaid on the NEGENUITY™ display, and video recording by the
NEGENUITY™ system can be initiated from the Constellation™ footswitch.
INTENDED USE(S)
The Constellation™ Vision System is intended to be used in both anterior segment (i.e.
phacoemulsification, removal of cataracts, and intraocular lens injection) and posterior
segment (i.e., vitreoretinal) ophthalmic surgery in addition to the indications included
with the optional laser.
INDICATIONS FOR USE
The Constellation™ Vision System is an ophthalmic microsurgical system that is indicated
for both anterior segment (i.e. phacoemulsification, removal of cataracts, and intraocular
lens injection) and posterior segment (i.e., vitreoretinal) ophthalmic surgery in addition
to the indications included with the optional Next Generation laser. The AutoSert™ IOL
Injector Handpiece is intended to deliver qualified AcrySof ™ intraocular lenses into the
eye following cataract removal.
The AutoSert™ IOL Injector Handpiece achieves the functionality of injection of intraocular
lenses. The AutoSert™ is indicated for use with AcrySof ™ lenses SN60WF, SN6AD1,
SN6AT3 through SN6AT9, as well as approved AcrySof ™ lenses that are specifically
indicated for use with this inserter, as indicated in the approved labeling of those lenses.
Flex-Tip Laser Probes
• Retinal photocoagulation, panretinal photocoagulation and intravitreal
photocoagulation of vascular and structural abnormalities of the retina and
choroid including:
- Proliferative and nonproliferative retinopathy (including diabetic)
- Choroidal neovascularization secondary to age-related macular
degeneration
- Retinal tears and detachments
- Macular edema
- Retinopathy of prematurity
- Choroidal neovascularization
- Leaking microaneurysms
• Iridotomy/Iridectomy for treatment of Chronic/Primary Open Angle Glaucoma
(COAG,POAG) and Refractory Glaucoma.
• Trabeculoplasty for treatment of Chronic/Primary Open Angle Glaucoma
(COAG,POAG) and refractory Glaucoma.
• And other laser treatments including:
- Internal sclerostomy
- Lattice degeneration
- Central and Branch Retinal Vein Occlusion
- Suturelysis
- Vascular and pigmented skin lesions
1.2 8065753060 Rev. Y
UltraVit Probes
• Vitreous aspiration and cutting
• Membrane cutting and aspiration
• Lens removal
Endoilluminator Probes
• Endoillumination
Valved Entry Systems
• Scleral incision
• Canulae for posterior segment instrument access
• Venting (of valved cannulae)
Infusion Cannulas
• Posterior segment infusion (liquid or gas)
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
The Constellation™ Vision System is designed with a modular approach that allows
the system to be highly configurable to meet the needs of many users. The system is
designed around the Table Top where the accessories listed below can be added for
expanded functionality.
• Table Top
• Base
• Laser Module
• Auxiliary Illuminator
• Tray Arm Assembly (includes ballast and support column)
• High Definition Video Overlay (HDVO)
The Table Top can operate as a standalone unit (Configuration 1), and is also the
primary user interface that operates and controls the add-on accessories. The table
below shows the nine possible configurations for the Constellation™ Vision System.
Part numbers and ordering information is located in Section Six of this manual.
Table 1-1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS1
Table Tray Arm Laser Auxiliary
Configuration Base HDVO
Top Assy Module Illuminator
1 x Optional
2 x x Optional
3 x x x Optional
4 x x x x Optional
5 x x x x Optional
6 x x x x x Optional
7 x x x Optional
8 x x x Optional
9 x x x x Optional
1 All Illuminators are equivalent in function and may contain either a lamp or light channels. Xenon-based
Illumination module refers to a lamp and phosphor-based illumination module refers to a light channel.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.3

Table 1-2 CONSTELLATION™ VISION PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PRESSURIZED INFUSION/IRRIGATION @SEA LEVEL:
TABLETOP: Range: 0 to 120 mmHg1
Dimensions Accuracy: ±(2% of setpoint +5 mmHg)

51 cm (20 in) x 48 cm (19 in) x 61 cm (24 in)
(length x width x height):
0 - 20 cc/min. for infusion (20 Ga)
Flow Rate:
Weight: 61 kg (135 lb) 0 - 60 cc/min. for irrigation
BASE: Setpoint Transient

500 ms maximum
Response Time:
74 cm (29 in) x 74 cm (29 in) x 97 cm
Dimensions: 1 Liquid, measured at the infusion or irrigation cassette outlet, at sea level.
(38 in)
• Base (no add-ons): 52.12 kg (115 lb) IOP CONTROLLED INFUSION:
• Base w/Illuminator: 58 kg (128 lb)
Weight: Setpoint Range: 0-120 mmHg
• Base w/Illuminator & Laser: 64.5 kg
(142.2 lb) Repeatability2: ± 2 mmHg3
Note: If a base other than the optional Alcon base is used, it must Setpoint Response Time: <500 ms (20 Ga)
be able to hold up to 250 pounds.
Transient Disturbance
TRAYARM: <2000 ms4
Response Time:
• Tray: 56 cm (22 in) x 36 cm (14 in) Flow Range: 0-20 cc/min
• Arm Fully Extended: 127 cm (50 in)
Dimensions: 2 BSS™ Irrigating Solution Dual chamber mode.
• Support Column: 110 cm (43 in) x 13
3 BSS™ Irrigating Solution medium, 20 gauge high flow Cannula, steady
cm (5 in) x 15 cm (6 in)
state condition at rated flow range
• Tray and Arm: 11.7 kg (25.8 lb) 4 Transient condition from no flow state to 10 cc/min
Weight:
• Support Column: 5.5 kg (12.3 lb)
ASPIRATION/SUCTION @SEA LEVEL:
SAFE WORKING LOADS:
Standard & Reduced
Instrument Tray: 9.0 kg (19.8 lb) 0-650 mmHg Vacuum
Pressure Range:
Footswitch Storage Hook: 6.0 kg (13.2 lb) Minimal Pressure Range: 0-600 mmHg Vacuum
IV Pole Bottle Hanger: 2.0 kg (4.4 lb) Pressure Accuracy: ±(2% of Setpoint +5 mmHg)
Accessory Drawer: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb) Flow Range:
Posterior Modalities: 0-20 cc/min
BALLAST: Anterior Modalities: 0-60 cc/min
Dimensions: 35 cm (14 in) x 35 cm (14 in) x 5 cm (2 in) Transient Response From 0 to -400 mmHg @0 cc/min
Weight: 25.5 kg (56.2 lb) Time (Standard Pressure 10-90% Rise Time:300 msec max
Range): 90-10% Fall Time: 300 msec max
ENVIRONMENTAL LIMITATIONS:
VACUUM @ SEA LEVEL:
Operating Non-Operating
Vitrectomy: 0 to 650 mmHg
-125 to 2000 m -125 to 3000 m Fragmentation: 0 to 650 mmHg
Altitude:
(-410 to 6562 feet) (-410 to 9843 feet) Extrusion: 0 to 650 mmHg
Extraction: 0 to 650 mmHg
10° C to 35° C -10 to 55°C
Temperature: Irrigation/Aspiration: 0 to 650 mmHg
(50° F to 95° F) (14° F to 131° F)
Phacoemulsification: 0 to 650 mmHg
10% to 95% 10% to 95%
LOW PRESSURE AIR SOURCE (LPAS) @SEA LEVEL:
Relative Humidity: without without
condensation condensation 0 – 120 mmHg (air, measured at cassette
Pressure Range:
connection, at sea level)
Console: IPX0
IP CODE
Footswitch: IPX8 Pressure Accuracy: ±(2% of Setpoint +5mmHg)
The console accepts the following ranges Flow Rate: 1.2 slpm minimum at 120 mmHg
or input commercial power voltages
and frequencies and meets the leakage VITRECTOMY:
currents specified in IEC 60601-1. Submodes: 3D, Momentary, PropVac, VitWet
ELECTRICAL
Protection against electrical shock is
REQUIREMENTS:
Class I. Cut Rate:
HyperVit™ 20000 Probe: 200 to 20000 cpm
100-120 Vac 50/60 Hz 12 A max. UltraVit™ 10000 Probe: 100 to 10000 cpm
220-240 Vac 50/60 Hz 6 A max. UltraVit™ 7500 Probe: 100 to 7500 cpm
UltraVit™ 5000 Probe: 100 to 5000 cpm
FOOTSWITCH UltraVit™ 2500 Probe: 100 to 2500 cpm
Dimensions 43.2 cm (17 in) x 26 cm (10.25 in) x 14 DIATHERMY:
(length x width x height): cm (5.5 in)
Frequency: 1.5 Mhz ± 10%
Weight: 5.4 kg (12 pounds)
Waveshape: Sinusoidal
The footswitch construction is water tight
Environmental: in compliance with IEC 60601-1 and IEC 10 Watts ±20% at 100% setting with 75
Output power:
60601-2-2. ±10% ohm non-inductive load, 0.4 A max
The footswitch is connected to the 163 Vpp maximum at 100% setting
Output voltage:
console via electrical cable. All power and without load
Electrical:
communications enter/exit the footswitch
from this cable. Power range: 0 - 100% of maximum output power
1.4 8065753060 Rev. Y

Table 1-2 CONSTELLATION™ VISION PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS...continued
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AUTO-GAS FILLING (AGF):
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS...continued Maximum Gas Pressure: 10 psig
DIATHERMY ACCESSORIES (Rated Voltage): Fill Purity: See gas concentration chart in Section Two.
Single Use Bipolar Cables: 846 Vpp AUTO-STOPCOCK:
1200 Vpp Response Time: <0.5 seconds

Reusable Bipolar Cables: Pressure (Liquid): 0-120 mmHg
Rated Flow (Liquid): 20 cc/min
All Brushes: 1410 Vpp Pressure (LPAS): 0-120 mmHg
All Forceps: 1110 Vpp Rated Flow (LPAS): 1.2 slpm
ILLUMINATION: PHACOEMULSIFICATION:
• 0-200 hrs: 16 ± 6 lumens at 115% set Submodes: Burst, Pulsed, Continuous

Light Output through Tip Stroke @ 100%: 3.5 ± 0.5 mils
point 1
20GA Fiber Probe Tip Velocity 12.1 m/s
• 201-400 hrs: 16 ± 6 lumens at 115%
(8065750971):
set point 1 (Stroke x Frequency x π)
Frequency: 30 - 46.5 KHz
• 0-200 hrs: 23 ± 13 lumens at 115% set Pulse Rate Range: 0-100 pulses per second
Light Output through
point 1 Burst Length: 2.5 sec – user adjustable
23GA Fiber Probe
• 201-400 hrs: 23 ± 13 lumens at 115% Burst Pulse durations: 5 ms to 500 ms
(8065750972):
set point 1
OZil™:
• 0-200 hrs: 23 ± 13 lumens at 115% set
Light Output through Frequency: 30 - 46.5 KHz
point 1
25GA Fiber Probe Pulse Rate Range: 0-100 pps
• 201-400 hrs: 23 ± 13 lumens at 115%
(8065750976): Burst Pulse Durations: 5 ms to 500 ms
set point 1
1 Based on a representative nominal UFR fiber. ANTERIOR VITRECTOMY:
FRAGMENTATION: Submodes: Wet, Dry

Cut Rate: 100 to probe maximum
Submodes: Linear, Fixed, Momentary
Tip Stroke @ 100%: 3.1 ± 0.5 mils at 100% power LASER (optional):
Tip Velocity 10.8 m/s Treatment beam:
(Stroke x Frequency x π) Class: 4
Resonant Frequency: 43.5 ± 3.0 KHz Power: 30 mW to 2 W (maximum)
Pulse Rate Range: 0 – 100 pps Wavelength: 532 nm
SCISSORS: Aiming beam:
Submodes: Proportional, Multi-Cut Class: 2
Proportional Pressure: 0-50 psi @sea level Power: less than 1 mW
Multi Cut Rate: single cut to 450 cpm Wavelength: 635 nm ± 5 nm
PROPORTIONAL AND CONTINUOUS REFLUX @SEA LEVEL: INTREPID™ AutoSert™ IOL Injector:
Pressure Range: 0 to 120 mmHg Max Speed: 4.4 mm/s
Pressure Accuracy: ±(2% of Setpoint +5 mmHg)
DOCTOR MEMORIES:
MICRO REFLUX:
No hard limit; advisory displayed when
Storage Capacity:
Pressure Range: 70 ± 30 mmHg2 less than 15% of disk space is available.
Volume: 15 ± 10 μL2
TIMER:
2 measured with unoccluded 20 Ga UltraVit™ probe and aspiration tubing,
Range: 0 to 99:99:99
50% setting.
Resolution: 1s
VISCOUS FLUID CONTROL:
REMOTE CONTROL:
Submodes: Inject, Extract
Method: Infrared
0 to 551.6 KPascal @ Standard Source Channels: 4
Pressure (0 to 80 psi)
Injection Pressure:
0 to 482.7 KPascal @ Reduced Source
Pressure (0 to 70 psi)
Extract Vacuum at Sea
0 to 650 mmHg
Level:
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.5

Table 1-3 TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Term or Abbreviation Description
ACMI connector The type of connector used on fiber optic probes.
AGF Auto-Gas Filling
BSS PLUS™ Intraocular Sterile intraocular irrigating solution enriched with bicarbonate, dextrose, and glutathione.
Irrigating Solution
cc/min Cubic centimeters per minute. A unit of flow.
A mandatory conformity mark on many products placed on the single market in the
CE
European Economic Area (EEA)
cmH2O Centimeters of water. A unit of pressure.
cpm Cuts Per Minute
CSA Canadian Standards Association
A discrete footpedal position at which more force is required to depress the footpedal
Detent
to the next position.
Diathermy The production of heat in body tissues by electric current for therapeutic purposes.
Extrusion A mode where vacuum is available to remove fluid/matter.
F/AX Fluid Air Exchange
Frag Fragmentation
GA Gauge
A function whose status and controls are independent of the current footpedal position
Global Function
and surgery mode.
I/A Irrigation/Aspiration
I/O Input/Output
IOP Intraocular Pressure
IEC International Electromechanical Commission
ISO International Standards Organization
International Protection code - Solid objects X (not specified) water 8/0 (continuous
IPX0/8
immersion/no test required)
IV Intravenous
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
mmHg Millimeter of Mercury. A unit of vacuum and pressure.
System configuration in which the Constellation™ tabletop and base are paired
Monolith
together.
N/A Not Applicable
PEL Patient Eye Level. A difference in height between the cassette and the patient eye level.
PIN Personal Identification Number
psi Pounds per Square Inch. A unit of pressure.
pps Pulses Per Second
RS-232 A standard for serial binary data signals commonly used in computer serial ports.
slpm Standard Liters Per Minute
TUV Technical Inspection Association
A classification for devices that have conductive contact with the patient, or have
Type BF
applied parts that are fixed in medium or long term contact with the patient
U/S Ultrasound
USB Universal Serial Bus
VFC Viscous Fluid Control
VGA Video Graphics Array
Vit Vitrectomy. Extraction of the vitreous from the vitreous cavity.
1.6 8065753060 Rev. Y

LABELING
Labels (including silk-screened labels) and icons may vary according to the date of
manufacture of your system and are shown for reference only. Figure 1-2 shows the
location of system labels, while Figure 1-3 defines icons that are used on the exterior
of the system and in the graphical user interface displayed on the screen.
IV Pole Max Load Label
Instrument Tray Maxiumum Load Label

(molded into instrument tray)
Footswitch Max Load Label
Footswitch Labels:
- Footswitch Product Label
- Footswitch UDI Label
Front of System
Remote Control Label
Bottom of Remote Control
Figure 1-2 LABEL LOCATIONS ON THE CONSTELLATION™ VISION SYSTEM

The labels shown are for reference only and may not be the same revision as the actual labels on your
system. Refer to the labels on your system for applicable system information.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.7

System Product Label Unique Device Identification (UDI) Label
Source Pressure
Label
Tray Arm Warning Label

Auto-Gas Filling
(AGF) Label
Laser Warning Label
Laser Conformity Label
Drawer Maximum Load Label

(located inside on the upper
rear of drawer)
Rear of System
Figure 1-2 LABEL LOCATIONS ON THE CONSTELLATION™ VISION SYSTEM - continued

The labels shown are for reference only and may not be the same revision as the actual labels on your
system. Refer to the labels on your system for applicable system information.
1.8 8065753060 Rev. Y

Air Pressure I/O Data
AutoSert™ Input
Surgical Step
Auto Gas Filling Key Switch
(AGF)
Extrusion
Surgical Step
Alternating Current Laser Connection
Forceps AutoSert™ IOL Laser Emergency

Surgical Step Injector Stop Switch
European
Conformity Marking 1
Fragmentation Laser Port 1
Surgical Step OSHA
recognizedNRTL,
TÜV SÜD America
mark, providing Tethered Laser
electrical safety
Irrigation/Aspiration certification to
Surgical Step North American Magnetic
MR
requirements for Resonance Unsafe
medical devices.
Coagulation Manufacturer
Laser
Surgical Step Connector
Connection Multi-Function Port
Indicator
Phaco
Surgical Step Network
Dangerous Voltage Connection
Scissors Dangerous Voltage Non-ionizing

(black symbol with
Surgical Step
yellow background) Radiation
Viscous Dr. Filter Off

Fluid
Control
(VFC) Eject
Surgical Step On
Equipotentiality Displays the Help

Vitrectomy selections
Surgical Step
Follow Instructions
for Use (white Ready
figure with blue
Expand background) Regulatory
Window Compliance Mark
Footswitch Australia
Help Video Remote Door

Forceps Lamp Laser Status
Modify Remote Interlock

Hot
Caution: Consult
!
Power Scissors Connector
accompanying
documents
General Warning
(black symbol with Serial In/Out
Save yellow background)
Standby State
Illuminator
AC AC In
SYSTEM
AC Out System Fault
AC FAULT
Intelligent Phaco
Aiming Beam System Information
Figure 1-3 ICONS USED WITH THE CONSTELLATION™ VISION SYSTEM

Icons used with the system console are identified and illustrated here for reference only.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.9

Type BF Applied Video Recorder

Part REC Control Video In
U/S Handpiece
Connector Viscous Fluid Video Out
Control Connector
USB Connector
Use appropriate Vitreous Cutter

Display HDMI Out Connection
take-back system
Figure 1-3 Continued from previous page.
SYSTEM INSTALLATION
In the USA contact the Alcon Technical Services Department for uncrating and
installation at (800) 832-7827. Outside the USA contact your local Alcon affiliate.
SOURCE PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS (AIR OR N2)

The Constellation™ Vision System is designed to operate using clean filtered air
or N2 with different levels of source pressure. The system operates automatically
with pressures of 58 (4 bar) to 120 psi (8.3 bar). NOTES: Between 4 bar and 5
bar, vacuum performance is reduced. Between 4 bar and 5.5 bar, VFC inject
performance is reduced.
WARNING!
Verify tank pressure/facility pressure prior to surgery. If air source replacement
is needed during surgery, be sure to remove instruments from the eye and plug
cannulas as necessary. The system will revert to a backup BSS™ pressure of
30 mmHg.
ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
Accessory equipment connected to or used with this equipment must be certified
according to the respective IEC Standard (e.g., IEC 60601-1 for medical equipment).
The Constellation™ Vision System is shipped with English and metric fittings
compliant with EN ISO 5359. Anyone connecting additional equipment or otherwise
causing a different system configuration than provided by Alcon is responsible for
continued compliance to the requirements of System Standard IEC 60601-1-1 and
EN ISO 5359. If in doubt, consult the Technical Services department or your local
Alcon representative.
WARNING!
Any non-medical equipment (i.e., VCR, monitor, MP3 player, etc.) must be placed
outside the patient environment (at least 1.5 meters away from patient).
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES
Follow local governing ordinances and recycling plans regarding disposal or
recycling of device components.
1.10 8065753060 Rev. Y

USER INFORMATION - ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
The equipment that you have purchased requires the use of natural resources for its
production and operation. This equipment may also contain hazardous substances
which could have a potential effect on the environment and human health if disposed
of improperly.
In order to avoid the entry of any such substances into our environment, and to
promote natural resource conservation, please install, maintain, and operate the
equipment in accordance with the instructions. Information on the location of
hazardous substances, resource consumption and emissions of the equipment can
be found throughout this Operator's Manual. Please use the appropriate take-back
systems. Such take-back systems reuse or recycle many of the materials in your
end-of-life equipment in a beneficial way. Please contact your local Alcon office for
assistance in take-back options through Alcon or other providers.
The crossed-bin symbol located on this equipment reminds you to use take-back
systems, while also emphasizing the requirement to collect waste equipment
separately, and not dispose of it as unsorted municipal waste. The Pb notation, if
Pb present, indicates that the labeled device contains greater than 0.004% lead.
If you need more information on the collection, reuse or recycle systems available to
you, please contact your local or regional waste administration, or contact your local
Alcon office for more information.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.11

UNIVERSAL PRECAUTIONS
Universal precautions shall be observed by all people who come in contact with the
instrument and/or accessories to help prevent their exposure to blood-borne pathogens
and/or other potentially infectious materials. In any circumstance, wherein the exact
status of blood or body fluids/tissues encountered are unknown, it shall be uniformly
considered potentially infectious and handled in accordance with OSHA guidelines.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC) COMPLIANCE
The Constellation™ Vision System is designed to work in the professional healthcare

facility environment
It is important to install and use the equipment in accordance with the instructions
in order to prevent harmful interference with other devices in the vicinity. If this
equipment causes harmful interference to other devices (determined by turning the
equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the other device(s).

• Increase the distance between the equipment.
• Connect this equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
other device(s) is connected.
• Consult the manufacturer or your Alcon representative for help.
WARNINGS!
Use of the Constellation™ Vision System adjacent to or stacked with other equipment
should be avoided because it could result in improper operation. If such use is
necessary, this equipment and the other equipment should be observed to verify that
they are operating normally.
Use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified or provided
by the manufacturer of the Constellation™ Vision System could result in increased
electromagnetic emissions or decreased electromagnetic immunity of Constellation™
Vision System and result in improper operation.
Table 1-4 Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration - Electromagnetic Emissions

The Constellation™ Vision System is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the system should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment-Guidance
RF emissions Group 1 The Constellation™ Vision System uses RF energy only for its internal function.
CISPR 11 Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference
in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class A The EMISSIONS characteristics of Constellation™ Vision System make it
CISPR 11 suitable for use in industrial areas and hospitals (CISPR 11 class A). If it is used
Harmonic emissions Class A in a residential environment (for which CISPR 11 class B is normally required),
IEC 61000-3-2 the Constellation™ Vision System might not offer adequate protection to radio-
frequency communication services. The user might need to take mitigation
Voltage fluctuations/ Complies measures, such as relocating or re-orienting the equipment.
Flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
1.12 8065753060 Rev. Y

Table 1-5 Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity
The Constellation™ Vision System is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the Constellation™ Vision System should assure that it is used in such
an environment.
Immunity Test IEC 60601 Test Level Compliance Level Electromagnetic Environment-Guidance
Electrostatic • ±8 kV contact • ±8 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete, or ceramic tile. If
discharge (ESD) • ±15 kV air • ±15 kV air floors are covered with synthetic material, the relative
IEC 61000-4-2 humidity should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast • ±2 kV for power • ±2 kV for power Mains power quality should be that of a typical
transient/burst supply lines supply lines commercial or hospital environment. To avoid laser
IEC 61000-4-4 • ±1 kV for input/output • ±1 kV for input/ stoppage due to fast transients avoid powering the
lines output lines Constellation™ Vision System on the same branch
circuit with sources that can generate fast transients
(inductive switching; e.g., high current motors).
Surge • ±1 kV differential • ±1 kV differential Mains power quality should be that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-5 mode mode commercial or hospital environment. To avoid
• ±2 kV common mode • ±2 kV common laser stoppage due to power-line surges consider
mode powering the Constellation™ Vision System through
branch circuit that has surge suppressor for
protection against lightning surges (e.g., at power
panel to surgical/office suite).
Voltage dips, short • 0% Ut for 0.5 cycle at • 0% Ut for 0.5 cycle Mains power quality should be that of a typical
interruptions, and 8 Ф angles; at 8 Ф angles; commercial or hospital environment. If the uses of
voltage variations • 0% 1 cycle; • 0% 1 cycle; the Constellation™ Vision System require continued
on power supply • 70% Ut for 25/30 • 70% Ut for 25/30 operation during power mains interruptions, it is
input lines cycles; cycles; recommended that the Constellation™ Vision System
IEC 61000-4-11 • 0% for 250/300 • 0% for 250/300 be powered from an uninterruptible power supply
cycles cycles with a minimum rating of 1200VA.
Power frequency 30 A/m, 50-60 Hz 30 A/m, 50-60 Hz Power frequency magnetic fields should be at
(50/60 Hz) levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical
magnetic field commercial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-8
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms The ISM (industrial, scientific and medical) bands
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz 150 kHz to 80 MHz between 150 kHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 MHz to
6 Vrms at ISM 6 Vrms at ISM 6.795 MHz; 13.553 MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957
Frequencies Frequencies MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70
MHz.
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m The dwell time should be at least 1 s and should
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.7 GHz 80 MHz to 2.7 GHz be no less than the response time of the slowest
responding function plus the settling time of the
IMMUNITY test system.
Proximity Fields Frequency Level Frequency Level The IMMUNITY TEST LEVELS specified in
IEC 61000-4-3 (MHz) (V/m) (MHz) (V/m) the table were calculated using the following
385 27 385 27 equation:
E=(6√P)/d
450 28 450 28
Where P is the maximum power in W, d is the
710, 745, 780 9 710, 745, 780 9
minimum separation distance in m, and E is the
810, 870, 930 28 810, 870, 930 28 Immunity Test Level in V/m. The factor of 6 is a
1720,1845,1970 28 1720,1845,1970 28 compromise for a range of antenna factors to
2450 28 2450 28 simplify the test.
5240,5500,5785 9 5240,5500,5785 9
WARNING!
Portable RF communications equipment (including peripherals such as antenna cables and external antennas)
should be used no closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to any part of the Constellation™ Vision System including
cables specified by the manufacturer. Otherwise, degradation of the performance of this equipment could
result.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.13

EQUIPMENT CONTAINS RADIO TRANSMITTERS:
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) device
- Frequency or frequency band of transmission: 13.56 MHz
- Type and frequency characteristics of the modulation: ASK
- The Effective Radiated Power (ERP): -119 dBm
Wireless LAN device (Compact USB WiFi Adapter WLI-UC-GNM) (Optional)

- Frequency or frequency band of transmission: 2.412 – 2.462 GHz
- Type and frequency characteristics of the modulation: DSSS, OFDM, SISO
- The Effective Radiated Power (ERP): 20.55 dBm for USA & Canada
USA – FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) COMPLIANCE

STATEMENT
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Change or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Alcon
may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.
FCC RADIATION EXPOSURE STATEMENT

CAUTION
To ensure that the radio transmitter complies with current FCC regulations limiting
both maximum output RF power and human exposure to radio frequency radiation, a
separate distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the unit’s antenna and
the body of the user and any nearby persons at all times, and unit’s antenna must not
be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
The availability of some specific channels and/or operational frequency bands are
country dependent and are firmware programmed at the factory to match the intended
destination. This firmware setting is not accessible by the end user.
1.14 8065753060 Rev. Y

CANADA – INDUSTRY OF CANADA (IC) COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
This device complies with Industry Canada Radio Standards Specification RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

Cet appareil ISM est conforme à la norme NMB-001 du Canada.
CANADA – INDUSTRY OF CANADA (IC)

This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Canada - Industrie du Canada (IC)
Cet appareil est conforme aux normes d’Industrie Canada RSS exemptes de licence.
Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) Cet appareil ne
doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles, et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute
interférence, y compris les interférences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement
indésirable de l’appareil.
Transmitter Antenna:
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using
an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by
Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna
type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power
(e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Antenne d’émetteur:
En vertu de la réglementation de l’industrie du Canada, cet émetteur de radio ne peut
être utilisé qu’avec un type d’antenne approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada
et seulement avec une valeur de gain inferieur ou égale au gain maximum approuvé
par Industrie Canada. Pour réduire les risques potentiels d’interférence à autrui,
le type d’antenne et son gain doivent être choisis de sorte que la puissance isotrope
rayonnée équivalente (PIRE) ne dépasse pas la valeur qui est nécessaire pour une
communication réussi.
Exposure of Humans to RF Fields:

This device complies with RF exposure limits for humans as called out in RSS-102.
Exposition des personnes aux champs radioélectriques:
Cet appareil est conforme aux limites d’exposition RF pour les êtres humains comme
elles le sont notifiées dans la norme RSS-102.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.15

EUROPE – RADIO EQUIPMENT DIRECTIVE (RED)
This device complies with the requirements of Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/
EU.
CAUTION
The radio equipment is intended to be used in all EU and AFTA countries. Outdoor use
may be restricted to certain frequencies and/or may require a license for operation.
Contact local Authority for procedure to follow.
Summary of Constellation™ RFID Certifications
United States Canada

FCC ID: VMC212-1 IC: 7345A-2121
Korea Australia
R-C-Alc-CONSTEL
Europe
Certification and Compliance Marks for Compact USB WiFi Adapter WLI-UC-GNM, as
specified in the Buffalo Technology labeling.
United States China

FCC ID: FDI-09102085-0 CMIIT ID: 2010DJ1757
KOREA
Canada
IC ID: 6102A-032
ASIA PACIFIC
JAPAN
003WWA100448
TAIWAN
CCAI 10LP0720T3
1.16 8065753060 Rev. Y

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS - GENERAL
Most of the warnings listed on the following pages are stated elsewhere in this manual;
however, for easy reference they are repeated here. If additional information is
required, please contact your local Alcon service representative, or the Technical
Services Department. For locations outside the USA, please contact your local
authorized Alcon Service/Sales office.
There are no user serviceable components inside the Constellation™ Vision System
console or footswitch. Refer all service issues to your factory-trained Alcon service
engineer.
• Please contact Alcon for instrument setup and in-service training.
• Good clinical practice dictates the testing for adequate irrigation, aspiration flow,
and operation as applicable for each handpiece prior to entering the eye.
• Initial setup instructions must be performed as outlined in this manual. If an error
message is displayed on the front panel, refer to the Troubleshooting section of
this Manual. If a problem persists, DO NOT PROCEED. Contact your local Alcon
Surgical Service Representative.
• Do not use the Constellation™ Vision System near flammable anesthetics.
• Provide at least two feet of clearance at the rear of the unit for fan intakes and
exhausts. This ensures unrestricted air flow for adequate console cooling.
• A handle on the optional base is used for moving the instrument. The cart should
be pulled, not pushed, over elevator and door thresholds.
• Use only Alcon-supplied A.C. power cords.
WARNINGS!
The Constellation™ Vision System power cord is a medical grade power cord with
the least leakage current per foot rating available. Extension of the power cord
by hospital staff is not recommended. Unauthorized extension of the power cord
could result in injury.
Do not use multiple portable socket (power strip) outlets with this system.
Store the tray arm prior to moving the instrument. See Section Three for instructions
on placing the tray arm in the stored position.
Route the footswitch cable, power cord and other cables connected to the
Constellation™ Vision System to avoid tripping.
To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a supply
mains with protective earth (Ground).
Modification of the equipment is NOT allowed without prior authorization from the
manufacturer. If this equipment is modified, appropriate inspection and testing
must be conducted to ensure continued safe use of the equipment.
Console isolation from mains is achieved through a two pole power switch. Turn
OFF power switch or unplug the power cord from wall outlet to achieve isolation
from mains.
Verify tank pressure/facility pressure prior to surgery. If air source replacement
is needed during surgery, be sure to remove instruments from the eye and plug
cannulas as necessary. The system will revert to a backup BSS™ pressure of
30 mmHg.
CAUTION
Risk of burns and fire. Do not use near conductive materials. Renew electrode cables
upon evidence of deterioration.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.17

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS - PRESSURIZED INFUSION/IRRIGATION SOLUTIONS IN BAGS
When using the Constellation™ Vision System in a pressurized infusion/irrigation
mode, or with IOP Control feature enabled, users need to take precautions to NOT
use BSS™ irrigating solution or other infusion/irrigation mediums from pliable,
collapsible containers (i.e. bags). The Constellation™ system, when used in these
pressurized modes, forces pressure into the infusion/irrigation container in order to
force the solution out of the container and into the cassette. The pressure employed
by the Constellation™ system may cause some infusion/irrigation bags to rupture and
cause disruption of the surgical procedures. Only approved glass containers and bags
should be used with the Constellation™ Vision System when employing modalities of
pressurized infusion/irrigation.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS - PATIENT EYE LEVEL/INFUSION PRESSURE
Patient eye level relative to the cassette can affect the infusion pressure being
delivered to the eye. Be sure to enter the Patient Eye Level Offset to ensure that the
displayed console readings reflect the true pressure being delivered to the eye.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS - PROBES AND HANDPIECES
WARNING!
If in the medical opinion of the physician a patient with a prion related disease
undergoes a high risk procedure, the instrument should be destroyed or be
processed according to local requirements.
Vitreous Probes
Do not operate vitreous probes in air. This could result in performance degradation
and/or potential hazard.
Ultrasonic (U/S) Handpieces
The OZil™ torsional and high performance U/S handpieces are surgical instruments
and must be handled with care. The handpiece tip should not touch any solid object
while in operation. Immediately following surgery the handpiece must be thoroughly
cleaned. Be sure the cord plug is completely dry before connecting it to console. For
cleaning and sterilization procedures, see the Directions for Use (DFU) supplied with
the handpiece.
During any ultrasonic procedure, metal particles may result from inadvertent touching
of the ultrasonic tip with a second instrument. Another potential source of metal
particles resulting from any ultrasonic handpiece may be the result of ultrasonic
energy causing micro abrasion of the ultrasonic tip.
If proper cleaning procedures are not performed immediately after each surgical
procedure, tissue debris and salts from irrigating solution may collect. This could
permanently damage the handpiece and could jeopardize cleanliness and/or create
biohazard conditions for the patient. Remove all debris prior to autoclaving handpiece.
The OZil™ torsional and U/S handpieces must be at room temperature just before
use. Allow the handpiece to air cool for at least 15 minutes after autoclaving; never
immerse the handpiece in liquid when hot. Power loss may occur if handpiece tip is
not securely tightened into Fragmentation and Phaco handpieces.
1.18 8065753060 Rev. Y

CAUTION
Never ultrasonically clean the Fragmentation, OZil™ torsional and ultrasonic
handpieces; irreparable damage will result.
Ensure that test chamber is filled with BSS™ sterile irrigating solution before tuning
the OZil™ torsional and U/S handpieces. Tuning a handpiece dry may result in
premature tip failure and breakage.
Do not test or operate the OZil™ torsional and U/S handpieces unless the tip is
immersed in BSS™ sterile irrigating solution or distilled water or is in surgical use.
Irreparable damage to the handpiece and tip can result if run dry.
The phaco handpiece and INTREPID™ AutoSert™ IOL Injector must be at room
temperature just before use. Allow the handpiece to air cool for at least 15 minutes
after autoclaving; never immerse the handpiece in liquid when hot.
WARNINGS!
Use of the OZil™ torsional and U/S handpiece in the absence of irrigation flow
and/or in the presence of reduced or lost aspiration flow can cause excessive
heating and potential corneal and/or scleral burns.
Use of the Fragmentation handpiece in the absence of aspiration flow can cause
excessive heating and potential scleral burns.
Use of an ultrasonic handpiece other than the OZil™ torsional or U/S, or use of a
handpiece repaired without Alcon authorization, is not permitted, and may result
in patient injury, including potential shock hazard to patient and/or operator.
Prior to sterilization, the OZil™ torsional and U/S handpieces should always
have the connector end cap secured and placed in the sterilization tray. This will
prevent damage to the connectors and handpieces during handling, and especially
during autoclaving.
Quenching a hot handpiece in water can cause damage and will void warranty.
Be sure handpiece is completely dry before connecting it to console. Damage to
handpiece and console may result if plugged in when wet.
The U/S tips supplied in the Constellation™ Vision System packs are only to be
used on the OZil™ torsional or U/S handpieces. Each U/S tip is intended to be used
only once per case, and then disposed of according to local governing ordinances.
Good clinical practice dictates testing for adequate irrigation, aspiration flow,
reflux, and operation as applicable for each handpiece prior to entering eye.
Appropriate use of Constellation™ Vision System parameters and accessories is
important for successful procedures. Use of low vacuum limits, low flow rates,
low irrigation pressure, high power settings, extended power usage, power
usage during occlusion conditions (beeping tones), failure to sufficiently aspirate
viscoelastic prior to using power, excessively tight incisions, and combinations
of the above actions may result in significant temperature increases at incision
site and inside the eye, and lead to severe thermal eye tissue damage.
Directing energy toward non-lens material, such as iris or capsule, may cause
mechanical and/or thermal tissue damage.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.19

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS - HANDPIECE TIPS
Scissors, frag, and phaco handpiece tips must be fully tightened to their handpieces. If
not secured properly, the handpieces may not operate correctly. Ensure, however, that
tips are not so tight that they cannot be removed after use. Use of a tool other than tip
wrenches supplied by Alcon may cause damage to the tip and/or handpiece.
WARNING!
Use 0.9 mm tips with 0.9 mm infusion sleeves. Use 1.1 mm tips with 1.1 mm
infusion sleeves. Mismatch of consumable components and use of settings not
specially adjusted for a particular combination of consumable components may
create a patient hazard.
Poor clinical performance will result if tip is not secured tightly to the handpiece.
INTREPID™ AUTOSERT™ IOL INJECTOR

CAUTIONS
• Do not ultrasonically clean the AutoSert™ IOL Injector connector. Ultrasonic
cleaning will cause irreparable damage.
• Use care when handling AutoSert™ IOL Injector, particularly when cleaning.
Always clean handpiece over a surface cushioned with a pad or rubber mat.
• Be sure handpiece cable connector is dry before connecting it to the console.
• Do not disconnect cable connector from Constellation™ system console until the
IOL Injector plunger is fully retracted.
• Do not immerse the AutoSert™ IOL Injector in any fluid when the plunger is not
retracted.
• As part of a properly maintained surgical environment, it is recommended that a
backup IOL injector be made available in the event the AutoSert™ IOL injector
handpiece does not perform as expected.
WARNINGS!
• The INTREPID™ AutoSert™ IOL Injector is non-sterile and must be cleaned and
sterilized prior to, and immediately after, each use.
• Never immerse the IOL injector in liquid after autoclaving; allow it to air cool for at
least 15 minutes. Quenching could result in a potentially hazardous condition for
the patient.
• The AutoSert™ IOL Injector delivery system is for the implantation of Alcon qualified
AcrySof ™ foldable IOLs. Unqualified lenses shall not be used with the system. See
INTREPID™ AutoSert™ IOL Injector DFU or AcrySof ™ IOL DFU, or contact your Alcon
representative, for qualified lens/cartridge combinations.
• The cartridge/IOL combination listed in the DFU, along with Alcon settings, has
been validated per section 5 of BS EN ISO 11979-3:2006. Appropriate use of injector
handpiece settings is important for successful IOL implantation. Inappropriate use
of settings may lead to a potentially hazardous condition for the patient.
• Fully retract plunger before detaching nosecone from AutoSert™ IOL Injector;
otherwise, this could expose non-sterile portion of shaft and result in a potentially
hazardous condition for the patient.
• For the intended IOL to be implanted, the proper Cartridge profile must be selected
from the driving console, and the proper plunger must be attached to the AutoSert™
IOL Injector. Failure to do so can result in a potentially hazardous condition for patient.
• The metal reusable plunger must be sterilized after each use. The reusable plunger
is to be installed onto the handpiece or into the wrench prior to sterilization.
1.20 8065753060 Rev. Y

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS - DIATHERMY FUNCTION
To ensure safe operation of the Diathermy function, use only Alcon cables and accessories.
Diathermy performance can be guaranteed only when using Alcon Surgical components
or Alcon-endorsed components. Cables should always be positioned in such a way that
contact with the patient is prevented.
See Figure 1-4 through Figure 1-6 for diathermy power specifications.
WARNING!
• Do not use the diathermy function on patients with pacemakers or implanted
defibrillatory devices. If electrosurgery is used on patients with implanted
cardiac pacemakers or defibrillatory devices or pacemaker electrodes, be
aware that irreparable damage to the pacemaker or defibrillatory device and its
function may occur and lead to ventricular fibrillation. Please check with the
pacemaker or defibrillatory device manufacturers for their recommendations.
• Failure of the HF surgical equipment (diathermy circuitry) could result in an

unintended increase of output power. In this event the following advisory is
displayed: “Handpiece power is too high. Release footswitch button/treadle
and try again.”
Listed below are general precautions to be followed when using the Diathermy function:
• To ensure safe operation of the Diathermy function, only approved cables and
accessories must be used (See your Alcon representative). Diathermy performance can
be guaranteed only when using Alcon components or Alcon-endorsed components.
• To reduce the risk of accidental burns, caution should always be taken when
operating high-frequency surgical equipment.
• Interference produced by the operation of high-frequency surgical equipment may
adversely influence the operation of other electronic equipment.
• Accessories should be checked regularly; electrode cables should particularly be
checked for possible damage to the insulation.
• The lowest power level in Diathermy step should always be selected for the
intended purpose.
• Skin-to-skin contact (for example between the arms and body of the patient)
should be avoided, for example by insertion of dry gauze.
• When HF (high frequency) surgical equipment and physiological monitoring
equipment are used simultaneously on the same patient, any monitoring
electrodes should be placed as far as possible from the surgical electrodes. Needle
monitoring electrodes are not recommended.
• In all cases, monitoring systems incorporating high frequency current-limiting
devices are recommended.
• The cables to the surgical electrodes should be positioned in such a way that
contact with the patient or other leads is avoided.
• Temporarily unused active electrodes should be stored so that they are isolated
from the patient.
• The use of flammable anaesthetics or oxidizing gases such as nitrous oxide (N2O)
and oxygen should be avoided if a surgical procedure is carried out in the region
of the thorax or the head, unless these agents are sucked away.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.21

• Non-flammable agents should be used for cleaning and disinfection wherever possible.
• Flammable agents used for cleaning or disinfecting, or as solvents of adhesives,
should be allowed to evaporate before the application of HF surgery. Some
materials, for example cotton, wool and gauze, when saturated with oxygen may
be ignited by sparks produced in normal use of the HF surgical equipment.
• Accessories of the Diathermy function should have a rated voltage equal to or
greater than the maximum diathermy output voltage.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS - ILLUMINATOR FUNCTION
WARNINGS!
The illuminator bulbs become extremely hot. Never handle a bulb until it has
cooled considerably from its operating temperature. Do not touch bulb directly
with fingers at any time.
The bulb of the xenon lamp is under constant high pressure. There is a risk it may
burst with explosive force if knocked or damaged. Protective measures:
- Keep the lamp in its protective sleeve at all times during installation
- If you are handling the lamp without its protective sleeve, always wear safety
goggles, a face mask, gloves with wrist protectors and a breast protector.
If the optional illuminator is not installed inside the Constellation™ system base,
be sure that your surgical set-up includes a back-up source for illumination.
Use of controls or adjustments, or performances of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous light exposure.
To minimize hazardous light exposure, operate light source at lowest intensity
setting consistent with adequate visibility of the surgical area.
Light output from an illumination source change may greatly exceed the output
from the previous source. Adjust to lower settings after an illumination source
is changed.
Do not use this light source in the presence of flammable substances.
The fiber optic endoilluminator probe connector and receptacle may be hot.
Before each use, visually inspect the outer surface of the distal tip of the fiber
optic endoilluminator probe that will be inserted into the patient to ensure that
there are no unintended foreign materials, rough surfaces, sharp edges, or
protrusions, that may cause patient injury.
Potentially hazardous radiated light is transmitted from the fiber optic
endoilluminator probe. Refer to Retina Risk Factors to Consider During
Operation of the Constellation™ Illuminator in this section of the manual for
advice on how to minimize the effects of the light intensity used.
Avoid operation of any fiber in air on consoles capable of illumination levels
and settings higher than 10 lumens. This may result in fiber probe deformation
and/or high surface temperatures that may cause patient injury.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS - FOOTSWITCH
Never pick up or move the footswitch by holding the cable. Damage may result.
WARNING!
Route the footswitch cable properly to avoid tripping.
1.22 8065753060 Rev. Y

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS - CASSETTE
Manually rotating the hub roller in the cassette well when power is on and a cassette
is not installed can cause incorrect cassette loading and/or can cause injury to fingers.
WARNINGS!
All fluids aspirated during surgery should be treated as biohazards. Take appropriate
precautions when handling instruments and lines in contact with aspirated fluids.
Drain bag volume should not exceed 500 ml “Max. Capacity.” Exceeding this
volume may result in a biohazardous condition.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS - CONSUMABLES

Do not use consumable packs beyond the expiration date stamped on the outer
packaging. Sterile consumable medical devices should not be reused (Accreditation
Manual for Hospitals, 1982); they are intended for single use only. Improper usage
or assembly could result in a potential hazardous condition for the patient. Alcon
assumes no responsibility for complications that may arise as a result of the reuse or
improper usage of consumables.
WARNING!
Potential risk from reuse or reprocessing the following products labeled for single
use include:
• Bipolar Coagulation Instruments - Thermal injury or electrical shock caused by
a damaged bipolar instrument, and foreign particle introduction into the eye.
• Fiber Optic Instruments - Phototoxicity from inconsistent laser or illumination
exposure caused by a damaged fiber or connector, reduced laser/illumination
output, and foreign particle introduction into the eye.
• Fluid Management Components - Fluid path leaks or obstruction resulting in
reduced fluidics performance, and foreign particle introduction into the eye.
• Phacoemulsification Tips - Reduced tip cutting performance, presence of tip
burrs, fluid path obstruction, and foreign particle introduction into the eye.
• Vitreous Cutting Instruments - Reduced vitreous cutting performance, fluid
path obstruction, and foreign particle introduction into the eye.
The equipment used in conjunction with Alcon Constellation™ Vision System

consumables constitutes a complete system. Use of consumables other than Alcon
consumables may affect system performance and create potential hazards, and if it
is determined to have contributed to the malfunction of the equipment under service
contract, could result in the voidance of the contract and/or invoicing at prevailing
hourly rates.
WARNING!
Attach only Alcon supplied consumables to console and cassette luer fittings. Do
not connect consumables to the patient's intravenous connections.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.23

In all cases, the instrument setup instructions contained in this manual, and all label
instructions in the package, should be thoroughly understood prior to using any of the
Constellation™ Vision System Pack configurations.
Ensure that tubing is not occluded during any phase of operation.
Consumable Packs
If any item in a consumable pack is received in a defective condition, Alcon is to be
notified immediately. Do not use any of the contents if the sterile package is damaged
or the seal is broken in any way. Packs are identified by lot number that provides
traceability and should be given to the Customer Service Department.
By Phone:
In USA: (800) 757-9780
International: Contact your local Alcon representative.
By E-mail: http://www.alcon.com/contact-us/
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS - IOP (INTRAOCULAR PRESSURE)
The closed loop system that adjusts IOP cannot replace the standard of care in judging
IOP intraoperatively. The surgeon must continue the common practice of informally
judging IOP using the following:
• Finger palpation on the globe
• Tactile feedback of the surgical instruments (eye wall deformation with
manipulation of instruments)
• Retinal vessel perfusion/pulsations
• Presence of corneal edema
If the surgeon believes the IOP (using the techniques above) is not responding to the
system settings and is dangerously high, this may represent a system failure. The
surgeon can do one or more of the following as they deem appropriate in this situation
(with care to avoid sudden hypotony):
• Close the infusion stop-cock
• Pinch the infusion line
• Remove the infusion line from the sclerotomy
NOTE: To ensure proper IOP Compensation calibration, place infusion tubing

and infusion canula on a sterile draped tray at mid-cassette level during the
priming cycle.
1.24 8065753060 Rev. Y

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS - LASERS
The footswitch, endoprobe, and LIO should be placed within 2 meters of the
Constellation™ Vision System.
WARNINGS!
There are potential hazards when inserting, steeply bending, or improperly securing
the fiberoptic. Not following the recommendations of the manufacturer may lead
to damage of the fiber or delivery system and/or harm to the patient or user.
Since the aiming beam passes down the same delivery system as the treatment
beam, it provides a good method of checking the integrity of the delivery system.
If the aiming beam spot is not present at the distal end of the delivery system,
or its intensity is reduced or it looks diffused, this is a possible indication of a
damaged or not properly working delivery system. If there is any doubt, contact
Alcon Technical Services.
The use of flammable anesthetics or oxidizing gases such as nitrous oxide (N2O)
and oxygen should be avoided. Some materials - for example cotton wool when
saturated with oxygen - may be ignited by the high temperatures produced in normal
use of the laser equipment. The solvents of adhesives and flammable solutions
used for cleaning and disinfecting should be allowed to evaporate before the
laser equipment is used. There is also danger of ignition of endogenous gases.
DIATHERMY, CAUTERY, COAGULATION
In the past, some of Alcon’s products have referred to the feature “Cautery” or
"Coagulation." The Constellation™ Vision System and this operator's manual use the
word “Diathermy” based on the following definitions:
• Diathermy ‑ introducing an electric field into a body part to produce heat.

• Cautery ‑ cutting and burning method associated with two hot wires passing a
current between them; cutting away skin; halting bleeding.
• Coagulation ‑ an isolated bipolar current supplied to conductors (e.g. forceps).
Current passes between these electrodes, halting bleeding.
Set coagulation power at the intended output control setting in the intended operating
mode in reference to Figure 1-4 through Figure 1-6 .
Figure 1-4 Diathermy Power Through 75 Ohm Load
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.25

Figure 1-5 Diathermy Power vs. Load Impedance
Figure 1-6 Peak Voltage versus %Power
1.26 8065753060 Rev. Y

PRODUCT SERVICE
For product service, please contact Alcon’s Technical Services Department at the
number provided below.
Operators experiencing problems with the system should refer to the Operating
Instructions and Troubleshooting sections of this manual. A problem which persists
should be referred to the Alcon Technical Services Department or your local
authorized service representative.
For optimum performance, it is the user’s responsibility to schedule preventive

maintenance service on the system and its accessories two times each year. Alcon’s
Field Service Engineers are trained and equipped to provide the highest quality of
workmanship.
Safety performance should be verified by the user (e.g., qualified service personnel)
at least twice a year. Ground resistance must be under 0.1 ohms. Leakage current
must be under 500 µA at 264 Vac or 300 µA at 132 Vac.
To avoid unnecessary shipping, please contact your Alcon Technical Services

Department prior to the return of any system or accessories. If return of the equipment
is deemed necessary, a Return Material Authorization will be issued with appropriate
shipping instructions.

Technical Services Department
15800 Alton Parkway
Irvine, California 92618-3818
(949) 753-1393
(800) 832-7827
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.27

LIMITED WARRANTY
Alcon Laboratories, Inc., will repair or replace at its option, any system or
accompanying accessories (excluding the optical fiber) found to be defective in
material and/or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of initial
installation. If optional laser is included, the laser core module will be warrantied
one (1) year from the date of initial installation. This warranty applies to the original
purchaser of the system, when said system is properly installed, maintained, and
operated in accordance with published instructions.
Alcon Laboratories shall not be obligated to provide services under this warranty for
damage to or destruction of systems covered where such damage or destruction is (i)
a result of or caused by fire or explosion of any origin, riot, civil commotion, aircraft,
war, or any Act of God including, but not limited to lightning, windstorm, hail,
flood, earthquake, or (ii) caused by customer’s misuse or improper servicing of said
systems.
This warranty does not cover damage resulting from service repair or other alteration
by any person other than an Alcon-authorized service person, and any warranties
provided by Alcon with respect to this equipment shall become void and of no further
force and effect if this equipment is serviced by anyone other than Alcon-authorized
service personnel. In particular, Alcon shall have no obligation to replace, repair or
credit customer’s account for the cost of the equipment, which has been subject to
service or other alteration by persons other than Alcon-authorized service personnel.
The express warranty above is the sole warranty obligation of Alcon, and the
remedy provided above is in lieu of any and all other remedies. There are no other
agreements, guarantees, or warranties - oral or written, express or implied - including
without limitation warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
Alcon shall have no liability whatsoever for any incidental or consequential damages
arising out of any defect, improper use, or unauthorized service or repair.
WARNING!
The disposables used in conjunction with Alcon instrument products constitute
a complete surgical system. Use of disposables and handpieces other than those
manufactured by Alcon may affect system performance and create potential
hazards. If it is determined that disposables or handpieces not manufactured
by Alcon have contributed to the malfunction of the equipment during warranty
period, service will be provided at prevailing hourly rates.
1.28 8065753060 Rev. Y

ILLUMINATOR PROFESSIONAL USER'S INFORMATION
RETINA RISK FACTORS TO CONSIDER DURING OPERATION OF THE

CONSTELLATION™ ILLUMINATOR
Spectral Output
The Constellation™ illuminator comes equipped with internally-integrated, non-
selectable, UV/IR filtration. No removable filters are used in the Constellation™
illuminator since the retinal hazard is maintained at the levels specified by ISO
15752-2000.
The Constellation™ illuminator output spectrum complies with the requirements

of ISO 15752-2000: “Ophthalmic Instruments - Endoilluminators - Fundamental
Requirements and Test Methods for Optical Radiation Safety.” The Constellation™
illuminator does not rely on fiber optic endoilluminator probe absorption to comply
with spectral output requirements of ISO 15752-2000. It delivers light at the fiber
optic illuminator connector within the spectrum recommended by ISO 15752-2000.
Spectrally-Weighted Aphakic Irradiance

Aphakic irradiance for the Constellation™ illuminator was determined using
approved fiber optic endoilluminator probes approved for use with the Constellation™
illuminator. The value for Spectrally-Weighted Aphakic Irradiance (SWAI) of the
endoilluminator was determined with an effective 3 mm-diameter aperture at a
distance of 5 mm in a plane perpendicular to the radiating fiber optic endoilluminator
probe tip.
Output Limits
To avoid potentially unsafe operations of the Constellation™ illuminator, the
system will warn or prevent the user when certain thresholds are exceeded. The
Constellation™ illuminator limits output and aphakic weighted irradiance to stay
within safe limits based on the type of fiber used. Using RFID, the type of fiber is
detected by reading information from the RFID tag within the inserted fiber probe.
Utilizing the fiber type information the Constellation™ illuminator sets a series of
limits on output. Four separate thresholds are used:
Damage Limit - The Damage Limit corresponds to the maximum output of the
illuminator that any given RFID recognized fiber can be safely operated without
risking damage to the probe while operation in air. When the intensity of the output
of the Constellation™ illuminator is increased by the user beyond the damage limit,
a pop up message is displayed that warns the user “Further increasing the output
level in air can damage fiber tips. Would you like to continue?” If the user presses
the [Yes] button, the request (turning on illuminator, changing the set point while
the illuminator is on, or changing procedures while the illuminator is on) will be
granted. If the user presses the [No] button, the system state will be unchanged. No
interactions with the illuminators are allowed while the advisory is being displayed
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.29

Soft Limit - The Soft Limit for any given RFID recognized fiber corresponds
to a peak aphakic weighted irradiance of 100.98 mW/cm2 for a nominal fiber
optic endoilluminator probe at a distance of 5 mm from the exiting aperture. The
Constellation™ system display is scaled so that the level will display 100% at the
soft limit. When the output intensity of the Constellation™ illuminator is increased
by the user beyond the soft limit, a pop up message is displayed which warns the
user “Further increasing the output level will reduce exposure time by 35%. Would
you like to continue?” If the user presses the [Yes] button, the request (turning on
illuminator, changing the setpoint while the illuminator is on, or changing procedures
while the illuminator is on) will be granted. If the user presses the [No] button,
the system state will be unchanged. If the advisory was brought up as a result of a
procedure change, the setpoint(s) that exceeded the limit will remain at the previous
value. No interactions with the illuminators are allowed while the advisory is being
displayed.
Hard Limit - The Hard Limit for any given RFID recognized fiber corresponds to
a peak aphakic weighted irradiance of 115.85 mW/cm2 for a nominal fiber optic
endoilluminator probe at a distance of 5 mm from the exiting aperture. The displayed
intensity percentage output of the Constellation™ illuminator is scaled so that 115%
corresponds the Hard Limit for that fiber. The user is not given the ability to exceed
this limit.
Port Limits - To further avoid potentially unsafe operation, the Constellation™

illuminator will prevent more than two illuminator ports from being turned on at the
same time. If the user attempts to turn on a third port, a pop up message is displayed
which warns the user “Only two illuminators can be turned on simultaneously.”
1.30 8065753060 Rev. Y

LASER PROFESSIONAL USER'S INFORMATION:
The following information is given to provide the operator with specific information
regarding the Constellation™ Vision System Laser ophthalmic laser.
Indications
The Constellation™ Vision System Laser is indicated for use in photocoagulation of
both anterior and posterior segments of the eye including:
• Retinal photocoagulation, panretinal photocoagulation, and intravitreal

endophotocoagulation of vascular and structural abnormalities of the retina and
choroid including:
- Proliferative and nonproliferative retinopathy (including diabetic)
- Choroidal neovascularization secondary to age-related macular degeneration
(AMD)
- Retinal tears and detachments
- Macular edema
- Retinopathy of prematurity;
- Choroidal neovascularization;
- Leaking microaneurysms.
• Iridotomy/iridectomy for treatment of Chronic/Primary Open Angle Glaucoma

(COAG, POAG), Acute Angle Closure Glaucoma (AACG), and refractory
glaucoma.
• Trabeculoplasty for treatment of Chronic/Primary Open Angle Glaucoma (COAG,

POAG) and refractory glaucoma.
• And other laser treatments including:

- Internal sclerostomy
- Lattice degeneration
- Central and branch retinal vein occlusion
- Suturelysis
- Vascular and pigmented skin lesions.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.31

LASER SAFETY
General Safety Precautions (Refer to IEC 60825-1 or ANSI Z136.1)

• A laser safety officer should be appointed to supervise the installation and use of
the system.
• Install an indicator light outside the laser room warning of instrument operation.
• Position all beam delivery devices (e.g. LIO, endo-probes) so that the laser beam
is never directed toward a door, window, or reflective surface.
• Use non-reflective matte finish wall paint.
• Avoid covering laser room floor and walls with carpet or any other dust
generating material. This will minimize the possibility of excess grime and dust
on the instrument optics, and interference with equipment cooling.
• The instrument requires a minimum of 0.5 meter of open space on all sides for
proper cooling ventilation; therefore, the system should be set flat, resting on the
legs provided on the bottom of the console.
• Unauthorized use of this laser should be prevented by removing the On/Off key.
• Entrances to areas or protective enclosures containing Class 4 lasers should be
posted with appropriate warning signs.
• Appropriate eye protection must be used in all hazard areas. Use eye protection
with OD 4 or above at 532 nm.
Nominal Ocular Hazard Distance (NOHD)

Accessory Beam Divergence (NOHD)
LIO 0.024 radians (20 meters)
Endoprobe 0.23 radians (3 meters)
• A qualified technician must verify that the power plug used is properly grounded.
• The remote interlock connector should be connected to an emergency master
disconnect interlock or to room/door/fixture interlocks. Please refer to Figure 1-7.
• The laser footswitch, endoprobe, and LIO should be placed within 2 meters of the
Constellation™ Vision System Laser.
CAUTION
Before turning the instrument ON for the first time after receipt of the system, wait one
hour for the components and optics to normalize to avoid possible condensation that
may have occurred during shipping.
1.32 8065753060 Rev. Y

REMOTE
CONNECT
1
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
DOOR SWITCH (OPTIONAL)
6
9-PIN D-CONNECTOR
1
COM
TO DRIVE DOOR LAMP (OPTIONAL)
NC NO 9
3
Figure 1-7 Remote Connector/Door Lamp Circuit Diagram
Laser Safety Features

The Constellation™ Vision System Laser is designed for the highest degree of
reliability and safety for both the operator and the patient. Any misuse of this laser
system may be dangerous. Before using the laser system, the operator must be
familiar with the commands and the operation of this type of instrument.
The Constellation™ Vision System Laser is fitted with the following safety systems
which must be understood by every operator:
• A protective housing covers the laser source so that no harmful laser radiation will
be emitted. No part of this protective housing should be removed by the operator.
The laser system must not be used if the protective housing has been damaged or
removed.
• A remote connection (interlock) is located on the rear panel and permits the
installation of an external switch. This switch can be installed on the laser room
door and cuts off all laser emissions in case the door is opened during operation.
There is also a connector linked to an internal relay to activate a door warning
lamp if desired.
• A key switch controls the laser power supply. Laser operation is not possible if
the key has been removed. Access to the key should be limited to authorized and
knowledgeable personnel. The key should not be left on or near the instrument
when not in use.
• During operation, laser status can be determined by visually checking the display
to determine the laser mode: Standby or Ready.
• An emergency switch is mounted on the front panel. Pushing this switch will cut
off all laser emissions (treatment and aiming beam) at any time. The switch must
be pulled out to the initial position to restore power. The laser will always restart
in Standby mode.
• Laser firing commands are microprocessor controlled and firings are prevented
should any malfunction be detected in the instrument electronics. The instrument
will only fire when all conditions are correct.
• Output power of the laser beam is continuously monitored and controlled. In
case an unusual power condition is detected, firing stops and the treatment laser
emission is cut off.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.33

Effects
The laser beam is primarily absorbed by pigmented tissues within the eye. These
primary pigments are hemoglobin/oxy-hemoglobin and melanin. In the case of
macular treatment, xanthophyll pigment is involved. The surgeon controls the power,
spot size, and exposure time of the delivered laser beam to the targeted tissue. It is
the combination of these effects that results in the thermal action of the laser beam
upon tissue. One or all of the adjustable parameters can be changed. However, in
normal clinical practice, power is usually varied, and spot size and exposure time are
preset as a function of the application.
The 532 nm green laser beam has similar absorption characteristics to the 577 nm dye
yellow laser beam7. This means that the absorption effects of the 532 nm wavelength
are considerably higher in hemoglobin and melanin, and less in xanthophyll. In
all cases, it is necessary to perform titrations until the desired treatment results are
obtained. The 532 wavelength also requires less power than that required with the
argon laser to obtain similar results. Therefore, you should begin your titration levels
with lower power than required for similar procedures with the argon laser.
WARNING!
Failure to titrate delivered energy may result in patient injury.
Use of this medical laser, as with any other instrument, requires training and
experience to obtain maximum clinical performance. Titrating the dosage is
recommended by initiating a lesion formation in an area of normal retina with intact
pigment epithelium. Power and exposure duration should be varied incrementally
until the desired lesion is produced.
WARNING!
If unsure which settings are required, select low power, short duration, and large
spot size. Failure to do so may result in patient injury.
Delivery of Laser Energy

The laser beam is delivered to tissue via an endoprobe, illuminated endoprobe,
aspirating endoprobe, or Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope (LIO). Reaction to applied
laser energy by the eye is a function of many variables.
The pigmentation of the eye, technique or procedure used, laser settings, and pre-
existing condition of the eye, such as cataract, will have an effect on the selected laser
parameters and the results obtained. Therefore, it is very important to consider all the
existing clinical conditions and titrate until the desired results are obtained.
Always use minimal illumination while maintaining good visualization in order to

reduce reflections and discomfort for the patient. Likewise, the aiming beam should
be used at a minimum setting while maintaining proper targeting of the selected
tissue. This will also minimize excessive reflections and scattering, particularly at
smaller spot sizes.
1.34 8065753060 Rev. Y

Doctor Protection Filter
The Constellation™ Vision System laser can only be fired when appropriate steps
are taken to ensure that a doctor’s filter is placed in the viewing device ( e.g. surgical
microscope, etc.). The Constellation™ Vision System laser supports two types of
doctor filters:
• Non-tethered with fixed filter in viewing path.
• Tethered with manual switch to place filters in and out of the viewing path.
The doctor protection filter must remain in the beam path during treatment, enabling
the targeted tissue to be seen with complete protection for the operator. The filter has
virtually no effect on visualization (colored† view only).
Rotation of the tethered filter with manual switch in or out of the beam path is
accomplished by means of a lever located on the right side of the filter. Note that if
the doctor protection filter is in the open position in endo modes, the laser will not
fire and the message “Please Engage Dr. Filter” will appear. Rotate the filter lever
clockwise until the doctor protection filter is in the beam path and the message clears.
If using a non-tethered fixed filter, and the system is switched from Standby to Ready
mode, the message "Verify appropriate Dr. Filters are installed in all viewing devices"
appears and the user must verify before the laser can switch to Ready mode.
If two tethered filters are in place (see rear panel description), both filters must be
switched into the beam path before the laser will operate. Switching either filter
out of the beam path while the laser is in Ready mode switches the laser to Standby
mode immediately. Inserting a filter tether into the machine while it is in Ready
mode switches the machine back to Standby mode until all tethered filters have been
verified to be in place.
WARNING!
Do not attempt treatment if aiming beam is not present. Patient injury may occur.
The aiming beam passes down the same delivery system as the working beam;
this provides a good method of checking the integrity of the delivery system. If
the aiming beam spot is not present at the distal end of the delivery system, if
its intensity is reduced, or if it looks diffused, these are possible indications of a
damaged or not-properly-working delivery system.
† Newer Doctor Protection Filters will have less tint than older ones.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.35

Treatment Hazards
A single treatment exposure will typically cause a blanching of target tissue. Exposure
duration can be adjusted from 0.01 seconds to 2.0 seconds to result in the desired
effect. A continuous treatment beam can also be selected.
NOTE: In CW, depending on the thermal load of the system, the system may
shut down in safety mode prior to the footswitch being released.
Excessive combinations of power and exposure can cause undesirable tissue

vaporization and charring. Reports 1 through 6 (listed as footnotes at the end of this
section) indicate these hazards are no different from adverse effects from continuous
wave argon lasers used at these same settings. No evidence of non-thermal effects has
been observed.
Contra Indications
Patients with a condition that prevents visualization of target tissue (cloudy cornea,
or extreme haze of the aqueous humor of the anterior chamber or vitreous humor) are
poor candidates for LIO delivered laser treatment.
Side Effects
Corneal burns, inflammation, loss of best-corrected visual acuity, loss of visual field,
and transient elevations in intraocular pressure can occur as a result of ophthalmic
laser treatment. Unintentional retinal burns can occur if excessive treatment beam
power or duration is used.
Laser Safety
Back scattered radiation is of low intensity and is not harmful when viewed through
a protective filter. All personnel in the treatment room must wear protective eyewear,
OD 4 or above at 532 nm, when the system is in Standby/Ready mode as well as
during treatment. The doctor protection filter is an OD greater than 4 at 532 nm.
WARNING!
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein, may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.
CAUTION
Federal (USA) law restricts this device to sale by, or on the order of, a physician.
1.36 8065753060 Rev. Y

Footnotes for Laser Saftey section:
1 Ludwig, K.; Lasser, T.; Sakowski, H.; Abramwoski, H.; Worz, G. (Augenklinik,
Universitat Munchen) "Photocoagulation in the edematous and non-edematous
retina with the cw-laser of different wavelengths." Ophthalmologe (GERMANY),
December 1994, Volume 91, No. 6, p783-788.
2 Roider, J.; Schiller, M.; el Hifnawi, E.S.; Birngruber, R. (Augenklinik,
Medizinische Universitat zu Lubeck) "Retinal photocoagulation with a pulsed,
frequency-doubled Nd: YAG laser (532 nm)." Ophthalmologe (GERMANY),
December 1994, Vol. 91 No. 6, p777-782.
3 Wyman, D.; Wilson, B.; Adams, K. (Medical Physics Department, Hamilton
Regional Cancer Centre, Ontario, Canada) "Dependence of laser photocoagulation
on interstitial delivery parameters." Lasers Surgical Medical (UNITED
STATES), 1994, Vol. 14 No. 1, p59-64.
4 Obana, A.; Miki, T.; Matsumoto, M.; Ohtsuka, H.; Moriwaki, M.; Kamo, M.;
Mii, T.; Kijima, M. (Department of Ophthalmology, Osaka City University,
Medical School, Japan) "An experimental and clinical study of chorioretinal
photocoagulation using a frequency-doubled Nd: YAG laser." Nippon Ganka
Gakkai Zasshi (JAPAN), September 1993, Vol. 97 No. 9, p1040-1046.
5 Mordon, S.; Beacco, C.; Rotteleur, G.; Brunetaud, J.M. (INSERM - National
Institute of Health and Medical Research - Lille, France) "Relation between skin
surface temperature and minimal blanching during argon, Nd-YAG 532, and CW
dye 585 laser therapy of port-wine stains." Lasers Surg Med (UNITED STATES)
1993, Vol. 13 No. 1, p124-126.
6 Jalkh, A.E.; Pflibsen, K.; Pomerantzeff, O.; Trempe, C.L.; Schepens, C.L. (Eye
Research Institute of Retina Foundation, Boston, MA 02114) "A new solid-
state, frequency-doubled neodymium-YAG photocoagulation system." Arch
Ophthalmol (UNITED STATES) June 1988, Vol. 106 No. 6, p 847-849.
7 Wavelengths, Opthamology, July 1986, Volume 93, Number 7, Page 956.
8065753060 Rev. Y 1.37

1.38 LAST PAGE OF THIS SECTION 8065753060 Rev. Y

SECTION TWO - DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION
The Constellation™ Vision System is a multi microprocessor-controlled ophthalmic
surgical instrument with associated memory and input/output (I/O) circuitry.
The system communicates with the user via its Front Panel display, with voice
confirmations, and with tones.
An automatic self-test is initiated each time the system power is turned on. If the
system does not pass the self-test, either a Fault screen or an error message is
displayed depending upon the cause of the issue. When the system successfully
completes the self-test, it automatically goes into the Setup mode.
This section of the manual describes the system hardware, the user interface, and the
accessories that may by used with the system.
FRONT PANEL
Fluidics Module
The fluidics module is located in the center of the front panel. The module allows fast
and easy insertion of the cassette that contains all the fluidics connections required for
surgery.
Front Display Panel and Touch Screen

The 17-inch front display panel tilts and extends forward to allow easy positioning
during setup and surgery. The front display is the user's main source of system
control, allowing fingertip command of system functions throughout the enhanced
graphical user interface.
A data card slot is located just beneath the LCD display. A data card (SD Memory
Card) can be inserted into this slot when the user wants to back up or restore
system settings. A 2 GB SD memory card is the maximum size that the system will
recognize. Larger capacity memory cards are not recognizable by the system and if
inserted, will lock up the system until removed.
Pneumatic and Electrical Connectors

The Constellation™ Vision System console contains two vertical columns of
connectors, located on the left side of the cassette, for surgical probes and handpieces.
The right column is for pneumatic probes, and the left column is for electrical
handpieces.
LED Rings - The rings surrounding each front panel connector automatically
illuminate in a particular color to guide the user in making the proper connection to
the system as follows:
• Blue - A surgical tool is selected by the user in Setup or a surgical tool is related
to the current Step in surgery.
• Green - The system has detected that the appropriate surgical tool has been
connected to the port.
• Amber - The system has detected, via RFID, a surgical tool that is not appropriate
for the port or is invalid for other reasons.
Note: The green and amber lights have higher priority than the blue light;
therefore, it will illuminate only if no other light is applicable.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.1

WARNING!
Connect only Alcon supplied consumables to console/cassette connectors. Do
not connect consumables to patient intravenous connections.
Footswitch Storage Hook

This footswitch storage hook is located at the bottom of the front panel. When the
footswitch is not in use or the system is being moved, use this hook to store and
protect the footswitch.
Instrument Tray (optional)

Provides a movable instrument tray within the sterile field. There is a curved metal
rod on either side of the tray that allows for creation of a sterile pouch when used with
sterile tray arm cover. The tray is capable of accommodating a variety of positions in
the operating room environment: right, left, front and rear of the surgeon as well as
the front of the bed. Refer to Section Three for detailed instructions on adjusting the
tray position.
WARNINGS!
The maximum allowable load on the instrument tray is 20 lb (9 kg). If the load
exceeds this limit, the tray arm will automatically lower itself in order to avoid
tipping the system over. Additionally, if the instrument tray is positioned over a
patient, a mayo stand should be placed beneath it to avoid a potential collapse
of the tray arm onto the patient.
Place the instrument tray in the stored position as shown in Figure 2-1 prior to
transportation to avoid a situation that could cause the system to tip.
IV Pole with Bottle Hanger (optional)

A bottle of BSS™ or BSS Plus™ irrigating fluid is hung from the hook on top of
this pole. The IV pole is used to raise and lower the bottle height, causing irrigation
pressure to increase or decrease.
WARNING!
Do not use Legacy™ IV pole extender with Constellation™ Vision System IV pole.
2.2 8065753060 Rev. Y

Illumination Connectors
An indent on the
illumination port
Front Display and indicates that the
Touchscreen system uses a
SD Memory Slot phosphor-based
illumination
module.
Instrument Tray
(optional)
Fluidics Module
Laser Module
(optional)
Auxiliary Illumination
(optional)
Footswitch
Footswitch
Connector
AutoSert™ Auto Gas Filling (AGF)

IOL Injector
Viscous Fluid Control (VFC)

U/S and OZil™
Handpiece Forceps
Multi-Function Port
Scissors
UltraVit™ Probe/
Diathermy HyperVit™ Probe
Figure 2-1 The Constellation™ Vision System Console Front Panel

NOTE: Labels and icons may vary according to the date of manufacture and are shown here for reference
only.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.3

Caster Wheels
Four large caster wheels support the Constellation™ Vision System. The wheels rotate
360º for ease of system mobility, and have a locking lever to secure the system in
place. The wheels should always be locked (handle down) when the unit is in use, and
unlocked when being moved.
The locking levers have three positions as follows:
• Up arrow position - The caster wheel directional movement will lock in the 0 or
180 degree position. The wheel rotates freely.
• Unlocked icon position - The caster wheel has 360 degrees of directional
movement and the wheels rotate freely.
• Locked icon position - The caster wheel directional movement and wheel rotation
are both locked.
Illumination
Primary illumination is provided by two independently controlled ports located
just below the display. Each port will allow the use of 20, 23, and 25 GA ACMI
terminated fiber probes and provides the following minimum output for the probes
(100% setting; 0-200 hours of lamp use):
• 20 GA probes = 16 ±6 lumens (@115% set point1; 0-400 hours of lamp use)
1 Based on a representative nominal UFR fiber.
Auxiliary illumination is available as an optional feature that provides for two
additional channels of high brightness white light.
The system uses either a xenon-based or a phosphor-based illuminator. The light
source for xenon-based illuminators is a lamp, while the light source for the
phosphor-based illuminator is a light channel. Phosphor-based illuminators have an
indent in the top of the illumination port (connector) as shown in Figure 2-1.
Laser (optional)
The optional laser module is a diode-pumped solid-state type laser designed for
ophthalmic use. This laser delivers a visible 532 nm green treatment beam, and a
visible 635 nm Diode Laser aiming beam (635 nm is an approximate value between
630-640 nm).
Footswitch Connector
The footswitch connector is located on the front panel and is used to connect
the Constellation™ Vision System footswitch to the console. (In the monolith
configuration shown in Figure 2-1, the footswitch connection is made in the front of
the base.)
Handles
Handles are located on the sides and back of the instrument, and should always be
used to move the unit. For safety and control, the unit should be pulled, not pushed.
CAUTION
The system must be moved carefully, otherwise the system could tip over and become
damaged. Do not push or pull the unit by the display, the tray, or the IV pole. Handles
located at the rear and sides of the unit are provided for moving the instrument. The
unit should be pulled and not pushed, especially over elevator and door thresholds.
2.4 8065753060 Rev. Y

REAR PANEL
DVD/RW
Barcode Reader Holder Stationary Hanger Mount
Standby Switch
External Connector
Panel (see Detail B on
next page)
Power Module/Footswitch
Main Power Switch Connector (behind panel)
Facility Pressure Source

Connector and AGF Tank
Connection
Illuminator Module Eject

Laser Module Connector
Panel (see Detail A)
Aux. Illuminator Module Eject

Accessory Drawer
ISPAN** Gas Tank Holders
Base Input Power/

Equal Potentiality Lug
DETAIL A
Dr. Filter
Laser
Status
Remote
Interlock
Laser
Footswitch
Figure 2-2 The Constellation™ Vision System Rear Panel

(continued on next page)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.5

DETAIL B - External Connector Panel
(System will use one of the three connector panels shown below)
DETAIL B-1
Video Overlay
S-Video In (optional)
Ethernet USB Video Overlay

HDMI In (optional)
(for connection to Alcon (Alcon
NEGENUITY™ console only) only) WiFi
(optional)
External
Display
HDMI Out
Audio
Input
Barcode
Reader Video Overlay
HDMI Out (optional)
Tethered Laser
(for connection to Alcon RS-232 Video Recorder
PurePoint™ laser system only) (for connection to Sony
Medical Grade DVD Recorder
DETAIL B-2
Video Overlay
Ethernet USB Video Overlay

HDMI In (optional)
(optional)
External
Display
VGA Out
Audio
Input
Barcode
Reader
Video Overlay
Tethered Laser HDMI Out (optional)
(for connection to Alcon
RS-232 Video Recorder
PurePoint™ laser system only)
(for connection to Sony
DETAIL B-3 Video Overlay

Ethernet USB Composite Video In (optional)

(optional)
External
Display
VGA Out
Audio
Input
Barcode
Reader
Composite Video Out (optional)
Tethered Laser Video Overlay S-Video Out (optional)
(for connection to Alcon
PurePoint™ laser system only) RS-232 Video Recorder
(for connection to Sony
Figure 2-2 The Constellation™ Vision System Rear Panel - continued
2.6 8065753060 Rev. Y

DVD/RW
The DVD player/recorder allows for software upgrades to the system and data/
settings transfer.
Bar Code Reader
The bar code reader allows the operator to quickly scan consumables into the system.
When a consumable is scanned through the reader and the system recognizes the bar
code as one that is preconfigured in the system, an audible beep is sounded and the
associated consumable is added to the current surgical case. If the bar code is not
recognized by the system then an advisory message is displayed along with an audible
beep.
The operator can verify the bar code has been properly entered into the system by
tapping the Consumables button to bring up the Consumables list window.
External Connectors
This module, located in the middle of the rear panel, contains various connectors and
outlets used for electrical interconnections. The system will have one of the three
connector panels shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2, Detail B-1
• External Display HDMI Out - External HDMI monitor connection. Note that
this external HDMI monitor connection does not support "hot-plugging." The
external monitor must be connected prior to powering up the console.
• Ethernet - For connection to Alcon NEGENUITY™ console only, catalog
number 8065753091
• USB Connector - Alcon use only
• Video Overlay S-Video In - Used for Video Overlay (optional)
• Video Overlay HDMI Video In/Out - Used for Video Overlay (optional)
• WiFi USB Connector - Alcon use only (optional)
• Bar Code scanner connection
• Tethered Laser - For connection to tethered Alcon PurePoint™ laser system
only, catalog number 8065750597. See Section Three for information on the
tethered laser configuration
• RS-232 Video Recorder - For connection to Sony Medical Grade DVD
Recorder; Sony part number HVO-1000HD
• Audio Input - MP3 player audio input
• VGA out - External VGA display connection
number 8065753091
• Video Overlay S-Video In - Used for Video Overlay (optional)
• Video Overlay HDMI Video In/Out - Used for Video Overlay (optional)
• WiFi USB Connector - Alcon use only (optional)
• Tethered Laser Connection - For connection to tethered Alcon PurePoint™
laser system only, catalog number 8065750597. See Section Three for
information on the tethered laser configuration
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.7
• VGA out - External VGA monitor connection
number 8065753091
• Composite Video In/Out - Used for Video Overlay (optional)
• Antenna - Used for wireless communication
• S-Video In/Out - Used for Video Overlay (optional)
• Tethered Laser Connection - For connection to tethered Alcon PurePoint™
laser system only, catalog number 8065750597. See Section Three for
information on the tethered laser configuration
CAUTION
The USB connectors ( ) and service ethernet connector located on the rear
panel are for use by Alcon trained personnel only. Failure to comply will void
warranty.
Power Module/Footswitch Connector

This module contains the power and footswitch connection from the base unit.
Facility Pressure Source Connectors

This connection is provided to connect the console to the facility pressure source (air
or nitrogen). Refer to Section Three for detailed instructions on connecting a pressure
source.
Laser Module Connector Panel (Figure 2-2, Detail A)
• Dr. Filter Connections - Provides connections to standard Alcon Dr. Filters.
• Laser Footswitch Connection.
• Remote Interlock - connection to accommodate the room-interlock functionality.
When a controlled entrance is opened, this interlock interrupts the operation of the
laser until the door switch contact is closed.
• Laser Status - Connection to accommodate a “Laser On” indicator. This provides
an electrical signal to an external facility sign that indicates when the laser is in
the ready state.
2.8 8065753060 Rev. Y

Accessory Drawer
One drawer allows the storage of miscellaneous accessories.
Base Input Power

Connection to connect the Constellation™ Vision System to facility power.
Equipotential Ground Connector

The Equipotential Ground Connector may be used to provide a direct connection
between the Constellation™ Vision System and the potential equalization bus-bar of
the electrical installation. This connector complies to the requirements of IEC/EN
60601-1.
Auxiliary Illuminator Module Eject Button

Pressing this button causes the optional auxiliary illuminator module to release and
enables its removal from the front panel for servicing by trained personnel only.
Illuminator Module Eject Button

Pressing this button causes the illuminator module to release and enables its removal
from the front panel for servicing by trained personnel only. NOTE: The illuminator
module should only be ejected or inserted when the system is powered off.
Main Power Switch

Connects AC power to the system.
Standby Power Switch

This push-button switch is used to turn secondary power ON and OFF. If system
freezes and is unresponsive to operator commands, press Standby switch for fifteen
seconds to shut down system, then re-boot.
Stationary Hanger Mount

Used to hang a bottle of sterile intraocular irrigating solution.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.9

FOOTSWITCH
Functional operations of the Constellation™ Vision System console are controlled by
the footswitch shown in Figure 2-3. The footswitch consists of a treadle, left and right
horizontal/vertical switches, left and right heel switches, and a tension adjustment
knob. An advisory popup window is displayed if the footswitch is not connected.
Generally, the treadle is used to provide control of a parameter, such as vacuum, with
the treadle's angle of depression proportional to the parameter output. In some modes
of operation, the treadle is used to provide on/off control of a function, with any
depression resulting in a fixed output of its parameter.
The footswitch treadle is used in a mode-dependent fashion during system operation.

In U/S mode for example, when the treadle is depressed its range of travel is divided
into ranges 0, 1, 2 and 3. Each range is separated from the previous range by a
detent. Detent firmness levels are programmable in the Doctor Settings menu which
is discussed later in this section of the manual (see Settings). The footswitch icon
located in the upper left corner of the screen displays the current treadle position.
Right and left switches are used to enable and disable system functions. The switches
are nudged sideways (horizontal) for some functions, and pressed down (vertical) for
others.
The tension adjustment knob, located on the front of the footswitch, is used to adjust
the pressure needed to depress the treadle.
CAUTION
Never pick up or move the footswitch by holding the cable. Damage may result.
Handle
Treadle
Tension Adjustment Knob
(not shown)
Right Horizontal/Vertical Switch
Left Horizontal/Vertical Switch
NOTE:
The Constellation™
footswich does not
fire the optional
laser. Right Heel Switch
Left Heel Switch
Handle
Figure 2-3 The Constellation™ Vision System Footswitch
2.10 8065753060 Rev. Y

REMOTE CONTROL
The Remote Control is a wireless, handheld, battery operated device that uses
infrared light to communicate with the Constellation™ Vision System console. Each
of the different keys on the Remote Control unit has its own unique key code that is
transmitted to the Constellation™ Vision System console when the key is pressed. The
transmitted key codes are translated into commands that control the Constellation™
Vision System console.
WARNING!
The Alcon remote control is common to several Alcon instruments. To keep the
remote from interfering with other Alcon instruments, each remote control must
be set to match the unique channel (A, B, C, or D) of its associated instrument.
Changing batteries will cause the remote to default to channel A; therefore the
remote may need to be reset to the instrument's unique channel as described in
"Selecting Remote Control Channel" on page 2.11.
CAUTION
Do not sterilize the remote control as it will damage the unit.
Figure 2-4 shows the Remote Control and the keys provided. When a Remote Control
Transmitter key is pressed, the Constellation™ Vision System console determines whether
or not the key press was valid and generates an appropriate valid or invalid key tone.
Global Controls Up/Down Keys

Global Controls
Navigation Key
Backlight button (2)
Parameter Value
Adjustment Keys
Surgery Screen
Navigation Keys:
Left/Right; Up/Down
Previous Step Key
Enter Key
Next Step Key
Figure 2-4 The Constellation™ Vision System Remote Control
The Remote Control is divided into three sections from top to bottom. The three
sections of the display screen are 1) the top section is for Global Selection and
adjustments of global values, 2) the main (middle) window is for surgery screen
navigation and parameter settings, and 3) the bottom section is for selecting steps
and enabling/disabling selected controls. Some items on the Constellation™ Vision
System console display screens are not accessible with this Remote Control unit.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.11

Global Control Up/Down Keys
The Global Control up/down keys on the remote control function as they do on the
Host Display touchscreen. Each individual press of the up arrow key increments the
setting on the selected global control in the Globals panel on the touchscreen. Each
individual press of the down arrow key decrements the setting on the selected global
control. To move rapidly up or down, the key is pressed and held until the desired
setting is reached.
Global Controls Navigation Key
The Global Controls Navigation key enables the user to navigate to any control on the
Globals panel and select a specific control. Pressing this button the first time
selects the Infusion Control which is the first control on the Globals panel.
The selected control will be highlighted with a golden outline. Each successive press of
the Global Controls Navigation key causes the next available control on the Globals
panel to be selected. An exception to this rule occurs if the Infusion Control is selected.
In this case the IOP Compensation button on the control is selected to adjust IOP
settings.
Surgery Screen Navigation Key
The Surgery Screen Navigation key is a four way switch that enables a remote
control user to move up, down, left and right on the surgery screen and to select the
controls and/or panels on the screen. Once a control is selected, the user can press the
Parameter Value Adjustment keys to increase/decrease the control parameters.
The Navigation Key is valid when the Surgery screen is being shown, but is invalid
when a popup is displayed.
Parameter Value Adjustment Up/Down Keys
The Parameter Value Adjustment Up/Down keys are used to adjust settings
(parameters) in a Surgery Control Panel that have adjustment arrows (i.e., pressure,
vacuum, cut rate). Surgery control panels are selected via the Navigation Key and a
blue border indicates the panel that is selected.
Previous Step/Next Step Keys
The Previous Step/Next Step keys are used to move left and right through the surgery
steps at the bottom of the Surgery screen. In the Surgery screens, when the Previous
Step/Next Step key is pressed on the remote, the system selects the next step to the
left or to the right. If it is a valid step, it will be selected immediately without having
to press any other keys. Continuing to press the keys causes the system to move
through the steps and wrap around to the beginning step. It is not possible to access
the submodes from the Remote Control Unit.
The Previous Step/Next Step keys can also be used in an information popup to select
a button (e.g., OK, Cancel, Save, etc.).
Enter Key
The Enter key is used to enable/disable a selected control. For example, if the vacuum
control On/Off button is selected (highlighted with a gold border), pressing the Enter
key alternately toggles the control On and Off.
The Enter key is also used to move through the submodes of a surgery step. If the
current surgery mode has submodes, pressing the Enter key once causes the submodes
to be highlighted with a gold border. Additional presses of the Enter key (while the
submodes are highlighted) causes the system to select the next submode to the right
2.12 8065753060 Rev. Y

and eventually wrap around to the leftmost submode.
Remote Control Batteries
When the batteries in the remote control are low, the status message “Remote Battery Low”
will appear in a popup dialog the first time a key is pressed after the system is turned on.
The message will disappear after new batteries are installed and a remote control key
is pressed. A battery holder inside the remote holds three (3) AAA (LR3) batteries.
Selecting Remote Control Channel

The remote control can be configured to operate on one of four channels. This feature
allows four remote controls to independently control four Constellation™ Vision
Systems operating in the same room or area. Remote controls are factory preset to
channel A. For proper remote operation, the Constellation™ Vision System must be
set to the same channel as the remote.
The Option/System Settings/Remote Control window allows the selection of four

remote receive codes: A, B, C, & D. This selection must correspond to the channel
selection on the remote control. Set the remote channel as instructed below.
To select a remote channel on the Constellation™ Vision System:

1. Press the Options button to open the Options popup screen.
2. Press the System button to bring up the System Settings screen.
3. Press the Remote Control tab to display the Remote Control Settings screen (see
Figure 2-5).
4. Hold the remote control in front of the Constellation™ Vision System display
screen and simultaneously press its parameter value adjustment up/down keys.
After the system emits a sound acknowledging the action, simultaneously release
the buttons.
5. On the remote control, press the Navigation key corresponding to the new
channel as labeled in the Remote Control Settings screen.
6. On the display, press the Save button to save the change (pressing Enter twice on the
remote also saves the change), or press Cancel to return to the main screen without
saving the changes.
No additional steps are needed once

the remote channel is set, and only
one remote channel is stored per
unit.
NOTE: The Alcon remote

control is common to several
Alcon instruments. If necessary
to distinguish between remote
controls, identify the remote
controls and the units with
unique labels.
CAUTION
Do not sterilize the remote control Figure 2-5 Remote Control Channel Selection
as it will damage the unit. Screen (Options\System\Remote Control tab)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.13

FRONT PANEL DISPLAYS AND TOUCHSCREEN
The Constellation™ Vision System front display panel and touch screen has a flat,
non-glare surface, and is mounted above the console. Control buttons are located
within the active touch screen area. There are three basic types of push-button on the
display screen: up/down arrow buttons, sliders, and momentary buttons. The user can
press and hold the up/down arrow buttons until the desired adjustment is complete, or
press the momentary buttons with a single push-and-release to activate a function.
The Constellation™ Vision System emits an audible tone to indicate button activation.
Activation of a valid touchscreen button or remote control button results in a valid
key tone; an invalid button results in an invalid key tone, and, in some circumstances,
its icon symbol is ghosted to indicate an invalid function.
There are four types of display screens: the Setup screen, Surgery screens, End Case,
and Popups (sometimes referred to as dialogs).
• The Setup screen is used to prepare for surgery; i.e., connecting instruments,
priming the fluidic management system and testing the handpiece.
• Surgery screens contain surgical settings for each of the current surgical
procedures. Settings can be adjusted by pressing the touch screen buttons for the
associated controls.
• The End Case screen provides the user with a summary of the case and a tabbed
interface area for display of the various metrics associated with the case.
• Popups are displayed as a result of selecting an option from the Options drop list
(i.e., System Settings, Doctor Settings, etc.) or pressing the Footswitch button.
Popups enable the user to view and modify system settings, doctor settings, and
some surgical settings. There are also popups displayed to advise or warn the user
of a situation, or to indicate progress on a function in the Setup screen.
Startup Screen
Upon power-up of the system, an introductory screen is displayed as shown in Figure
2-6 while the system completes initialization and self-test diagnostics. All user inputs
are locked out while this screen is displayed. If initialization is successful, the main
screen is displayed as shown in Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-6 The Startup Screen

2.14 8065753060 Rev. Y
Main Screen
The main screen is divided into three areas: Menu Bar, Globals, and the System State
area as shown in Figure 2-7. The Menu Bar provides selections that are available in
any system state. The Globals area provides control of functions that are available in
all surgical modes and for any system state. The System State area provides specific
information for one of the following available states: Setup, Surgery, or End Case.
These states are selected by pressing the associated tab in the menu bar. Figure 2-7
shows the Setup state.
MENU BAR
GLOBALS SYSTEM STATE AREA
Figure 2-7 The Main Screen
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.15

Menu Bar
Figure 2-8 shows the Menu Bar section of the screen. This portion of the screen is
always available regardless of the System State. The menu bar allows the user to
change various high-level functions as well as certain system options.
Doctor & Procedure

Selection
Op
Screen Navigation Tools

tio
ns
Footswitch
Icon
Figure 2-8 The Main Screen Menu Bar
Menu Bar: Footswitch Icon

The Footswitch icon provides feedback relating to the current state of the main
console footswitch as follows:
• The icon displays the current position of the treadle indicated by the number
shown on the icon.
• When a button on the footswitch is pressed, the icon shows which button and,
when applicable, which way it was pressed.
2.16 8065753060 Rev. Y

Selecting the Footswitch icon displays the Footswitch popup shown in Figure 2-8.
This popup shows the footswitch with labels indicating the current mapping for each
button. Pressing the Configure button closes the popup box and displays the Doctor
Settings screen with the Footswitch tab selected. In this screen the footswitch can be
configured as desired. Refer to Doctor Settings/Footswitch later in this section for
detailed information on configuring the footswitch.
Menu Bar: Doctor & Procedure Selection

The Doctor & Procedure Selection popup shown in Figure 2-8 contains the names of
all available doctors and a list of procedures for the currently selected doctor. Current
selections for both doctor and procedure are highlighted as shown. Pressing the
"Close" button closes the dialog and updates the current doctor and procedure with
the respective selections that will be displayed in the Menu Bar. Figure 2-9 shows all
the screens involved in creating, modifying, and saving Doctors and their associated
procedures for use in the surgical applications.
Doctor Selection
The Doctor list shows the names of all available doctors with the "Default Doctor"
first and the other doctors listed in alphabetical order. Selecting one of the entries then
pressing the Close button will change the currently selected doctor, update the current
procedure, and – if in surgery – the current step. The Default Doctor comes with a set
of default procedures that cannot be modified.
New doctors can be added to the list by pressing the “ Add” button in the Doctor
section. When this button is pressed, a keyboard is displayed allowing the user to
enter a new doctor. The new doctor is automatically selected if the name is valid (the
name cannot be more that 40 characters or a duplicate name). If the name is identical
to a doctor already in the system, an advisory is displayed when attempting to Save
the new doctor and, upon pressing the Advisory "OK" button the user will be returned
to the new doctor entry screen.
NOTE: Doctors cannot be deleted from the Doctor & Procedure Selection
popup. To delete a Doctor or Procedure, go to the Options popup and select the
View/Copy/Delete option (covered in detail later in this section of the manual).
Procedure Selection
The Procedure list shows all available procedures for the current doctor starting
with the Accurus™ Classic procedure followed by an alphabetically sorted list of
procedures created for that doctor. The currently selected procedure is highlighted.
To select another procedure, simply press the desired procedure which will become
highlighted.
At the right of the Procedure list are three buttons that enable the user to Add, Save,
and Modify procedures. Pressing "Add" or selecting a procedure and pressing the
"Modify" button will open the Modify Procedure dialog as shown in Figure 2-9.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.17

Surgery Steps - Favorites View
Figure 2-9 Doctor & Procedure Creation and

Modification Screens
2.18 8065753060 Rev. Y

Modify Procedure
The Modify Procedure dialog shown in Figure 2-9 is used to create and modify
custom surgical procedures. It is divided into two panels: Surgery Steps and
Procedure.
The Surgery Steps panel displays a list of steps that can be added to the Procedure
panel either by selecting a step and pressing the "Add to Procedure" button or by
drag-and-drop functionality (press a step and drag down to the Procedure panel).
In the default "View All" view, a scrollable list of steps is displayed based on the
selected filter. The following actions can be taken in this view:
• Pressing the "Filter" button displays the Step Filtering dialog where the displayed
steps can be filtered as desired by the user. In the Step Filter dialog, pressing
"Close" applies the changes made and pressing "Cancel" closes the dialog without
changing the current display filter.
• Pressing the "Add Favorite" button adds the currently selected step to the "View
Favorites" view of steps (for the current doctor) and the panel will automatically
switch to the View Favorites view. NOTE: When adding steps to Favorites, a
copy of the step is made and added. It is not a reference to the original step.
Any changes made to the original step will not carry over to the favorite.
• Pressing the "Add to Procedure" button adds the currently selected step to the
Procedure panel.
• Pressing and dragging a step to the Procedure panel.
Pressing the "View Favorites" tab changes the view to show the favorite steps of the
currently selected doctor. Each doctor has a set of favorite steps consisting of one step
per surgery mode: Phaco, I/A, AutoSert, Fragmentation, Vitrectomy, Extrusion, Laser,
Scissors, Forceps, and VFC. The following actions can be taken in this view:
• Pressing the "Add to Procedure" button adds the currently selected step to the
Procedure panel.
• Pressing and dragging a step to the Procedure panel.
When a step is added to the current procedure in the Procedure panel, the Step Name
dialog is displayed where the step name may be changed before it is displayed in the
Procedure panel. Pressing the "Close" button accepts the new name or the default
name if no change was made.
The Procedure panel shows the surgical steps in the current procedure that is being
created or modified. The following actions can be taken in this panel:
• Pressing the "Rename Step" button displays the Step Name dialog where a new
name for the step can be entered or selected.
• Pressing the "Delete Step" button removes the selected step from the procedure.
Pressing and dragging a step to the trash can will also remove the step from the
procedure.
• Pressing the "Add Favorite" button adds the currently selected step to the "View
Favorites" view of steps (for the current doctor) and the Surgery Steps panel will
automatically switch to the View Favorites view. NOTE: When adding steps to
Favorites, a copy of the step is made and added. It is not a reference to the
original step. Any changes made to the original step will not carry over to the
favorite.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.19

• Pressing the "Move Left" button moves the selected procedure one position to the
left. If first step is selected, moving left is not an option and this button is grayed
out.
• Pressing the "Move Right" button moves the selected procedure one position to
the right. If last step is selected, moving right is not an option and this button is
grayed out.
• Steps may also be repositioned within the procedure by pressing and dragging the
step to the desired location.
• If the procedure contains more steps than can be displayed in the panel, pressing
the arrow buttons on each end of the procedure will cause it to scroll left or right
respectively.
When the Close button is pressed on the Modify Procedure dialog, after adding steps,
the new or modified procedure will be the current procedure. Changes to a modified
procedure are not permanently saved unless the Save button is pressed in the Doctor
& Procedure Selection Dialog.
NOTE: If an instrument is connected to the system, and the current procedure

does not have a corresponding step for that instrument, the system will
automatically add the step. For instance, if a phaco handpiece is connected, but
no phaco step is added, the system will automatically add a phaco step. Steps
that were automatically added are not saved, unless the user explicitly saves the
procedure.
Saving Changes to a Modified Procedure

Changes made to a procedure through the Modify Procedure dialog are in memory
only (except for new procedures) and are not permanent until the Save button on the
Doctor & Procedure Selection dialog is pressed. Otherwise, all changes will be lost
when the application closes or another doctor or procedure is selected.
The Save button has two conditions as shown in Figure 2-9:

1. Not highlighted - Indicates the selected procedure is currently in a saved state
with no unsaved changes. In this case, pressing the Save button displays a Quick
Save dialog indicating that "The current procedure has not changed."
2. Illuminated orange - Indicates the selected procedure has been modified but
not saved. In this case, pressing the Save button displays a Quick Save dialog
indicating that "The current procedure has been modified."
In both conditions, there are three options in this dialog as follows:

• Pressing the "Save to New Procedure" button saves the procedure to a new
procedure as named by the user through the keyboard popup. When saved, the
new procedure becomes the current procedure.
• Pressing the "Save" button saves all changes made to the procedure. The button is
disabled if there are no changes to the current procedure.
• Pressing the "Close" button closes the dialog with no action taken. If the
procedure was changed, the changes are still in memory and can be saved at a
later time.
2.20 8065753060 Rev. Y

Menu Bar: Options
Pressing the Options button on the Menu Bar displays the Option Selection popup
shown in Figure 2-8. Each of the four tabs contains various options that may be
adjusted.
SETTINGS Tab: Doctor; System; Restricted
MAINTENANCE Tab: Test Instrument; Clean Cassette; Change Drainbag; Field
Service
EXTRAS Tab: Auto Gas Fill; Consumables; Update
INFO Tab: View/Copy/Delete; Event Log; On Demand Upload; About
DEMO MODE: The Constellation™ System “Demo Mode” allows the user to interact
with the user interface without being affected by missing or non-functional hardware.
For example, in Demo Mode the user can program certain screens without having
any source pressure connected. The only visible difference is that "DEMO MODE"
is displayed in yellow text in the upper left corner of the display above the footswitch
icon.
For additional details on using the system in Demo Mode, refer to the section entitled
"Demo Mode" later in this section of the manual.
RESTART button: Pressing this button causes the system to reboot and then return
to the setup screen. Restarting the system may be required if the system displays a
system fault.
SHUTDOWN button: Pressing this button causes the system to shut down.
CLOSE button: Exits the popup.
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS
Selecting Doctor from the Options menu displays the screen shown in Figure 2-10.
It allows the user to specify doctor specific configurations in the following areas as
indicated by the tabs at the top of the popup window:
• General Preferences
• Surgical Preferences
• Footswitch programming of buttons and treadle
• Laser settings including laser footswitch programming
• Volume levels for all sounds
The Save, Cancel, and Revert to Defaults buttons apply to all tabs.
• Save Button - Saves the modified items on all the doctor settings tabs and also
applies the settings to the current surgery screen (if applicable).
• Cancel Button - Exits the popup without saving or applying any settings.
• Revert To Defaults Button - Resets all the configurable items on the current
settings tab to default values.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.21

Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - GENERAL
The General Preferences tab contains the following items:
• Language - Drop down list that allows the user to select the language for labels
and annunciations. The drop list contains an entry for English and for each
language pack installed on the machine.
• Diathermy Control Type - This selection determines the default type of diathermy
to be used for the Diathermy Global Control.
• PIN - This section is only available for custom doctors and allows the user to add
a Personal Identification Number (PIN) that must be entered before accessing that
doctor's settings.
- Add Button - Pressing the Add button displays a numeric keypad that
enables the user to enter a PIN. The PIN must be entered twice before if
can be saved in the numeric pad dialog. Not present for Default Doctor.
- Modify Button - Allows the user to change an existing PIN for a doctor.
Not present for Default Doctor.
- Delete Button - Allows the user to delete an existing PIN for a doctor. Not
present for Default Doctor.
• Standard vs. Advanced Display Modes - The Standard display mode offers a
minimum number of options on the associated panels. In Advanced display mode,
the displayed panels offer optional controls for setting and configuring functions.
The default mode is Standard. Advanced display mode is available in the
following panels: Extraction, Vit Cutting, Ultrasound, and Vitrectomy Bimanual.
• Display Submode in Custom Procedures - This option applies to Custom
procedures only. When enabled, submodes are automatically displayed on the step
panel. When disabled, submodes are not diplayed unless the user taps the step
icon in the step panel.
When PropVac Single Cut

Mode Enabled, cut rate
can be set to 1 cpm (2 cpm
if a Dual Blade probe is
connected).
Figure 2-10 The Doctor Settings Popup - General Tab (Options\Settings-Doctor\General)
2.22 8065753060 Rev. Y

Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL
The Surgical tab contains six sub-tabs that are related to surgery: Infusion/Irrigation,
IOP, Reflux, Probes/Tips, AutoSert™ IOL Injector, and OZil™ handpiece.
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL - INF/IRR

The Inf/Irr (Infusion/Irrigation) Surgical sub-tab (shown in Figure 2-11) allows the
user to change certain preferences related to infusion and irrigation during surgery.
• Elevated Infusion Threshold - Allows the user to specify the value at which
the infusion is considered elevated. When the current infusion setting equals or
exceeds the specified value, the elevated infusion timer is started. NOTE: The
timer is applicable to both liquid and air infusion.
• Infusion Units - Allows the user to specify the units (mmHg or cmH20) used for
the Infusion Global control.
• Irrigation Units - Allows the user to specify the units (mmHg or cmH20) used for
the Irrigation Global control and Continuous Reflux.
• Patient Eye Level Offset - The correct Patient Eye Level Offset setting is
necessary to ensure that the displayed console readings reflect the true pressure
being delivered to the eye. The Patient Eye Level Offset is the vertical distance
from the patient's eye (while lying on the operating table) to the bottom row
of connectors on the cassette as shown in Figure 2-11. This variable distance
represents an amount of fluidic pressure that may add or subtract from the
pressure displayed on the console. The Patient Eye Level Offset allows the user to
enter this distance so the system can compensate for the fluidic pressure variable.
NOTE: On the Constellation™ Vision System, the height or position of the
infusion bottle does not affect infusion pressure delivered to the eye.
• Patient Eye Level Offset Units - Allows the user to determine the units associated
with Patient Eye Level Offset values. The unit options are inches (range = 0-39)
or centimeters (range = 0-100).
Figure 2-11 The Doctor Settings Popup - Surgical/Inf/Irr Tab (Options\Settings-Doctor\Surgical\Inf/Irr)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.23

Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL - IOP
The IOP (IntraOcular Pressure) Surgical sub-tab (shown in Figure 2-12) allows the
user to change certain preferences related to IOP during surgery.
• IOP Control - The IOP Control mode compensates for the pressure drop caused
by fluid flowing through the infusion tubing set to provide a constant IOP. IOP
compensation is available only with premium cassettes in posterior and combined
surgical modes.
• IOP Control Limit - The IOP Control Limit specifies up to what infusion flow
rate, compensation for the pressure drop in the infusion tubing set should be
applied. At flow rates higher than the set infusion control limit, IOP will drop and
no longer be maintained at the requested IOP set point. The IOP Control Limit is
only applied when aspiration is turned off. Its main function is to reduce the fluid
flowing out of the open trocar cannulas during instrument exchanges.
• FAX to IOP Control Transition - This control is used to set an IOP Activation
delay period (in seconds) which is activated when switching from FAX to IOP
Control mode. During this time period, non-flow compensated infusion pressure
is provided at the currently selected IOP pressure set point. IOP Control mode is
activated after the delay period has expired.
Figure 2-12 The Doctor Settings Popup - Surgical/IOP Tab (Options\Settings-Doctor\Surgical\IOP)
2.24 8065753060 Rev. Y

Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL - REFLUX
The Reflux sub-tab (shown in Figure 2-13) allows the user to change certain
preferences related to reflux during surgery.
• Posterior Reflux Mode - This selection determines which reflux mode,

Proportional or Micro, will be the default in the posterior steps.
• Anterior Reflux Mode - This selection determines which reflux mode, Continuous
or Micro, will be the default in the anterior steps.
• Reflux Auto Replenish - This selection determines whether the aspiration chamber
will be automatically refilled with fluid if the fluid level is low.
• Pressures -
- Micro - This selection determines the set point for micro reflux for each of the
probes specified in this field. Range: 10, 25, 50, 75, or 100%.
- Proportional Reflux Set point - This selection determines the set point for
proportional reflux. Range: 0 – 120 mmHg.
- Continuous Reflux Set point - This selection determines the set point for
continuous reflux. Range: 0 – 163 cmH20.
Figure 2-13 The Doctor Settings Popup-Surgical/Reflux Tab (Options\Settings-Doctor\Surgical\Reflux)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.25

Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL - PROBES/TIPS
The Probes/Tips sub-tab (shown in Figure 2-14) allows the user to change certain
probe and tip preferences related to surgery. The list on the left side of the screen
shows the available probes and handpieces that a can be set with a default. A selection
from this list displays the related controls on the right side of the screen.
The Vitreous Probes (Posterior and Anterior), Frag Tip, and I/A Tip selections provide
a drop down list of options available to set as the default. The selection here will be
the default option displayed on the Setup screen for that probe or handpiece.
The Phaco and OZil™ Tip selections allow the user to define a subset (preferred) list
from the available handpiece tips. The selected tips become the list displayed in the
Setup Handpiece panel, the Select Handpiece Tip dialog (in the Setup dialog), and
the Phaco/OZil™ Tip Selection list (accessed via the surgery screen). The Preferred
(default) drop-list only contains tips selected in the Preferred List. The tips are added/
removed from the Preferred drop-list using the following Preferred List criteria:
• When an item is checked, it will appear in the Preferred drop-list.
• When an item is unchecked, it will not appear in the Preferred drop-list.
• An item currently displayed as the ‘Preferred’ default in the drop-list cannot be
unchecked.
Figure 2-14 The Doctor Settings Popup - Surgical/Probes/Tips Tab

(Options\Settings-Doctor\Surgical\Probes\Tips)
2.26 8065753060 Rev. Y

Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL - AutoSert™
The AutoSert™ sub-tab (shown in Figure 2-15) allows the user to change certain
preferences related to the AutoSert™ IOL Injector.
• Load Plunger Prompt - This selection determines whether the Load Plunger or the
Preload Lens button receives emphasis when the IOL Setup Panel or AutoSert™
Setup dialog is displayed.
• Full Extension Offset - This feature is used to adjust the full extension position at
which the AutoSert™ IOL injector stops moving forward. The adjusted position is
defined in millimeters relative to the maximum extension position. At the default
setting (0) the AutoSert™ IOL injector is at its maximum extension.
Figure 2-15 The Doctor Settings Popup - Surgical/AutoSert™ Tab

(Options\Settings-Doctor\Surgical\AutoSert™)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.27

Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SURGICAL - OZil™
The OZil™ sub-tab (shown in Figure 2-16) allows the user to change the following
preferences related to surgery.
• OZil™/Phaco Sequence - When an OZil™ torsional handpiece is being used,

the OZil™/Phaco Sequence setting selection determines whether the torsional or
phaco pulse leads the sequence as shown in the illustration in Figure 2-16.
• OZil™ IP Cataract Grade Settings - For OZil™ Intelligent Phaco (IP), the user
can set default values for the Vacuum Threshold, Phaco Pulse On Time and
Longitudinal/Torsional Ratio controls for each Cataract Grade. These controls,
displayed by pressing the IP button in the Phaco surgery screen, are described
in detail in the OZil™ Mode of Operation description later in this section of the
manual.
Torsional Phaco Pause Torsional Phaco
Time
Repeat
OZil™ Torsional Before Phaco
Phaco Torsional Pause Phaco Torsional
Time
Repeat
Phaco Before OZil™ Torsional
Figure 2-16 The Doctor Settings Popup - Surgical/OZil™ Tab

(Options\Settings-Doctor\Surgical\OZil™)
2.28 8065753060 Rev. Y

Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - FOOTSWITCH
Selecting the Footswitch settings tab from the Doctor Settings, displays four tabs
that allow each doctor to specify footswitch button functions, treadle range transition
points, treadle vacuum ramping, and other general footswitch functions as shown
Figure 2-17 through Figure 2-21.
Figure 2-17 Doctor Settings - Footswitch Buttons Screen (Options\Settings-Doctor\Footswitch)
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - FOOTSWITCH BUTTONS

The Footswitch Buttons screen allows the user to change the action of each
footswitch button associated with the currently connected surgical footswitch. Each
button is labeled with its currently programmed action, and tapping on the label
displays a menu that lists all possible actions for that button in the current mode (see
Figure 2-18). Below the footswitch, each mode for the currently selected domain
(Posterior or Anterior) is displayed. Table 2-1 lists the default button configuration for
each mode and submode. The system is shipped with this default configuration and
tapping the Revert to Defaults button returns all modes to the default configuration.
EXAMPLE: Changing the button configuration.

In the Footswitch Buttons Screen, follow the steps below to change button actions.
1. Select the domain: Posterior or Anterior.
2. Select the mode.
3. If applicable, select the submode.
4. Select the label next to the button to be changed. The Footswitch Action
Selection popup shown in Figure 2-18 appears with the available selections.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.29

5. Select the desired action from the list shown on the popup. To show additional
actions, use the scrollbar to the right of the list.
6. Select whether to apply the change to the current mode/submode or to all
modes/submodes for which the footswitch action is valid in the current domain.
Selecting cancel will close the popup without changing the button action.
NOTE: When mapping the footswitch button actions to perform diathermy, the
horizontal switches do not meet the specification of minimum activation
force of 2.25 pounds. It is not in accordance to the governing standards,
to have the diathermy activation mapped to the horizontal switches.
Figure 2-18 Footswitch Action Selection Popup
There are four footswitch actions available for the optional NEGENUITY™ system:
• NEGENUITY™ Image Orientation - Toggles the image orientation between
standard and inverted. This action is also available in the NEGENUITY™ Setup
screen.
• NEGENUITY™ Menu- Displays the popup menu on the NEGENUITY™ display.
This action is also available in the NEGENUITY™ Setup screen.
• NEGENUITY™ Auxiliary - This action is configurable from the NEGENUITY™
system. Refer to the NEGENUITY™ operator's manual for details on its
configuration.
• Toggle Video Recording - This action will toggle video recording for either the
NEGENUITY™ system or an Alcon approved video recorder (see Section Three).
2.30 8065753060 Rev. Y

Table 2-1 Default Footswitch Button Actions
POSTERIOR
Left Left Right Right
Mode Submode Left Heel Right Heel
Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal
Next Submode/ Infusion/FAX
3D Diathermy Reflux Cut Toggle Next Step
Previous Step Alt/Reg Toggle
Next Submode/ Infusion/FAX Momentary
Vit Momentary Diathermy Reflux Next Step
Previous Step Alt/Reg Toggle Vit Cut
PropVac Diathermy Reflux Cut Toggle Next Step
3D Diathermy Reflux U/S Toggle Next Step
Fixed Diathermy Reflux US Toggle Next Step
Frag
Linear Diathermy Reflux US Toggle Next Step
Next Submode/ Infusion/FAX Momentary
Momentary Diathermy Reflux Next Step
Previous Step Alt/Reg Toggle Frag
Bimanual OFF:
- No Function
Extrusion -- Diathermy Reflux Bimanual ON: Next Step
- Momentary
Scissors Cut
MultiCut Diathermy No Function Close Scissors Next Step
Scissors
Prop Diathermy No Function No Function Next Step
Forceps -- Diathermy No Function No Function Next Step
Extract Diathermy No Function No Function Next Step
VFC
Inject Diathermy Reflux No Function Next Step
Laser -- Diathermy Reflux No Function Next Step
Non Infusion/FAX
-- Diathermy No Function No Function No Function No Function
Surgical Alt/Reg Toggle
ANTERIOR
Left Left Right Right
Mode Submode Left Heel Right Heel
Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal
Next Submode/ Infusion/FAX Continuous
3D Diathermy Reflux Next Step
Previous Step Alt/Reg Toggle Irrigation Toggle
Next Submode/ Irrigation Alt/ Continuous
Burst Diathermy Reflux Next Step
Previous Step Reg Toggle Irrigation Toggle
Phaco Custom Diathermy Reflux Next Step
Pulsed Diathermy Reflux Next Step
Continuous Diathermy Reflux Next Step
I/A -- Diathermy Reflux Next Step
AutoSert™
AutoSert™ -- Diathermy Previous Step No Function No Function Next Step
Retract
Next Submode/ Irrigation Alt/
Wet Ant Diathermy Reflux Cut Toggle Next Step
Previous Step Reg Toggle
Vit
Next Submode/ Irrigation Alt/
Vit Dry Diathermy Reflux Cut Toggle Next Step
Previous Step Reg Toggle
Non Irrigation Alt/
-- Diathermy No Function No Function No Function No Function
Surgical Reg Toggle
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.31

Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - FOOTSWITCH - RANGES
Depending upon the surgical mode, treadle travel is divided into either a two function
range with one transition point (detent) or a three function range with two transition
points as shown in Figure 2-19. This screen enables the user to set the percentage of
treadle travel (range) between transition points (detents). Available settings are listed
below:
• 2-Range settings:
Range 1: 1% - (20-80%)
Range 2: (21-81%) - 100%
• 3-Range settings:
Range 1: 1% - (15-31%)
Range 2: (16-32%) - (50-100%*)
Range 3: (51-100%) - 100%
* A 100% selection in Range 2 would effectively make this a 2 range setting.
Figure 2-19 Doctor Settings - Footswitch Range Screen (Options\Settings-Doctor\Footswitch)
2.32 8065753060 Rev. Y

Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - FOOTSWITCH - RAMPING
Ramping controls shown in Figure 2-20 set the ramping percentage (%) for each of
the modes specified. The ramping percentage determines how quickly each specified
3D mode (Vit 3D, Phaco 3D, or Frag 3D) will ramp up to its start value. For all three
modes the valid range is 15% - 90% and the default is 15%.
Figure 2-20 Doctor Settings - Footswitch Ramping Screen (Options\Settings-Doctor\Footswitch)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.33

Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - FOOTSWITCH - GENERAL
The General Footswitch tab shown in Figure 2-21 contains controls for the following
footswitch functions:
• Heel Double Click - Allows the user to enable/disable heel double click
functionality.
• Treadle Vibration Enable/Disabled - Allows the user to enable/disable treadle
vibration (for both treadle up and treadle down).
• Vibration Frequency - Adjusts the vibration frequency of the treadle when it goes
through detents.
• Treadle Firmness - Adjust the firmness of the treadle in a range from 0 to 100%.
Figure 2-21 Doctor Settings - Footswitch General Screen (Options\Settings-Doctor\Footswitch)
2.34 8065753060 Rev. Y

Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - LASER
The settings available in the Laser settings screen are for setting the Revert to
Standby Timeout and Footswitch Configuration (see Figure 2-22).
Footswitch Configuration
The Footswitch Configuration setting allows the user to enable the side switches to
control laser power and transition the system between Ready and Standby. Three
options are available as follows:
Power Control and Ready Standby

When this selection is enabled, the user can transition from Standby to Ready by
pressing the right side switch longer than the selected (Hold) Duration. A tone sounds
when the transition is complete. Similarly, pressing the left side switch longer than
the selected (Hold) Duration will transition the system from Ready back to Standby.
Pressing the side switches for intervals shorter than the selected (Hold) Duration will
increase or decrease treatment laser power.
Power Control Only

This selection allows the side switches to increase (right switch) or decrease (left
switch) the treatment laser power.
Standard
This setting disables the side switches entirely. Power control and switching from
Standby to Ready mode can only be done from the front panel of the system.
Figure 2-22 Doctor Settings - Laser Screen (Options\Settings-Doctor\Laser)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.35

(Hold) Duration
The (Hold) Duration setting allows the user to select the duration of time that a side
switch must be held in order to activate the transition to Ready mode (right switch) or
Standby mode (left switch). The range of selection is from 0.5 second to 1.5 seconds
in 0.1 second increments.
Revert to Standby Timeout
This setting determines the time period, in minutes, after which the system will revert to
the Standby mode of operation due to inactivity. Inactivity is defined as no footswitch
activation during the time period. The setting can be adjusted to 2, 5 or 10 minutes.
Aiming Beam On During Standby Mode
This setting determines whether or not the aiming beam is on during Standby Mode.
If "No" is selected, the aiming beam will be on in Ready mode only.
Menu Bar: Options - DOCTOR SETTINGS - SOUND SETTINGS

Selecting the Sounds tab displays the screen shown in Figure 2-23. This screen
enables the operator to set a volume for all continuous tones as well as voice
confirmations for each doctor. Sounds for the following items cannot be completely
turned off:
• Diathermy • Laser
• Errors • Laser Firing
• Phaco Occlusion • Invalid Key
• Voice • Elevated Infusion
Each sound can be changed individually or all at once by enabling the Master
Override.
Figure 2-23 Doctor Settings - Sound Screen (Options\Settings-Doctor\Sound)
2.36 8065753060 Rev. Y

Menu Bar: Options - SYSTEM SETTINGS
Selecting "System" from the Options menu displays the screen shown in Figure 2-24.
This popup screen allows the user to configure settings that are part of the system's
normal operation. Once saved by pressing the Save button, the settings become the
default when the system is powered up.
Figure 2-24 System Settings - Settings Screen (Options\Settings-System\Settings)
Menu Bar: Options - SYSTEM SETTINGS - SETTINGS

The Settings screen shown in Figure 2-24 allows adjustments to the following system
parameters:
• Screen Brightness - Sets the relative brightness of the touch screen. The
allowable range is 1 – 9, with 7 as the default.
• Language - Sets the language used for system purposes and affects the following
items:
- New doctor default language
- End Case report
- Doctor Settings report
- System Settings report
- Surgical Parameters Report
• Touchscreen Calibrate - Displays the touch screen calibration utility program
to allow the user to perform a 4 point touch screen calibration. This button is
disabled when the system is in surgery mode.
• If the system is equipped with WiFi capabilities (optional), the Current Printer
field will display the currently connected printer by host name or IP address.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.37

• Configure Printer - If the system is equipped with WiFi capabilities (optional),
pressing the Configure Printer button displays the Configure Printer popup where
a printer can be specified for sending print jobs from End Case or View/Copy/
Delete. When the dialog comes up it will automatically search for printers on
the network (if connected) and display the results in the Available Printers field.
Selections and controls in this dialog are defined below:
- Print Format - Postscript or PCL
- Current Printer - Shows the currently configured printer either in full name or IP
address format. This field will be blank if no printer is available or selected.
- Edit IP - Pressing this button displays a popup with a numeric keypad where
an IP address can be manually entered into the system. If a valid IP address is
entered, the Current Printer field is updated to show the new entry.
- Available Printers - Shows the printers currently available through the network.
If printer is selected, the Current Printer field will be updated to reflect the
selection.
- Start/Stop Search1 - Pressing this button starts (or stops) a search for available
printers on the network (if connected).
• Auto Gas Fill Purge Cycles - Allows the user to determine the number of purge
cycles (1-3) when performing an AGF.
• NEGENUITY™ 3D Visualization - When the NEGENUITY™ 3D Visualization
configuration setting is changed by pressing either the Enabled or Disabled
button, the user is prompted to confirm system restart. If the Restart button is
pressed on the prompt, any System Settings changes made are saved and the
system is restarted. If the Cancel button is pressed, the prompt closes and the
NEGENUITY™ configuration is restored back to its original Enabled\Disabled
configuration.
Menu Bar: Options - SYSTEM SETTINGS - CONNECTION
If the system is equipped with WiFi capabilities (optional), the Connection screen
shown in Figure 2-25 allows the operator to specify network connection information
for the instrument to communicate with printers on the local area network as well as
the Alcon Enterprise Server for remote service activities.
Network Connection1:
• Configure Button - Pressing the configure button displays the Select Wifi
Network popup that allows the user to select a WIFI network to associate with the
system for connecting to remote devices such as printers. When the dialog opens,
it lists all available WIFI networks. An entry containing a checkmark indicates the
system is currently connected to that network.
Pressing the Scan button prompts the system to refresh the “Available WIFI
Networks” list.
It is recommended to contact your Information Technology department for

assistance in configuring the system for your network.
1 If equipped for wireless connection.
2.38 8065753060 Rev. Y

• Enabled – Indicates the connection is active and available for use.
• Disabled – Connection is not active or not available for use.
• Connection Status - Indicates the connection status of the network, printer, and
barcode reader.
eConnectivity1:
• Enabled – Indicates the connection is active and available for use.
• Disabled – Connection is not active or not available for use.
• Time of Day - Allows selection of time slots in 0.5 hour increments to schedule
connection activities.
• Recurring Frequency - Indicates at what frequency a connection will be made:
Daily - Every day at the specified time.
Weekly – Once a week at the specified time on the specified day of week.
Monthly – Once a month on the specified day of month and time of day.
Note: Selecting a day greater than 28 will prevent a connection from
occurring in all months.
Figure 2-25 System Settings - Connection Screen (Options\Settings-System\Connection)
Menu Bar: Options - SYSTEM SETTINGS - REMOTE CONTROL

For information regarding the Remote Control settings, refer to "REMOTE
CONTROL" on page 2.11.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.39

Menu Bar: Options - SYSTEM SETTINGS - VIDEO OVERLAY (OPTIONAL)
STANDARD DEFINITION VIDEO OVERLAY
If a Standard Definition Video Overlay card is installed in the system, the Video
Overlay setting screen shown in Figure 2-26 provides the settings to enable and setup
the Video Overlay system with the Constellation™ Vision System. See Section Three
for a diagram of connections made when connecting a camera, video recorder, and
monitor to the system.
• Video Overlay - Allows the user determine whether or not Video Overlay is
available. Choices: Enabled or Disabled.
• Video Broadcast - Allows the user determine the video format (NTSC or PAL).
• Video Connection - Allows the user set the type of cable (S-Video or Composite)
used to connect to the video recording equipment.
• Label Opacity - Allows the user determine the opacity of the video overlay output
(range: 0 – 15).
• Transparent Text - When Transparent Text is enabled, the text shown on the
monitor is transparent so the image on the screen can be seen through the text.
When disabled, text is displayed on an opaque box to provide greater contrast
with the image.
• Monitor Type - Selecting "Wide Screen" adjusts the position of the text/controls
as appropriate for a wide screen monitor.
Example of screen that overlays the live video

displayed on an external monitor.
Figure 2-26 System Settings - Standard Definition Video Overlay Screen

(Options\Settings-System\VideoOverlay)
2.40 8065753060 Rev. Y

HIGH DEFINITION VIDEO OVERLAY
If a High Definition Video Overlay card is installed in the system, the Video Overlay
setting screen shown in Figure 2-27 provides the settings to enable and setup the
Video Overlay system with the Constellation™ Vision System. See Section Three
for a diagram of connections made when connecting a camera, video recorder, and
monitor to the system.
• Video Overlay - Allows the user determine whether or not Video Overlay is
• Video Connection - Allows the user to set the type of cable (S-Video or HDMI)
used to connect to the video recording camera equipment.
• Force English - When enabled, forces the text on the overlay to be displayed in
English regardless of the selected doctor or system language.
• Hi-Def Margin - Allows the user to set a margin in percent that defines the area
in which the overlay graphics and text should be contained (range is 0.0 to 5.0
percent).
Video Recorder - There are no controls for configuring a Video Recorder other than
footswitch mapping that allows the user to start recording and pause recording when
the footswitch button is pressed. A Video Camera icon appears in the upper left hand
corner of the Main Constellation™ screen when the recorder is recording. See Section
Three for information on connecting the video recorder.
NOTE: For new systems, if the optional High Definition Overlay is not installed
on the system, the message "Video Overlay is not installed on this system" will
appear in this screen.
HIGH DEFINITION VIDEO OVERLAY WITH THE NEGENUITY™ 3D

VISUALIZATION SYSTEM
The Video Overlay setting screen shown in Figure 2-27 provides the settings
to enable and setup the Video Overlay system with the Constellation™ Vision
System. See Section Three for a diagram of connections made when connecting an
NEGENUITY™ 3D Visualization System to the Constellation™ Vision System.
• Video Overlay - Allows the user to determine whether or not Video Overlay is
• Force English - When enabled, forces the text on the overlay to be displayed in
English regardless of the selected doctor or system language.
• NEGENUITY™ Margin - Allows the user to set a margin in percent that defines
the area in which the overlay graphics and text should be contained (range is 0.0
to 5.0 percent).
Video Recording - Video recording can be toggled between start and pause
recording if a footswitch button is mapped with the "Toggle Video Recording" action.
Additionally, recording can be controlled in the General Tab of the NEGENUITY™
setup dialog. A Video Camera icon appears in the upper left hand corner of the
Main Constellation™ screen when the NEGENUITY™ 3D Visualization System is
recording.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.41

HDVO Installed HDVO Installed and NEGENUITY™ System Connected
Example of screen
that overlays the live
video displayed on an
external monitor or
the NEGENUITY™
system.
Figure 2-27 System Settings - Video Overlay Screens (Options\Settings-System\VideoOverlay)
2.42 8065753060 Rev. Y

Menu Bar: Options - MAINTENANCE
Maintenance options selectable from the Options popup (see Figure 2-8) include Test
Instrument, Clean Cassette, Change Drainbag, and Field Service.
Test Instrument - This function is available whenever the system is in surgery mode
and there is an unprimed/untested cassette, probe or handpiece. It allows the priming
and test of the related surgical tool without leaving the current surgery screen.
Clean Cassette - The Clean Cassette feature allows the operator to pump the
aspirated fluids from the cassette into the drainbag without having to go through to
End Case. Pressing the Clean Cassette button causes the process to begin without
further user interaction. Once the cleaning process has begun, a popup appears
providing feedback on the progress of the cleaning.
Note: This popup also comes up automatically when the user transitions from
the Surgery screen area to End Case, if the cassette has been primed and
infusion, FAX, and irrigation are not on.
Change Drainbag - Pressing this button displays the "Change Drainbag" popup.
Changing the drainbag, then pressing the "Done" button informs the system that a
new (empty) drainbag has been installed on the cassette.
Field Service - Used by the trained Alcon Field Engineer to access system
information that will aid in the servicing of the instrument. A pass code is required to
access this information.
Menu Bar: Options - EXTRAS

Extras options, selectable from the Options popup, include Auto Gas Fill,
Consumables, and Update.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.43

Menu Bar: Options - EXTRAS - AUTO GAS FILL
The Auto Gas Fill popup shown in Figure 2-28 steps the operator through the process
of filling syringes with the specified gas (either C3F8 or SF6). In Surgery Mode,
the operator can optionally use the Auto Gas Fill button within the surgery header to
launch this popup.
Gas Mix Ratio Guide
Figure 2-28 Auto Gas Fill Popup (Options\Extras\Auto Gas Fill)
WARNING!
Be sure to connect gas bottles to the proper connectors. Bottle valves, tubing,
and connectors are color coded as follows: C3F8 = Red, SF6 = Blue.
1. Make Gas Selection: C3F8 or SF6 - Gas bottle(s) are connected to system
through the mechanical regulator valve located at the back of the console.
2. Press Start To Begin Filling - Press the “Start” button to start filling the syringe
with the selected gas type. The button is initially disabled and is only enabled during
the time period between a gas selection and the commencement of a fill operation.
Fill Progress - Displays the status of the fill process. After the process is
complete, the number of purge cycles is displayed. The number of purge cycles is
set in the System Setting screen (Options\Settings\System) and has a range from 1
to 3 cycles. The number of purge cycles affects the gas concentration percentage
in the Auto Gas Fill syringe according to the following table.
Number of Purge Minimum Gas Concentration, [G]min

Cycles SF6 C3F8
1 97.3% 97.1%
2 99.4% 99.2%
3 99.8% 99.7%
2.44 8065753060 Rev. Y

The status bar graphically illustrates the progress of the fill operation. If
necessary, press the Stop button to stop filling the syringe in the middle of a fill
cycle. The button is initially disabled and is only enabled during a fill operation.
When the fill operation is complete, System Advisory 1401 is displayed as shown
in Figure 2-28. This advisory is a reminder that the gas in the syringe is undiluted
and additional steps must be manually taken in order to achieve the desired Gas
Mix Ratio.
The Gas Mix Ratio Guide is a tool to assist the user in calculating the syringe volume
adjustments required in order to achieve the desired mixture.
WARNING
Adjusting the Gas Mix Ratio Guide does not automatically fill the syringe to the
desired mixture. The user must manually move the plunger to make the gas volume
adjustment in the syringe after detaching the syringe assembly from the console.
To achieve a specific gas/air mix ratio (after the system has purged then filled the
syringe to 20cc of gas), use the Gas Mix Ratio Guide as follows:
1. Move the slider on the guide to the desired percent of gas mixture. The guide
displays the syringe reading that the plunger must be moved to in order to achieve
the displayed percentage of gas in the syringe (18% -> 10.8 cc in Figure 2-28).
2. For an 18% gas mixture, push the plunger from 20 cc to 10.8 cc. Then pull the
plunger out to 60 cc. The resulting mixture will be 18% of the selected gas.
NOTE: Refer to the Directions For Use (DFU) included with Auto Gas Filler
Pack for detailed setup instructions.
Menu Bar: Options - EXTRAS - CONSUMABLES

This button and the Consumables button displayed on the Setup screen (Figure 2-7)
both display the Consumables popup when pressed. The Consumables popup is
described later in this section of the manual.
Menu Bar: Options - EXTRAS - UPDATE

This button is available only when the system is in End Case and, when pressed,
displays the Constellation™ Features popup. This popup shows a list of system
features and their status (locked or unlocked). Contact your local Alcon Sales
Representative for information on updating the system.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.45

Menu Bar: Options - INFO
Info options selectable from the Options popup (see Figure 2-8) include View/Copy/
Delete, Event Log, On Demand Upload, and About (system information).
Menu Bar: Options - INFO - VIEW/COPY/DELETE

The View/Copy/Delete screen shown in Figure 2-29 allows the user to perform data
management related tasks including:
• Copy data from a source memory device to a destination memory device. This is
essential to backup data or to move settings to another system.
• Rename selected data items including doctor names, procedure names, and
surgical end case names.
• Delete selected data items including custom doctors and surgical end cases.
• View selected data items including doctor settings and surgical end cases.
• Print selected data items including doctor settings and surgical cases.
Scroll
Arrows
Copy Data
Button
Figure 2-29 View/Copy/Delete Screen (Options\Info\View/Copy/Delete)
The Source tab of this screen shows information about the media used as the
source of a data management or copy operation. The Destination section shows the
information for the media used as the targeted location to move data to. Each section
shows the media options available to manage data. To select a media option, simply
press the selection and the display will show the current contents in a hierarchal
structure. The media options are:
• System – Refers to the local Constellation™ Vision System file.
• CD/DVD – Removable media.
• SD-Card – Removable Media card.
If CD/DVD or SD-Card are selected and neither is inserted into the system, a popup
will appear indicating that no media has been detected and prompting the user to
insert a valid media.
2.46 8065753060 Rev. Y

At the top of each section, the status of the selected media is displayed.
• xx% Free - Percent of total space available for storage. In Figure 2-29, the display
indicates that 52% of the system data storage media is available for additional
data.
• Locked – Indicates that a read-only CD/DVD is inserted into the system.
The Data Structure Tree displayed after media selection allows the user to rename,
delete, view, or print the selected item. If any of these operations can be performed on
the item, the associated button, located at the bottom of the screen, will have a dark
background color. There are items such as "Default Doctor" that cannot be renamed
or deleted.
If an item has additional items below it in the structure, selecting it will expand the
structure and selecting again will collapse the structure. If the structure tree expands
beyond the screen limits, scroll arrow are available in each corner to scroll to hidden
parts of the structure.
To Rename an item:
1. Press the item to select it then press the Rename button. Only doctor names,
procedure names, and surgical end case data items can be renamed.
2. When the Keyboard popup appears, press the Backspace key or the Clear key to
delete the current name then type in the new name.
3. Press Close to save the name and return to the previous screen. Pressing Cancel
will close the keyboard popup without saving the changes.
To Delete an item:
1. Press the item to select it then press the Delete button. Some items cannot be
deleted such as the Default Doctor.
2. When the confirmation popup appears, press Yes confirm or No to cancel the
delete action.
VIEWING AND PRINTING DATA

Doctor Settings and Surgical end case data items can be viewed and printed. To
view the data associated with one of these items, select the item then press the View
button. A detailed view of the item is displayed such as the sample shown in Figure
2-30. The Page arrow buttons are used to navigate to the previous page and next page.
Pressing the close button will close the View screen and return to the View/Copy/
Delete screen.
To print a detailed report of an item, select the item then press the Print button.
A popup will be displayed indicating that the report is being sent to the printer
connected to the system. Printouts of data are identical to the layout of a reports
displayed using the View button.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.47

Figure 2-30 Sample View of a Doctor Settings Report
COPYING DATA
Copying data between the source device and destination device is performed by first
selecting a source data item and then pressing the Copy Data button. When pressed,
the source data item is copied to the destination device at the same location defined
by the source data item (i.e., the hierarchy is preserved).
To finish the process of copying data to a SD Card or a CD/DVD, the Write button
must be pressed. If there is not enough space on the remote disk, you will be
prompted to remove some items and try again.
If an attempt is made to copy a file that already exists on the destination device, a
popup will be displayed indicating the file already exists and the following options
are available:
• Overwrite - Replaces the destination file with the new source file.
• Copy - Selecting Copy opens the keyboard popup so the user can rename the file.
The old file is not overwritten in this case.
• Cancel - Stops the Copy process with no changes.
• Skip - This button is displayed only when copying multiple doctors that have
already been saved to the destination. Pressing the Skip button skips the current
doctor listed in the upper left corner of the popup and moves to the next doctor.
2.48 8065753060 Rev. Y

Menu Bar: Options - INFO - EVENT LOG
Figure 2-31 shows the Event Log where system messages are displayed that have
occurred during the previous seven days. The list can be filtered to display a specific
type of message by pressing the associated button on the right side of the screen.
To view the Event Log:

1. Press Options from the Menu bar.
2. Under the Info tab press "Event Log." The default view is displayed showing a list
of all faults, errors, advisories, and information messages. Pressing the associated
button will hide that type of message on the list. If the list goes beyond the
viewable area, a scroll bar is provided to move through the list.
3. To view the details of a specific message, select the message on the list, then press
View Details. A pop up appears with a description of the message and the date and
time it occurred.
4. Press Close to go back to the previous screen.
Figure 2-31 Event Log (Options\Info)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.49

Menu Bar: Options - INFO - ON DEMAND UPLOAD
The primary purpose of "On Demand Upload" is to provide the ability to upload
system files to Alcon personnel as an aid to troubleshooting a system. In the event
that uploading files is required, the user will be stepped through the process by Alcon
personnel. On Demand Upload is active only during End Case and requires a network
connection.
Menu Bar: Options - INFO - ABOUT

The "About Constellation™" popup (shown in Figure 2-32) displays the software
configuration information for the Host and sub modules:
All Languages installed in the system are also listed here.
Patent information for the Constellation™ Vision System is displayed by pressing the
Patents button.
Figure 2-32 "About Constellation™" Screen (Options\Info (REL_5.40.09 shown))
2.50 8065753060 Rev. Y

Menu Bar: Options - INFO - HELP (?) Button
Pressing the Help (?) button displays the popup shown in Figure 2-33 that provides
selections to display Help Videos and the User Manual. Additionally, the Recovery
Training selection provides the functionality to train the user on how the system
behaves during an error and fault recovery sequence. Pressing this button will display
a prompt indicating that continuing will temporarily disable surgical functions.
Pressing "Yes" advances the system to the Recovery Training popup where system
errors can be generated for training purposes.
When Video Help is selected, the Video Help Selection popup shown in Figure
2-33 is displayed offering a list of help topics. Once the topic is selected, the user
can choose between Video Help and Wizard Help. Pressing the Video Help button
launches a help video that plays completely through the video for the selected topic.
Wizard Help plays the same video but adds textual information and stops at various
points to give the user a chance to perform the required actions before continuing.
Video Help
Wizard Help
Figure 2-33 Help Screens
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.51

The controls on the Video Help Display operate as follows:
• Start - Places the video at its beginning.
• Rewind - Rewinds the video one segment.
• Play/Pause - This button is labeled Pause when the video is playing and Play
when the video is not playing.
• Forward - Forwards the video to the next segment.
• End - Forces the video to be forwarded to the end.
• Move Left - Moves the entire video popup to the left side of the surgical panels.
• Move Right - Moves the entire popup to the right side of the surgical panels.
• Close - Closes the Video Help popup.
The controls on the Wizard Help Display operate as follows:

• Previous - Rewinds the video one segment and pauses.
• Replay - Rewinds the video one segment and play continues.
• Continue - Resumes video play.
• Next - Advances the Help screen to the next video segment and associated help text.
• Move Left - Moves the entire video popup to the left side of the surgical panels.
• Move Right - Moves the entire popup to the right side of the surgical panels.
• Close - Closes the Video Help popup.
2.52 8065753060 Rev. Y

Menu Bar: NEGENUITY™ Button
The NEGENUITY™ button displayed in the menu bar shows the status to the
NEGENUITY™ system and allows access to popups used to setup the parameters of
the system when used in conjuction with the Constellation™ system. The appearance
of the button conveys the state of the NEGENUITY™ system including its disabled
and connection status as summarized below.
A grayed-out button indicates the NEGENUITY™ system is disabled in
the System Settings. Pressing the button in this state does not display the
NEGENUITY™ Setup dialog, but rather generates an invalid key press tone
and displays a prompt that reads, "The NEGENUITY™ system features are
disable on this system."
A colored button with a gray background indicates the NEGENUITY™

system is enabled but not yet connected. Pressing the button displays the
NEGENUITY™ Setup dialog with all of its tab page controls disabled.
A colored button with a green background indicates the NEGENUITY™

system is both enabled and connected. Pressing the button displays the
NEGENUITY™ Setup dialog with all of its tab page controls enabled.
Pressing the enabled NEGENUITY™ button displays the NEGENUITY™ Setup

dialog shown in Figure 2-34. The dialog contains four tabs along with buttons that
enable interaction with the NEGENUITY™ system.
NEGENUITY™ Case Management - The Start and End Case buttons allow the user
to signal the start and end of a case on the NEGENUITY™ system.
Footswitch Button Labels - This graphic is provided as reference to show the
footswitch action currently mapped to the corresponding button on the footswitch.
Initially, the graphic will show Constellation™ footswitch mapping, but will switch
to show NEGENUITY™ menu control mapping when the Show Menu button in the
Commands tab is pressed. NEGENUITY™ menu footswitch mapping is shown in
Figure 2-34.
Revert To Defaults Button - Closes the dialog and reverts the current
NEGENUITY™ image mode to the factory defaults.
Close Button - Closes the dialog. If the system is in NEGENUITY™ menu mode,
with footswitch mapping as shown in Figure 2-34, it will revert to Constellation™
footswitch mapping when the dialog box is closed.
NOTE: Grayed-out buttons on these screens indicate that the system is not
communicating with the NEGENUITY™ system. Refer to "NEGENUITY™ 3D
VISUALIZATION SYSTEM CONNECTIONS" on page 3.16 to ensure that the
systems are properly connected and setup.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.53

The following descriptions refer to functions on the NEGENUITY™ system. Refer to
the NEGENUITY™ operator's manual for detailed descriptions of these functions.
General Tab - The General tab contains selections to configure the current settings
for Image Orientation and Imaging Mode, as well as to control video recording and
take video snapshots.
• Image Orientation: Standard - Sets the orientation of the main view displayed on
the NEGENUITY™ 3D Flat panel display to standard.
• Image Orientation: Inverted - Sets the orientation of the main view displayed on
the NEGENUITY™ 3D Flat panel display to be inverted. This is commonly used
if the camera is mounted backward on the microscope (due to space constraints)
or if the surgeon places an inverting lens into the field of view.
• Imaging Mode: Next - Cycles to the next Image Mode.
• Imaging Mode: Previous - Cycles to the previous Image Mode.
• Recording: Start - Starts video recording.
• Recording: Stop - Stops video recording.
• Snapshots: Take - Takes a snapshot of the video shown on the panel display.
NEGENUITY™ menu
control footswitch mapping
is shown here. The system
reverts to the current
Constellation™ footswitch
mapping when the dialog
is closed or the Hide
Menu button under the
Commands tab is pressed.
Figure 2-34 The NEGENUITY™ Setup Screen - General Tab
2.54 8065753060 Rev. Y

Settings Tab - The Settings tab shown in Figure 2-35 contains selections to configure
the current settings for Light Profile, Camera Gain and Color Channel.
• Light Profile: Next - Cycles to the next Light Profile.
• Light Profile: Previous - Cycles to the previous Light Profile.
• Gain: Increase - Increases the camera gain (digitally brightens).
• Gain: Decrease - Decreases the camera gain (digitally darkens).
• Color Channel: Next - Cycles to the next Color Channel.
• Color Channel: Previous - Cycles to the previous Color Channel.
Figure 2-35 The NEGENUITY™ Setup Screen - Settings Tab
Viewport Tab - The Viewport tab shown in Figure 2-36 contains selections
to configure the format to be used for displaying multiple viewports on the
NEGENUITY™ 3D flat panel display. NOTE: The secondary viewport must
be connected and configured on the NEGENUITY™ system (refer to the
NEGENUITY™ operator's manual for additional information).
• Secondary View: Off - Turns off the Secondary Viewport display mode on the flat
panel main view.
• Secondary View: Split Screen - Divides the flat panel main view into half screen
areas for each of the two different video sources.
• Secondary View: Full Screen - The main view shows the secondary video source
full screen.
• Secondary View: PIP - Used to position the Picture-in-Picture (PiP) viewport into
the corner of the flat panel main view.
• Swap Sources: Swap - Used to switch between two different video sources on the
flat panel main view.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.55

Figure 2-36 The NEGENUITY™ Setup Screen - ViewPort Tab
Commands Tab - The Commands tab shown in Figure 2-37 allows the user to
control and interact with the popup menu displayed on the NEGENUITY™ 3D flat
panel display. This menu can be activated from the footswitch if a button is mapped
with the "NEGENUITY™ Menu" command. To map a button, go to Options/Doctor
Settings/Footswitch.
• Menu: Show - Shows the popup menu on the NEGENUITY™ 3D flat panel display.
• Menu: Hide - Closes the popup menu on the NGENUITY™ 3D Flat panel display.
• Navigations/Selection: Previous - Navigates to the previous menu item.
• Navigations/Selection: Next - Navigates to the next menu item.
• Navigations/Selection: Select - Selects the current menu item.
Figure 2-37 The NEGENUITY™ Setup Screen - Commands Tab
2.56 8065753060 Rev. Y

Menu Bar - Screen Navigation
The Constellation™ Vision System operates in one of three “System States”:
• Setup – Contains the screens for setting up the system in preparation for surgery.
• Surgery – Contains the screens for controlling and viewing surgical functions
(vacuum, ultrasound, etc.)
• End Case – Contains the screens for completing and reporting a case.
Navigation between the System States is associated with certain rules as stated in
Table 2-2:
Table 2-2 Screen Navigation Rules

From To Rules
Setup Surgery None
Surgery End Case Going from Surgery to End Case will “close” the case. This
includes saving case related information. To avoid accidentally
closing a case, the user is asked to confirm the transition.
End Case Setup None
Surgery Setup The intended use of the system is to always end each case
by going to End Case. However, the user is not forced to go
through End Case to start a new case. In order for the system
to know when a case ends without going through End Case,
a pop-up is displayed when navigating from Surgery to Setup.
This popup asks the user whether he wants to start a new
case (or just go back to Setup for the current case).
End Case Surgery Not possible
Setup End Case Going from Setup to End Case will close the case. This
includes saving case related information. To avoid accidentally
closing a case, the system prompts the user to confirm the
transition.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.57

GLOBAL CONTROLS
The Globals area of the screen allows the user to control certain functions that are
available in any of the system states (Setup, Surgery, and End Case). Global functions
can typically be turned on or off independently of other surgical functions (vacuum,
U/S power, etc.), although in some cases global functions are required to be on in
order to perform surgery. When a global function is on, the On/Off button is green
and the background becomes lighter in color.
The availability of the Infusion, FAX, and Irrigation global controls depends upon the
type of cassette inserted into the system as follows:
CASSETTE TYPE INFUSION FAX IRRIGATION
Premium Combined Yes Yes Yes
Premium Posterior Yes Yes No
Premium Anterior No No Yes
Infusion Global Control

The Infusion global control (see Figure 2-38) is a dual function that controls both
infusion and IOP Compensation (if enabled in the Options/Doctor/Surgical popup).
The infusion global control allows the user to:
• Turn infusion On/Off.
• Adjust infusion setpoints.
• Enable IOP Compensation mode (secondary function buttons).
• Display more information that allows the user to easily make detailed changes to
the infusion settings.
Table 2-3 shows the Infusion Global as it is displayed in the various infusion states.
The Elevated Infusion Timer is displayed when infusion rises above the setpoint
entered in the Surgical Options popup (Options/Doctor/Surgical). It displays the
amount of time infusion has been elevated above the setpoint.
WARNING!
The closed loop system that adjusts IOP cannot replace the standard of care in
judging IOP intraoperatively. The surgeon must continue the common practice
of informally judging IOP using the following:
• Finger palpation on the globe
• Tactile feedback of the surgical instruments (eye wall deformation with
manipulation of instruments)
• Retinal vessel perfusion/pulsations
• Presence of corneal edema
If the surgeon believes the IOP (using the techniques above) is not responding to
the system settings and is dangerously high, this may represent a system failure.
The surgeon can do one or more of the following as they deem appropriate in this
situation (with care to avoid sudden hypotony):
• Close the infusion stop-cock
• Pinch the infusion line
• Remove the infusion line from the sclerotomy
2.58 8065753060 Rev. Y

INFUSION GLOBAL CONTROL (IOP NOT ENABLED)
Infusion Set point/Actual Value

Infusion On/ Infusion Units
Off Button
Increase Value Button
Elevated Infusion Timer

Infusion Source
Decreases Value Button
Infusion Flow Infusion Flow Units

More
Information
NOTE: More Information

Popups have built-in timers
that allow them to fade
away after a few seconds of
inactivity. In addition, pressing
anywhere outside the popup
causes it to disappear.
INFUSION GLOBAL CONTROL (IOP ENABLED)

Infusion Set point/Actual Value
Infusion On/ Infusion Units
Off Button
Infusion Source
Elevated Infusion Timer
IOP On/Off Button
(Only displayed when IOP is
enabled-see Options menu)
Infusion Flow
Infusion Flow Units
More
Information
Figure 2-38 Infusion Global Control
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.59

The More Information popup is designed to switch between modes (Regular and
Alternate) and set values for the associated set points:
• Regular infusion - Infusion value the system will go to upon entering infusion mode.
• Alternate infusion - Infusion value the system will go to when the footswitch
button is pressed that is assigned the "InfusionFaxAltRegularToggle" action.
Additionally, the popup contains buttons used to change the Fluid Container and the
Patient Eye Level shown in Figure 2-39.
Figure 2-39 Fluid Container Setup and Status Popups

These popups are displayed by pressing the Change Fluid Container and the Change Patient Eye Level
buttons, respectively, on a global control More Information popup. The Status popup is also available from
the Setup Screen Status panel.
2.60 8065753060 Rev. Y

Table 2-3 Infusion Global Control States
INFUSION GLOBAL
INFUSION STATE NOTES
DISPLAYED (IOP enabled)
The "grayed-out" IOP button indicates the casette has

Regular Infusion - OFF
not been calibrated.
Regular Infusion - ON On button is green. Background highlighted.
Alternate Infusion - OFF Text is orange.
Alternate Infusion - ON On button is green. Background highlighted orange.
Backup Pressure Infusion global disabled
• Infusion global disabled except for On/Off button.

Backup Pressure - selected • Dashes are white when off.
from System Prompt • Dashes are yellow when off and in Alternate
infusion
When system is in infusion Chamber Overflow, the

Infusion ON - Chamber
infusion global will dash out the actual reading while
Overflow
keeping flow value, up/down, and on/off enabled.
When system is in Alternate infusion Chamber

Alternate Infusion ON - Overflow, the infusion global will dash out the actual
Chamber Overflow reading while keeping flow value, up/down, and on/off
enabled.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.61

Fluid/Air Exchange (FAX) Global Control
The FAX global control turns Fluid/Air Exchange on/off and adjusts the setpoints.
The More Information popup is designed to switch between modes (Regular and
Alternate) and set values for the associated set points:
• Regular FAX - Value the system will go to upon entering FAX mode.
• Alternate FAX - Value the system will go to when the footswitch button is
pressed that is assigned the "InfusionFax/AltRegularToggle" action.
The Elevated Infusion Timer is displayed when infusion rises above the setpoint
entered in the Surgical Options popup (Options/Doctor/Surgical). It displays the
amount of time infusion has been elevated above the setpoint.
The FAX Global control changes color according to its state similar to the Infusion
Global control. Refer to Table 2-3 as an example of what the FAX Global control
color changes indicate. NOTE: FAX does not have a Chamber Overflow state.
FAX Set point/Actual Value

FAX On/
Off Button Elevated Infusion Timer
FAX Source FAX Units

More
Information
Figure 2-40 FAX Global Control
2.62 8065753060 Rev. Y

Irrigation Global Control
The Irrigation global control turns Irrigation On/Off and adjusts setpoints. The More
Information popup is designed to switch between modes (Regular and Alternate) and
set values for the associated set points:
• Regular Irrigation - Irrigation value the system will go to upon entering Irrigation mode.
• Alternate Irrigation - Irrigation value the system will go to when the footswitch
button is pressed that is assigned the "Irrigation Alt/Reg Toggle" action.
Additionally, the popup contains buttons used to change the Fluid Container and the
Patient Eye Level shown in Figure 2-39.
The Irrigation Global control changes color according to its state similar to the
Infusion Global control. Refer to Table 2-3 as an example of what the Irrigation
Global control color changes indicate. NOTE: Irrigation does not have a Backup
Pressure state.
Irrigation Set point/Actual Value
Irrigation Increase Value button

On/Off
Button Decrease Value button
Irrigation Source More Irrigation Units

Information
Figure 2-41 Irrigation Global Control
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.63

Diathermy Global Control
Diathermy Global displays the diathermy mode (fixed/proportional), displays
the setpoint/actual value, and adjusts setpoints. The mode can be selected from
the More Information dialog by selecting either Fixed or Proportional. Selecting
Fixed diathermy provides a fixed percentage of diathermy power when the mapped
footswitch button is pressed. In Fixed Diathermy, the control background will change
to orange during activation for setpoints greater than 26%.
Proportional diathermy increases the diathermy power in proportion to the distance the
footswitch treadle is depressed. In Proportional Diathermy mode, pressing the mapped
footswitch button displays the Proportional Diathermy progression box. When the
progression box is displayed, depressing the treadle increases the diathermy power.
Fixed
Increase Value button
Diathermy Set point/Actual Value

Decrease Value button
Proportional
More
Information
Mode Selection Buttons
Figure 2-42 Diathermy Global Control
2.64 8065753060 Rev. Y

Illuminator Global Control
The Illuminator Global control turns an illuminator On/Off, adjusts its set point, and
displays the More Information popup. Controls for up to four illuminators as shown
in Figure 2-43 may be available depending upon the configuration of the system. Two
controls are displayed and the Selection buttons beneath the controls determine which
illuminators they control (the check marks indicate which illuminators are selected).
Illuminator Set point/
Illumination Actual Value
On/Off Button
and usage ring
Increase Value
button
Decrease
Value button
Illumination
Units
Selection
buttons
More Information
Figure 2-43 Illuminator Global Control
This indicator ring has three indication colors:

• Green: 0 to 199 hours
• Yellow: 200 to 399 hours
• Orange: greater than 399 hours
The More Information popup for the Illuminators allows the user to set values for
the setpoints and confirm lamp hours. The system automatically sets the upper limit
for each probe by reading the RFID tag for the probe. The surgeon has the ability to
override this automatic upper limit for luminous flux, but if he does so, a popup will
appear that will alert him to the consequences of doing so (i.e. reduction in exposure
time to give the equivalent aphakic energy exposure). If four illuminators are available,
the More Information popup allows for the setup of all four illuminators in one screen.
WARNING!
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged operation of any fiber optic endoilluminator probe in air. This may
result in tip deformation of plastic fiber optic endoilluminator probes. This system will
display the following advisory to indicate this condition: "Further increasing the output
level in air can damage fiber tips. Would you like to continue?" Avoid placing illuminated
fiber optic endoilluminator probes in contact with materials such as sterile drapes.
NOTE: Light output from an illumination source change may greatly exceed
the output from the previous source. Adjust output to lower settings after the
illumination source is changed.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.65
SYSTEM STATE AREA
The System State area provides specific information on one of the following available
states: Setup, Surgery, or End Case. These states are selected by pressing the
associated tab in the menu bar.
Setup
System setup can be accomplished using the seven setup panels shown in Figure
2-44, the Step-by-Step Setup, or a combination of both. The Step-by-Step Setup is
explained later in this section and includes more detailed information than the Setup
panels. In both the Setup panels and Step-by-Step Setup, the user can perform the
following actions:
• View available surgical tools and consumables options.
• Connect the surgical tools and options essential for the upcoming operation.
• Prime/Test the surgical tools before commencing surgery.
Basic Setup
The basic setup uses the seven setup panels shown in Figure 2-44. These panels are
always displayed in the system state area during setup. Experienced Constellation™
Vision System users will normally use these panels to quickly setup the system.
Note: Using the barcode scanner to scan a pack automatically sets up these
panels for the accessories in that pack.
The seven panels displayed on the Setup Screen are:
• Fluidics • Accessories • Status
• Probe • Illuminators
• Handpiece • Lasers
SYSTEM STATE AREA
Figure 2-44 The System State Area of the Main Screen
2.66 8065753060 Rev. Y

Basic Setup: The Fluidics Setup Panel
The Fluidics Setup panel allows the user to view and update setup information
relating to the cassette, fluid container, and associated surgical tools. Figure 2-45
shows the panel first without a cassette inserted then with a Premium Combined
cassette inserted. If fluidics is not available, this panel will indicate the condition with
a strike-through over the cassette illustration.
No Cassette Inserted Automatic Stopcock Type Cassette

Inserted
Figure 2-45 The Fluidics Setup Panels
Pressing the Cannula button displays the following selections:
Cannula Button:
• 20 GA Cannula
• 23 GA Cannula
• 25 GA Cannula
• 27+™ Cannula
Infusion Tubing:
This information is displayed only when the cassette is inserted and shows the
compatible infusion tubing (i.e., stopcock type: automatic or manual) for the inserted
cassette.
• Automatic Stopcock – User does not have to operate the stopcock when switching
between air and fluid.
• Manual Stopcock – User has to turn the switch on the tubing set to alternate
between air and fluid flow.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.67

Basic Setup: The Probe Setup Panel
This panel shows setup information related to the vitreous probe selection. Figure
2-46 shows the Probe Setup Panel:
Type Drop Down List
Figure 2-46 The Probe Setup Panel
Probe Type Button - Pressing this button displays the drop down list that has the
various options for vitreous probe selection (see second screen in Figure 2-46).
Pressing one of the selections makes that probe type the active selection.
When the system detects that a probe has been connected, the probe type is
automatically selected and the “connected” icon appears next to the selection
list.
Skip Prime Option Button - Selecting this option tells the system to skip priming
the selected vitreous probe. This button is a toggle switch that displays a check mark
in the center of the button when active. When the check mark is present, the system
will not prime nor tune the vitreous probe in the next Prime/Tune request.
Probe status is displayed at the bottom of the setup panel and indicates whether the
probe has been primed and tested. A " "indicates that the priming and/or testing
have been completed, while an " " indicates that they have not.
2.68 8065753060 Rev. Y

Basic Setup: The Handpiece Setup Panel
This panel shows setup information related to handpiece selections. Figure 2-47
shows the Handpiece Setup Panel.
Figure 2-47 The Handpiece Setup Panel
AutoSert™ Button - The label next to this button shows the currently selected IOL
cartridge. Pressing this button causes the AutoSert™ port on the front panel to
illuminate. When the system detects that an AutoSert™ handpiece has been plugged
in, and it has finished calibrating, the “connected” icon is displayed next to this
button as shown in Figure 2-47.
Status of the AutoSert™ handpiece is shown directly below its button. If an AutoSert™
handpiece is connected, the Status indicators will indicate one of the following
conditions:
Status 1:
• If the AutoSert™ handpiece is calibrating, the display shows “Calibrating …”
• If the Plunger has been loaded, the display shows “ Plunger Loaded”
• If the Plunger has not been loaded, the display shows “ Plunger Not Loaded”
Status 2:
• If an IOL Cartridge has been loaded, the display shows “ IOL Preloaded”.
• If an IOL Cartridge has not been loaded, the display shows
“ IOL Not Preloaded”.
Note that the actions of loading the plunger and preloading the IOL can be done in
either the Setup screen or the Surgery screen by pressing the AutoSert™ button located
in the menu bar at the top of the System State Area (see Figure 2-48). Refer to the
"Surgery Modes and Submodes" section of this manual for a detailed explanation of
the AutoSert™ handpiece setup and use.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.69

Figure 2-48 The AutoSert™ Setup Screen
Handpiece Button - Pressing the Handpiece button on the panel in Figure

2-47 displays the list of handpieces that may be used with the system. When the
system detects that the user has plugged in the handpiece, the handpiece name is
automatically selected and the “connected” icon appears next to the selection
list.
The following handpiece types are selectable from the drop list:
• Extrusion
• Extrusion SoftTip
• Frag (Fragmentation)
• I/A (Irrigation/Aspiration)
• OZil™ Handpiece
• Phaco
• None
Handpieces that are marked with an asterisk (*) are automatically detected by the
system.
Tip Button - Pressing the Tip button displays the tips that the operator can choose
for the currently selected/inserted handpiece. The tip selection button is hidden if the
currently selected handpiece is “None”
Handpiece status is displayed at the bottom of the setup panel and indicates whether
the probe has been primed and/or tuned. A " "indicates that priming and/or tuning
have been completed, while an " " indicates that they have not.
2.70 8065753060 Rev. Y

Basic Setup: The Accessories Setup Panel
Figure 2-49 shows the Accessories Setup Panel. On the panel, pressing a button next
to an accessory will display a popup with specific selections for that accessory.
The following accessories selections are available:
• Auto Gas Fill (AGF)
• VFC (Viscous Fluid Control)
• Forceps
• Scissors
• Diathermy
Figure 2-49 The Accessories Setup Panel
Auto Gas Filling (AGF) - Pressing this button illuminates the ring on the AGF port
on the front panel. When the system detects connection of the AGF syringe assembly,
the connected icon appears next to Auto Gas Fill.
VFC (Viscous Fluid Control) - Pressing this button illuminates the ring on the VFC
port on the front panel. When the system detects connection of the VFC tubing set,
the connected icon appears next to VFC.
Forceps - When the system detects that the user has plugged in the Forceps handpiece
the connected icon appears next to the selection list. In addition, when the
operator presses this button, the system illuminates the LED on the forceps port on
the front panel.
Scissors - Pressing the button next to Scissors shows the following scissors options:
• Proportional
• Multicut
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.71

When the system detects that the user has plugged in the Scissors handpiece, the
scissors type is automatically selected and the connected icon appears next to
the selection list. In addition, when the user selects a scissor type from this list, the
system illuminates the LED on the scissors port on the front panel.
Diathermy - Pressing this button illuminates the ring on the Diathermy port on the
front panel.
Basic Setup: Illuminators Setup Panel

The Illuminators Setup Panel is shown in Figure 2-50.
Illuminator Ports - Pressing any one of the illuminator ports allows the user to select
between a straight, wide angled, or chandelier endoilluminator probe. In addition,
when the user makes a selection from the drop list, the system illuminates the ring on
the associated illuminator port on the front panel. When the system detects connection
of an endoilluminator probe on a port, the “connected” icon appears next to that port
on the selection list and the operator will not be able to select another probe type from
the touchscreen for that port (the selection list will be locked).
If a non-RFID probe is inserted into an illuminator port, the system displays

"Unrecognized" in the Setup panel and the Illumination Type Selection popup
displays a list of possible selections.
Figure 2-50 The Illuminator Setup Panel
2.72 8065753060 Rev. Y

Basic Setup: Lasers Setup Panel
The Lasers Setup panel shown in Figure 2-51 displays setup information related to
laser probes.
Laser Port 1 and 2 Probe Selection - Pressing the Laser Port 1 or 2 button displays a
list of selectable probe types:
• Endo
• LIO (Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope)
When one of the buttons is pressed, the system also illuminates the ring on the
associated laser port on the front panel. When the system detects the connection of a
laser probe on a port, the connected icon appears next to the selection list, and
the user will not be able to select another probe from the touchscreen for this port (the
selection list will be locked).
If a non-RFID probe is inserted into a laser port, the system displays "Unrecognized"
in the Setup panel. Pressing "Unrecognized" displays a list of possible selections.
Figure 2-51 The Lasers Setup Panel
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.73

Basic Setup: Status Panel
The Status panel shown in Figure 2-52 displays the inlet pressure and provides status
of its current state:
• Green background: inlet pressure within optimal range
• Yellow background: inlet pressure acceptable but with potentially reduced
performance
• Orange background: inlet pressure out of range
The Status panel also displays the Patient Eye Level (PEL) including units (inches or
cm).
More Information Button - Pressing the More Information button opens the
popup shown in Figure 2-52 that provides additional details on Inlet Pressure and
PEL.
When the Inlet Pressure tab is selected, the actual value in psi is displayed in the
appropriate segment of the status bar.
When the Patient Eye Level tab is selected, the Patient Eye Level offset and units
can be specified. A graphic that depicts the distance from the cassette connectors to
the patient’s eye level is also displayed.
Figure 2-52 The Status Panel
2.74 8065753060 Rev. Y

Step-by-Step Setup Button
The Step-by-Step Setup is a set of detailed instructions intended to guide the user
through the complete process of setting up the system for the surgery to be performed.
The instructions are set up in stages that are intended to be followed in sequence as
numbered. Pressing the Step-by-Step Setup button in the Menu Bar displays the intial
screen as shown in Figure 2-53.
Instructions
Stage
Selection
Graphical
Guide
Contextual
Help
Figure 2-53 The Sequential Step-by-Step Instruction Screen
The screen is divided into three main sections:

• Stage Selection
• Instructions
• Graphical Guide
Setup begins with the General stage of the process. The user should complete each
step in the Instructions section while refering to the associated graphics in the
Graphical Guide. When all steps in the stage are complete, pressing the next Stage
Selection button in the sequence will advance to the next setup stage.
Pressing the Help button at the bottom of the screen displays a reference diagram that
defines each section of the Step-by-Step Setup screen.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.75

Stage Selection - The stages shown in Figure 2-53, are standard for posterior and
combined cassettes. If an anterior cassette is inserted, the number of required stages is
reduced to those required for anterior setup as listed below:
Anterior Stages
1. General
2. Cassette and Tubing
3. BSS™ Container
4. Handpiece
5. Accessories
6. Prime/Test
Instructions - The Instructions section contains detailed instructions for the current
stage. Numbered steps refer the user to a corresponding area in the Graphical Guide
with the same number. The instructions displayed will vary depending upon the stage
selected and the state of the system in that stage.
Graphical Guide - This section contains graphics to guide the user in instrument
selection and connection. The graphics displayed will vary depending on which stage
is selected and on the state of the system in that stage.
An example of how the state of the system affects the content of the instructions and
graphics is shown in Figure 2-54. The Vit Probe stage is shown but with the system
in different states. The screen on the left shows a system with no vit probe connected.
In this case, instructions are provided to connect a vit probe along with the ability in
the graphics section to select a specific vit probe. Notice that the Connection Guide
displays yellow arrows to show exactly where to connect the probe.
The screen on the right shows a system with a vit probe already connected and
recognized. In this case, the instructions and graphics show only those steps necessary
to complete the setup for the Vit Probe stage.
VIT PROBE NOT CONNECTED VIT PROBE CONNECTED
Figure 2-54 Step-by Step Setup - Vit Probe Stage Comparison
2.76 8065753060 Rev. Y

In Figure 2-54, the Contextual Help area is populated with two selections: Show
Help Video and LED Color Guide. These selections will appear in stages where these
options are available. Pressing the Show Help Video button displays a help video for
the currently selected stage as shown in Figure 2-55.
Figure 2-55 Step-by-Step Setup Video Help
Figure 2-56 shows the LED Color Guide. This guide explains the meaning of the
colors of the ring illuminators on the console. The guide is available in the following
stages:
• Vit Probe
• Handpiece
• Illuminators
• Accessories
Figure 2-56 Step-by-Step Setup Color Guide
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.77

Start Prime Button And Popup
After the instrument connections are complete, pressing the Start Prime button
displays the Prime & Test Status popup (see Figure 2-57) and begins the prime/test
process for the current setup (Figure 2-57 shows possible variations as determined by
the current setup and user actions). The status bar uses different colors to indicate the
progress and completion status of each segment of the prime/test process.
• Partial green bar - indicates that the current segment is in progress.
• Complete green bar - indicates that the process related to that segment has
finished with no errors.
• Yellow bar - indicates that the user has cancelled the process by pressing the Stop
button at the end of the bar.
• Red bar - indicates that the process related to that segment has failed with errors.
When the Prime and Test is complete, the system will transition to the Surgery screen.
Prime & Test Status with a Probe

and Handpiece connected to
system.
Prime & Test Status with IOP

compensation enabled. The
Calibration segment indicates that
the infusion line is being calibrated.
A "Skip Calibration" button appears
during the calibration segment to allow
the user to skip to the next segment.
Prime & Test Status where the Stop

button has been pressed during the
Calibration segment. The user has the
option to either Continue, Restart, or
Skip Calibration which will continue to
the next segment without calibration.
Stop Button
Figure 2-57 Prime & Test Status Bar Variations
• Push Prime - Push prime is the system default when a new cassette is inserted
into the system at the beginning of a surgical case. During push prime, irrigation
solution is "pushed" through both the irrigation and aspiration lines. When push
prime is active, the Start Prime button appears with no icon as shown at left.
• Suction Prime - Suction prime is used in the event an accessory must be
re-primed after the surgical case has started. In this situation, the handpiece
must be inserted into a container of sterile solution, and priming is accomplished
through suction (aspiration) pulling the solution from the container. When suction
prime is active, the Start Prime button appears with an icon as shown at left.
2.78 8065753060 Rev. Y

Consumables Button And Popup
Pressing the Consumables button displays the Consumables popup shown in Figure
2-58. In the Consumables popup the user can view, add, or remove the consumables
used for the current surgical case. The top of the popup displays the items that have
been added to the current case either through this popup or the bar code scanner.
The bottom of the popup shows the list of consumables that can be added to the
case. Scrolling through the consumables list is accomplished using the scroll bar and
arrows next to the list.
The operator can choose to view all consumables or filter the list as desired by
pressing the associated button on the Display Filter list.
To add an item: Select the item from the consumables list in the bottom of the popup
then press the Add button. The selection will be added to the top list as an item used
for the current case.
To remove an item: Select the item from the list in the top of the popup then press the
Remove button. The selection will be removed from the top list.
Custom Consumables
Pressing the Custom Display Filter shows a list of Consumables that were added by
the user when scanning a barcode not currently known to the system. The Manage
button, available only in the Custom Display Filter, launches a detailed view of the
Custom Consumables where each item can be Edited or Removed from the system
(see Figure 2-58).
NOTE: Refer to the Directions For Use (DFU) included with each accessory kit/
consumable pack for detailed instructions on how to setup that accessory.
Figure 2-58 Consumables Popup
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.79

SURGERY SCREEN
The Surgery Screen shown in Figure 2-59 is organized in the following way:
• Menu Bar - The menu bar is context aware and changes the options depending
on the surgical mode. Buttons that appear here allow the user to make selections
for items such as Cataract Grade, handpiece testing and tip selection, AutoSert™
Setup, and Auto Gas Fill control.
• Surgery Panels - Each Surgery Panel corresponds to a “Surgical Function” and
contains the various controls necessary to control each function.
• Step Panel - The Step Panel allows the user to select Surgical Modes and
Submodes by pressing a Step Button and a Submode Button. The look of the Step
Panel depends on which Surgical Procedure (discussed later) is selected.
Menu
Bar
Timer Tab
Surgical Controls
Surgery
Panels
Submode Button(s)
Step Button(s)
Step
Panel
Figure 2-59 The Surgery Panel
Auto Gas Fill (AGF)

The Auto Gas Fill button shown in the Menu Bar of Figure 2-59 displays the Auto
Gas Fill popup when pressed. This popup is used to fill the supplied 60 cc syringe with
approximately 20 cc of concentrated gas (SF6 or C3F8) for the procedure. The user
must determine the clinically appropriate concentration (gas/air mix ratio) to be injected
by manually mixing the concentrated gas in the syringe with filtered air (air filter is
supplied in the pack).
For additional information on the Auto Gas Fill feature, refer to page 2.44 or the
Directions For Use (DFU) included with Auto Gas Filler Pack.
2.80 8065753060 Rev. Y

The General Purpose Timer
The Timer provides a visual display for counting up and counting down from
a pre-configured value. Pressing the Timer Tab (00:00:00) displays the Timer
Configuration popup shown in Figure 2-60. The timer features the following
functionality:
• Pressing the Timer Tab when it is running will stop the timer.
• Pressing the Timer Tab when it is not running will launch the Timer Configuration
popup.
• Pressing the Start button from the Timer Configuration popup starts the timer and
closes the popup.
• If the timer is started when the readout is 00:00:00, it will count up indefinitely.
• For countdown mode, enter a starting time using the keypad then press Start. The
timer generates an audible tone when it reaches 00:00:00.
• At the end of each case, the counter stops counting and is reset to 00:00:00.
Figure 2-60 Timer Configuration Popup
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.81

Surgery Screen: Surgical Controls
The surgical panels make use of the surgical controls to change the values of the
associated surgical functions. The controls provide a variety of information and
capability to the user. As an example, the Vacuum control is shown in Figure 2-61.
Surgical Function Name
Increase Setpoint
Value Button(s)
Progress Bar
Start Value
End Value
On/Off Button
Decrease Setpoint
More Information Button
Value Button(s)
Actual Value
More Information Popup
Slider Controls
Figure 2-61 Vacuum Control and More Information Popup

The surgical controls contain some or all of the functionality described here:
• On/Off Button– Toggles the function on and off. A green button indicates that the
function is on while a dark gray button indicates that the function is off.
• Up/Down Arrow Buttons – Increase/decreases the associated setpoint value. The
button face indicates whether or not the associated setpoint can be increased or
decreased. The button is disabled when increases/decreases are not allowed.
• Start Value – Shows the current setpoint at the treadle starting position.
• End Value - Shows the setpoint at full treadle.
2.82 8065753060 Rev. Y

• Actual value – Displays the current value of this parameter and depends on the
position of the footswitch treadle. The actual value is shown as an absolute value
and also as a relative percentage of the maximum via the progress bar.
• Surgical function name – The value displayed represents the surgical function
being manipulated by the On/Off or Action buttons.
• More Information Button - Pressing the More Information button displays the
More Information popup where the setpoint values can be changed in greater
detail.
• Slider Controls - On the More Information Popup, the slider controls adjust a
value by pressing and dragging the slider to the desired value location.
Surgery Screen: Surgical Controls - More Information Popup

When the More Information button is pressed on a surgical control, a More
Information Popup is displayed as shown in Figure 2-61 (Vacuum Setting shown in
this example). Settings modified here take effect immediately (i.e., before the user
exits the popup). Also, each control will have a slightly different popup given that
some controls have more functionality than others.
Surgery Screen: Surgical Controls - Surgical Control Options

For some surgical configurations, such as calibrating scissors, it is necessary to
provide additional options as shown in Figure 2-62.
Figure 2-62 Surgical Control Option
• On/Off button - Toggles the option On and Off. This control is disabled when the
functionality is not available.
• Left Option button - Allows the user to initiate the function assigned to this button
("Start" in Figure 2-62).
• Right Option button - Allows the user to initiate the function assigned to this
button ("Close" in Figure 2-62).
• Save Calibration Values - Pushing this button saves calibration values.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.83

Surgery Screen: Surgical Controls - Surgical Control Drop Lists
For some controls in certain configurations it is necessary for the user to define
additional parameters. Such parameters might include the Cutting Table, whether
Linear or Fixed Flow is desired, or Dynamic Rise Time among others. When such
a choice is needed, a drop list appears near the surgical control as shown in Figure
2-63.
NOTE: The control is shown in the

"Advanced Display Mode" which is a
selection made in the Doctor Settings
display. Go to "Options/ Settings/
Doctor/General" and the display
modes are shown on the right of the
display. For additional information see
Menu Bar: Options in this section of
the manual.
Dropdown list expanded.
Figure 2-63 Surgical Control with Dropdown List (Advanced Display Mode)
Surgery Screen: Surgical Steps

A “Surgical Step” identifies a related set of activities performed during a surgical
case. Examples are “Membrane Peeling” and “Core Vitrectomy.” A Surgical Step
is associated with a Surgery Mode and contains unique information relevant to that
mode such as the sub mode, which functions are on, and various values of surgical
parameters. Selecting a Surgical Step determines which surgical functions are
available. Surgical Steps that are grouped together form a Surgical Procedure.
Surgery Screen: Surgical Procedures

A Surgical Procedure describes which “Surgical Steps” are most likely to be
performed during a surgery. The goal is to organize the screen in such a way that the
surgeon can select steps “from left to right” as the surgery progresses. The user can
create custom procedures or modify existing procedures. A procedure must contain at
least one step and can contain as many steps as desired.
Note: See "Menu Bar: Doctor & Procedure Selection" found earlier in this
section for detail information on creating and editing procedures.
2.84 8065753060 Rev. Y

Surgery Screen: Surgical Procedures - Accurus™ Classic Procedure
The Accurus™ Classic procedure is a special procedure that is designed to look
similar to the Accurus™ instrument with the exception that it contains the laser step.
The Accurus™ Classic procedure has several unique properties:
• Steps cannot be added or removed.
• Steps cannot be moved.
• Steps cannot be renamed.
• All Steps will always fit on the screen so there’s no need for scrolling.
• The sub mode buttons will always be visible if there is more than one sub mode
for that step.
The Accurus™ Classic procedure contains one step for each surgery mode. However,
at any point in time only a subset or a “View” of the steps is displayed. The Views
differ depending on:
• The Fluidics Operating Mode (Combined, Anterior, or Posterior)
• The connected U/S handpiece (defaults to Phaco if no U/S handpiece is
connected)
The screen shown in Figure 2-64 shows the Accurus™ Classic procedure in combined
mode.
Figure 2-64 Accurus™ Classic Surgery Screen (Advanced Display Mode shown
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.85

Surgery Screen: Surgical Procedures - Custom Procedure
Custom Procedures can contain any combination of steps in any order and with user
defined names as shown in Figure 2-65.
Custom Procedures are intended to contain all the steps that the user has included to
perform a certain task. However, in some cases the user may need to do something
that is not included in the current procedure. In addition to the manual method of
adding surgical steps through the Modify Procedure screen as described previously in
this section, the system automatically adds relevant step(s) when an instrument (such
as a vitreous probe) is connected. For example if the user suddenly requires the use of
the laser, the system automatically adds a laser step to the end of the procedure when
it detects the connection of a laser probe. Also, if a laser probe is already connected
when the procedure is selected, a laser step is added to the end of the procedure.
Selected Step
Figure 2-65 Surgical Step Panel - Custom Procedure
Surgery Screen: The Surgical Step Panel

The Surgical Step panel organizes the set of activities (steps) to be performed during
a surgical procedure in a left to right sequence. The procedure may be customized to
meet the needs of the surgeon and the case to be performed. The Step panel provides
the following functionality:
• Shows which step is currently selected (note that a step is associated with only
one surgical mode).
• Shows which sub mode is currently selected for that step.
• Allows the user to select a new step.
• Allows the user to select a new sub mode.
• Allows the user to select a “hidden” step (if applicable).
A selected step has the following properties:

• The area behind the icon is highlighted in blue.
• The icon is animated.
• If enabled, buttons for submodes are shown above the step button.
The Step buttons act as radio buttons in that only one step at a time can be selected
and a step must always be selected at any point in time.
2.86 8065753060 Rev. Y

If more steps are available than can be contained on the step panel, pressing the step
farthest left (or right) will reveal the next step to the left (or right) that may be hidden.
Additionally, the "More Steps" button is displayed as shown in Figure 2-66. Pressing
the More Steps button displays the Step Selection popup where all the steps in the
procedure can be viewed using either the left/right scroll arrows or by pressing and
dragging the scroll bar. Selecting a step will make it the active step and return the
system to the surgical screen.
Left Scroll Arrow Right Scroll Arrow
Scroll Bar
Figure 2-66 Surgical Step Panel - More Steps Button
Surgery Screen: Surgical Submode Buttons

For Accurus™ Classic procedures, the submode buttons are always displayed as
shown in the Figure 2-64. The submode buttons act like radio buttons (similar to the
step buttons) and the currently selected sub mode is highlighted.
For Custom procedures, submode display behavior is determined by the Doctor

Settings. If "Display Submodes in Custom Procedures" is disabled, the submode
buttons are only displayed when the user presses the currently selected step. The
submode buttons are then displayed for five seconds enabling the user to select the
desired submode. After five seconds, the submode buttons will disappear.
If "Display Submodes in Custom Procedures" is enabled, the submode buttons are

always displayed. Note: VFC submode buttons are always displayed regardless of
the Doctor Settings.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.87

SURGICAL MODES AND SUBMODES
The Constellation™ Vision System offers nine surgical modes that can be customized
to meet the needs of each surgeon. Table 2-4 lists each mode and its associated
submodes.
Table 2-4 SURGICAL MODES AND SUBMODES

BIMANUAL
MODE SUBMODES (Advanced Mode)
Proportional
3D Momentary WetAnt VitDry Forceps
Vitrectomy (Vit) Vacuum
(Post, Comb)† (Post, Comb)† (Ant, Comb)† (Ant)† (Post, Comb)†
(Post, Comb)†
3D Burst Pulsed Continuous Custom††
Phaco
(Ant, Comb)† (Ant, Comb)† (Ant, Comb)† (Ant, Comb)† (Ant, Comb)†
3D Fixed Linear Momentary
Fragmentation (Frag)
(Post, Comb)† (Post, Comb)† (Post, Comb)† (Post, Comb)†
Irrigation/Aspiration (I/A)
(Ant, Comb) †
Extrusion
(Post, Comb)†
Laser
(Post, Comb)†
Multicut Proportional Forceps
Scissors
(Post, Comb)† (Post, Comb)† (Post, Comb)†
Forceps
(Post, Comb)†
Vacuum (Inject
Viscous Fluid Control Extract Inject
only)
(VFC) (Post, Comb)† (Post, Comb)†
(Post, Comb)†
AutoSert™
(Ant, Comb)†
† Indicates the type of cassette that must installed to enable the specified mode. Ant = Anterior Cassette; Post = Posterior Cassette;
Comb = Combined Cassette.
†† Available in the Advanced View only.
Each surgical mode has a set of associated surgical panels. The following settings
affect how some panels are displayed:
• Standard vs. Advanced display mode - The standard display mode offers a
minimum number of options in the associated panel. In advanced display mode,
the displayed panels offer optional controls for setting and configuring functions.
The default mode is Standard. Advanced display mode is available in the
following panels: Extraction, Vit Cutting, Ultrasound, and Vitrectomy Bimanual.
Selecting Standard or Advanced mode is done in the Options\ Doctor Settings\
General screen (see Figure 2-67).
• Vacuum mode vs. Flow mode - By default, the posterior modes show the vacuum
panel for vacuum mode, and the anterior modes show the aspiration panel for
flow mode (if available). In Advanced display mode, the Function mode panel
allows the user to select between Flow and Vacuum modes. Changing modes will
change the panel accordingly.
• Bimanual mode - Vit, scissors, and VFC modes offer the surgeon the option of
controlling two instruments simultaneously such as a vitreous probe and a pair
of forceps (in Vit mode). This is referred to as Bimanual mode and the additional
instrument is activated by pressing the Bimanual button.
2.88 8065753060 Rev. Y

STANDARD DISPLAY MODE
ADVANCED DISPLAY MODE
Figure 2-67 Standard versus Advanced Display Modes: The Standard mode provides the basic
controls necessary in each surgical step; the Advanced mode offers additional controls that enable
the user to utilize all the capabilities of the Constellation™ Vision System.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.89

VITRECTOMY MODE
Vitrectomy mode provides vitreous cutting and vacuum using a pneumatically
powered vitrectomy probe connected by tubing to a pulsed air pressure source and
a vacuum port. Five submodes are available, each with its own default cut rate and
vacuum level. Values are adjusted using touch arrow keys, even when the footpedal is
depressed. Cutting and/or vacuum begins when the footpedal is pressed.
Vitrectomy: 3D SUBMODE
In the 3D submode shown in Figure 2-68, the user controls both the vitreous cut rate
and the vacuum pressure linearly. This submode allows for setting the treadle start
and end values for both the cut rate and the vacuum pressure.
In 3D submode, vacuum delivered to the probe and the probe cutting rate are both
regulated by the amount of footpedal depression. The display contains adjustable
values for vacuum level at footpedal start and at full depression; and cut rate at
footpedal start and at full depression. The unique features of this mode are:
• Vacuum can be set to start at 0 and rise to its maximum setting at full footpedal
depression, while the cutting rate can be set to start at its maximum setting and
decrease as the footpedal is depressed (or any combination thereof).
• To prevent generating excessive flow when the footpedal is first depressed, the
vacuum level is ramped up from 0 to the set starting level during the first part of
the pedal travel.
• When the Start Limit is greater than 0, the vacuum uses the Ramping % selected
in the Doctor's Settings to ramp from 0 to the Start Limit.
The controls for each panel in 3D submode have the following functions:
Vacuum Panel:
• On/Off - Turns vacuum on or off.
• Vacuum Start Up/Down Buttons - Set the vacuum level at treadle start.
• Vacuum End Up/Down Buttons - Set the vacuum level at full treadle.
• Vacuum More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup
allowing the user to make changes using slider controls. Also provides panel
specific configuration capabilities (such as drainbag change).
The following Vacuum panel controls are available only in the Advanced view:
• Flow Limit On/Off Button - Turns flow limit on or off. When the
maximum rate is reached the vacuum level can no longer be increased. If
the Flow Limit is turned off, the vacuum level is limited only by the Start
and End values.
• Flow Limit Start and End Up/Down Buttons - Set the start and end limits
for the flow rate.
• Flow Limit More Information Button - Displays the Flow Limit More
Information popup.
• Flow/Vacuum Toggle - Switches between Flow Mode and Vacuum Mode.
• Flow Limit Control Type Drop List - Determines whether the flow limit is
fixed or linear. In Fixed, the limit is constant regardless of the flow level.
In Linear, the limit varies depending on the flow level.
• Reflux Label - Read Only display of the current reflux configuration
together with its current value.
• Reflux More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup
that allows for changing the current mode and the setpoint associated with it.
2.90 8065753060 Rev. Y
Cutting Panel:
• Cut Rate On/Off Button - Turns the cutter on or off.
• Cut Rate Start Up/Down Buttons - Set the cut rate at treadle start.
• Cut Rate End Up/Down Buttons - Set the cut rate at full treadle.
• Cutting More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup.
• Cutting Table Drop List (Advanced view only) - Allows selection of port open
duty cycle that is appropriate for the procedure to be performed.
Core† - Provides the maximum port open duty cycle control suited for core
vitrectomy where higher flow rates and efficiency are desirable.
50/50† - Provides a 50% port open duty cycle control for those users who
prefer that the cutter is open and closed for the same amount of time.
Shave† - Provides the minimum port open duty cycle suited for removing
delicate tissue (such as vitreous shaving and membrane dissection) where
lower flow rates are desirable.
† For HyperVit™ probes the Core, 50/50 and Shave modes have similar BSS™ flow rates.
Aspiration Panel (Flow mode-Advanced view only):

• Flow On/Off Button - Turns flow mode on or off.
• Flow Start Up/Down Buttons - Set the flow level at treadle start.
• Flow End Up/Down Buttons - Set the flow level at full treadle.
• Flow More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup for a
detailed view of the settings.
• Vacuum Limit Start and End Up/Down Buttons - Set the start and end limits for
vacuum.
• Vacuum Limit Control Type Drop List - Determines whether the vacuum limit is
fixed or linear. In Fixed the limit is constant regardless of the vacuum level. In
Linear the limit varies depending on the vacuum level.
• Vacuum Limit More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup
Forceps Panel (Advanced view only):

• Pressure On/Off Button - Turns Bimanual mode on or off. When Bimanual mode
is off the only option is to turn it on. When Bimanual mode is on, the forceps
pressure can be set.
• Pressure Start Up/Down Buttons - Set the pressure at the start of treadle
depression.
• Pressure End Up/Down Buttons - Set the pressure at full treadle.
• Forceps More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup.
• Calibration - When the calibration control is turned on, the control changes to one
that allows a selection between Start and Close. When Start is selected the start
pressure is applied to the port, and when Close is selected, the close pressure is
applied to the port. If neither is selected then no pressure is applied to the port.
Pressing the Save Calibration Values button saves the calibrated values.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.91

Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Vacuum Panel
Standard Display Mode Controls
Examples of Treadle Operation in Vit 3D Submode
Cut Rate Re Vac End Limit

duc
Start Limit ing
Cu
te R
ate uum
Vac
sing
(Bi Manual Off) Incr
ea
g
Rampin Vac Start Limit
Cut Rate
1 End Limit
Increasing Treadle Depression
Cut Rate End Limit
ate
(Bi Manual Off) Cut R Vac End Limit
asing
Incre
u m
Vacu
Cut Rate asing
Incre
Start Limit
g
Rampin Vac Start Limit
1
BI MANUAL ON Forceps End Limit Cut Rate

(forceps active in End Limit
footswitch position 1)
ate
Cut R Vac End
asing
Incre
Limit
um
Vacu
Cut Rate Start asing
Incre
Forceps Start Rampin

g
Vac Start Limit
1 2
Figure 2-68 Surgery Screen: Vitrectomy Mode - 3D Submode (Advanced View shown)
2.92 8065753060 Rev. Y

Vitrectomy: MOMENTARY SUBMODE
The Momentary submode shown in Figure 2-69 contains values for maximum
vacuum limit and cut rate set point. As the footpedal is depressed the vacuum
increases linearly up to the End limit with the actual vacuum displayed in the Actual
Value box and its linear equivalent reflected in the progress bar. The End value can
be adjusted using the Up/Down arrow buttons or selecting the More Information
button to display the More Information popup that has a slidebar for large numeric
adjustments in vacuum.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Vacuum Panel
Vacuum End Limit
Cut Rate when

Momentary switch
activated
(Bi Manual Off)
um
acu
ingV
r eas
Inc
Vacuum Start Limit
1
Forceps End Limit
Vac End
Cut Rate when Limit
BI MANUAL ON Momentary switch
(forceps active in activated
footswitch position 1) uu
m
c
Va
Forceps Start Vacuum Start

1 2
Figure 2-69 Surgery Screen: Vitrectomy Mode-Momentary Submode (Advanced View shown)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.93

Probe cutting at a preset rate is activated when the applicable footswitch button
is momentarily activated. The default activation button is the right horizontal
button but it may be configured differently for each doctor. To view the current
configuration, press the footswitch icon in the upper left corner of the display.
The controls for each panel in Momentary submode are the same as in 3D submode
with the following exceptions:
• No Cut Rate Start Up/Down Buttons - Cut rate is a constant rate set by the End
buttons and activated by the programmed button on the footswitch.
• No Vacuum (or Flow) Start Up/Down Buttons.
Vacuum Panel:
• Vacuum More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup,
the Flow Limit is turned off, the vacuum level is limited only by the End
value.
for the flow rate.
Information popup.
that allows for changing the current mode and the setpoint associated with
it.
Cutting Panel:
2.94 8065753060 Rev. Y

vacuum.
• Vacuum Limit More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup

is off the only option is to turn it on. When Bimanual mode is on, the Forceps
depression.
that allows a selection between Start and Close. When Start is selected, the Start
pressure is applied to the port, and when Close is selected, the Close pressure is
applied to the port. If neither is selected, then no pressure is applied to the port.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.95

Vitrectomy: PROPVAC SUBMODE
The Proportional Vacuum (PropVac) submode shown in Figure 2-70 contains values
for maximum vacuum limit and cut-rate set point. As the footpedal is depressed the
vacuum increases linearly up to the End limit with the actual vacuum displayed in
the Actual Value box and its linear equivalent reflected in the progress bar. The End
value can be adjusted using the Up/Down arrow buttons on the vacuum control.
Alternatively, selecting the More Information button on the vacuum control displays
the More Information popup that has a slidebar for large numeric adjustments in
vacuum.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Vacuum Panel
Vacuum End Limit
Cut Rate
Cut Rate Set Limit
(Bi Manual Off) um

acu
ingV
r eas
Inc
Vacuum Start Limit
1
Forceps End Limit

Vac End
Cut Rate Limit
Cut Rate Set Limit
BI MANUAL ON m
uu
(forceps active in Va
c
footswitch position 1)
Forceps Start Vacuum Start
1 2
Figure 2-70 Surgery Screen: Vitrectomy Mode-PropVac Submode (Advanced View shown)
2.96 8065753060 Rev. Y

Probe cutting at a preset rate begins when the footpedal is pressed. The Cut Rate
is adjusted by pressing Up/Down arrow buttons on the Cutting control. Alternatively,
selecting the More Information button on the Cutting control displays the More
Information popup that has a slidebar for large numeric adjustments in cut rate.
NOTE: When PropVac Single Cut Mode Enabled, cut rate can be set to 1 cpm (2
cpm if a Dual Blade probe is connected).
The controls for each panel in PropVac submode are the same as in 3D submode with
the following exceptions:
buttons and activated when the footpedal is pressed.
Vacuum Panel:
maximum rate is reached, the vacuum level can no longer be increased. If
value.
for the flow rate.
• Flow Limit Configuration Button - Displays the Flow Limit configuration
popup.
it.
Cutting Panel:
• Cut Rate End Up/Down Buttons - Set the fixed cut rate throughout treadle
depression.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.97


vacuum.
• Vacuum Limit More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup.
• Flow/Vacuum Toggle - Switches between Flow mode and Vacuum mode.

is off, the only option is to turn it on. When Bimanual mode is on, the Forceps
depression.
that allows a selection between Start and Close. When Start is selected, the Start
pressure is applied to the port, and when Close is selected, the Close pressure is
applied to the port. If neither is selected, then no pressure is applied to the port.
2.98 8065753060 Rev. Y

Vitrectomy: WETANT SUBMODE
In WetAnt submode, the irrigation and cut rate are fixed while the user has linear
footswitch control of the vacuum. The footswitch has two ranges. The first range
has fixed irrigation only while the second range activates a fixed cut rate and linear
vacuum that increases with treadle depression (see graphic in Figure 2-71). In
Advanced Display mode, the Flow Limit Control Type can be changed.
The Cut Rate is adjusted by pressing Up/Down arrow buttons on the Cutting control.
Alternatively, selecting the More Information button on the Cutting control displays
the More Information popup that has a slidebar for large numeric adjustments in cut
rate.
The controls for each panel in WetAnt submode are the same as in 3D submode with
• No Vacuum On/Off Button.
• No Forceps Panel.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Vacuum Panel
Vacuum End Limit

Irrigation ON
Cut Rate
Cut Rate Set Limit
uum
Vac
asing
Vacuum Start Limit Incre
1 2
Treadle Released Detent Full Treadle
Depression
Figure 2-71 Surgery Screen: Vitrectomy Mode-WetAnt Submode (Advanced View shown)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.99

Vacuum Panel:
value.
for flow rate.
Information popup.
it.
Cutting Panel:

vacuum.
2.100 8065753060 Rev. Y

Vitrectomy: VITDRY SUBMODE (available only when an anterior cassette is installed)
In the VitDry submode, the cut rate is fixed while the user has linear footswitch
control of the vacuum through the full range of treadle motion (see graphic in Figure
2-72). In Advanced Display mode, the Flow Limit Control Type can be changed.
The Cut Rate is adjusted by pressing Up/Down arrow buttons on the Cutting control.
Alternatively, selecting the More Information button on the Cutting control displays
the More Information popup that has a slidebar for large numeric adjustments in cut
rate.
The controls for each panel in VitDry submode are the same as in 3D submode with
• No Vacuum On/Off Button.
• No Forceps Panel.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Vacuum Panel
Vacuum End Limit
Cut Rate
Cut Rate Set Limit
uum
Vac
sing
Vacuum Start Limit rea
Inc
1
Treadle Released Full Treadle
Depression
Figure 2-72 Surgery Screen: Vitrectomy Mode-VitDry Submode (Advanced View shown)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.101

Vacuum Panel:
value.
for flow rate.
Information popup.
that allows for changing the current mode and the setpoint associated with it.
Cutting Panel:

vacuum.
fixed or linear. In Fixed, the limit is constant regardless of the vacuum level. In
Linear, the limit varies depending on the vacuum level.
2.102 8065753060 Rev. Y

PHACO MODE
Phaco mode provides phacoemulsification capabilities by using U/S (ultrasound)
powered handpieces controlled by the footswitch. When the U/S handpiece is
selected, irrigation, aspiration, and phaco power are provided to the handpiece tip.
Phaco power is defined as being proportional to ultrasound displacement of the phaco
tip. Amplitude of the ultrasound displacement of the phaco tip is proportional to the
ultrasound power displayed on the console front panel. The user has the ability to
adjust the aspiration rate, vacuum levels, and phaco power at any time during the
surgical procedure via their respective adjustment arrows or remote control.
The phaco Power Limit is increased or decreased via the front panel in increments
of 5% from a minimum of 0% to a maximum of 100%. The amount of phaco power
delivered to the handpiece is controlled by one of two methods: linear or fixed
footpedal control.
In Flow mode, the Aspiration panel is displayed, while in Vacuum mode, the Vacuum
panel is displayed. In “Standard” display mode, only the Vacuum mode controls are
available. When system detects an occlusion in Flow mode, the occlusion tone sounds
and the word "Occlusion" appears on the extraction panel under the primary limit
control’s label.
WARNING!
Good clinical practice dictates testing for adequate irrigation, aspiration flow,
reflux, and operation as applicable for each handpiece prior to entering eye.
The five submodes available in Phaco mode are listed below. In each submode, the
Aspiration and Vacuum panels are identical while the Ultrasound panels change
according to the requirements of the current mode.
• 3D
• Burst
• Custom (Advanced View only)
• Pulsed
• Continuous
Dynamic Rise
The value in the display bar indicates the current rise time for the aspiration pump
rate adjustment at occlusion onset. The Dynamic Rise setting can vary from –2 to 4,
in increments of 1. When Dynamic Rise -2 is displayed in the Adjust Bar, it indicates
that the rise time in aspiration pump rate adjustment is slowest. When Dynamic Rise
4 is displayed in the Adjust Bar, it indicates that the rise time in aspiration pump rate
adjustment is fastest. The Alcon default setting is 0. Dynamic rise is only available in
Flow Mode.
WARNING!
The use of Dynamic Rise setting 1, 2, 3, or 4 may result in aspiration levels (volumes)
exceeding irrigation flow. This may cause chamber shallowing or collapse which
may result in patient injury.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.103

Smart Pulse
If the duration of the ultrasound pulse becomes less than 20 ms, a proprietary
algorithm becomes active. This is indicated by the Smart Pulse message appearing on
the screen below the Power bar as shown in Figure 2-73.
Smart Pulse Indication
Figure 2-73 Smart Pulse Indication
When the algorithm is active, ultrasound power will be generated at 10% or half
of the commanded power, whichever is lower, prior to the application of the main
power pulse. This low-powered pulse contributes a negligible amount of energy to the
procedure, but it allows the electronic equipment to determine the optimum operating
parameters for the main power pulse, thus making it more efficient, even for the
shortest duration of ultrasound. The Smart Pulse algorithm can be active in Custom,
Pulsed, or Burst modes when used with the OZil™ torsional or U/S handpieces. The
minimum duration of the main pulse in ultrasound is 5 ms; the minimum duration of
torsional pulse is 20 ms.
OZil™ Mode of Operation

When the OZil™ torsional handpiece is selected, irrigation, aspiration, phaco power
and ultrasonic oscillations are provided by the handpiece. In this mode of operation
phaco power and ultrasonic oscillations alternately turn on and off. Amplitude of
the ultrasound and torsional displacement of the phaco tip are proportional to the
ultrasound power and torsional amplitude displayed on the console front panel. The
user has the ability to adjust the aspiration rate, vacuum levels, phaco power, and
torsional amplitude (ultrasonic oscillations) at any time during the surgical procedure
via their respective adjustment arrows or remote control. For best performance of the
OZil™ torsional handpiece, use tips recommended by your Alcon representative.
nic
as o
ltr cillation
U
Os
co
Pha
Figure 2-74 OZil™ Tip Movement
NOTE: All references to an OZil™ handpiece refer to the Infiniti™ OZil™

handpiece. The Constellation™ Vision System does not support the Centurion™
OZil™ handpiece.
2.104 8065753060 Rev. Y

OZil™ Power/Amplitude
The Phaco Power Limit and Torsional Amplitude Limit are increased or decreased via
the front panel in increments of 5% from a minimum of 0% to a maximum of 100%.
Power/Amplitude to the handpiece is controlled by one of two methods: linear or
fixed footpedal control (except 3D mode which is always linear).
• Linear Footpedal Control - If linear (increasing) footpedal control is selected,
the Limit buttons indicate the maximum phaco power and ultrasonic oscillations
(Torsional Amplitude) delivered with the footpedal fully depressed. In footpedal
position 3 (position 2 for 3D mode), power and oscillations start at the start limit
and change linearly until power reaches the end limit at full footpedal depression.
• Fixed Footpedal Control - If fixed footpedal control is selected, the Limit
buttons indicate the phaco power and ultrasonic oscillations delivered throughout
footpedal position 3. To increase or decrease power, the arrow buttons must be
pressed.
OZil™ Timing
Phaco power and ultrasonic oscillations are delivered to the phaco tip through a
variety of timing configurations when in footpedal position 3 (position 2 for 3D
mode). Depending on the mode selected, the timing can be continuous or can include
off-times between phaco/torsional pulses.
OZil™ IP
Intelligent Phaco (IP) is used to deliver a reduced magnitude of phaco energy when
a vacuum threshold setting is exceeded. This reduced phaco energy is applied only
as necessary, and continues until the vacuum drops below the trigger threshold. The
same IP settings are used for each enabled phaco step. IP is not available in the 3D
submode and is only available in Flow Mode when the Advanced Extraction
Display Mode is selected in the Doctor Settings.
Pressing the IP button while in a phaco step causes the IP Settings dialog to appear on
the screen (see Figure 2-75). Intelligent Phaco is enabled by pressing the On button,
or disabled by pressing the Off button. After selecting On or Off and pressing the
Close button, the dialog closes. When the IP feature is enabled for a particular phaco
step, the IP button is colored green; when disabled, it is colored gray. When IP is
active during a procedure, the IP button is animated.
Figure 2-75 OZil™ IP Configuration Screen
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.105

The adjustable settings are Vacuum Threshold, Phaco Pulse On Time and
Longitudinal/Torsional Ratio. These settings are user-adjustable so the user can
specify the vacuum limit at which the IP feature is activated, and the amount of
energy that is delivered when activated.
• Vacuum Threshold (% of Vacuum Limit) - The Vacuum Threshold setting

determines the percentage of the vacuum limit set value at which the IP feature
is activated and its specified phaco power is applied. When vacuum reaches and/
or exceeds the vacuum threshold, then the IP feature, if enabled, is activated.
When the vacuum drops below the vacuum threshold value, then the IP feature is
deactivated. The vacuum threshold ranges from 90% to 100% of vacuum limit.
• Phaco Pulse On Time (msec) - Phaco Pulse On Time specifies the on-time of
an applied longitudinal phaco pulse during activation, from 0 to 20 pulses per
millisecond. These phaco pulses are applied until the vacuum level falls below the
Vacuum Threshold setting.
• Longitudinal / Torsional Ratio - The Longitudinal / Torsional Ratio establishes the
applied phaco power level relative to the applied torsional amplitude. This ratio is
expressed as a decimal fraction and ranges from 0.5 to 1.0.
2.106 8065753060 Rev. Y

Phaco Mode: 3D SUBMODE
In Phaco 3D submode, vacuum and U/S power delivered to the probe are
simultaneously regulated by the amount of footpedal depression. The display contains
adjustable values for vacuum level at treadle start and at full depression; and U/S
power at treadle start and at full depression.
To prevent generating excessive flow when the footpedal is first depressed, the
vacuum level is ramped up from zero to the set starting level during the first part of
the pedal travel. The Ramping % is selected in the Doctor's Settings screen with an
available range of 15-90%.
The 3D submode screen is shown in Figure 2-76 along with a graphic representation
of the functions in each footswitch treadle position. Note that the start and end limits
for both U/S Power and vacuum are adjustable therefore any combination of limits is
valid. The graphic shows only one possibility.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Vacuum Panel
Phaco Metrics Panel:

• U/S Time - Displays current value
for phaco power on time.
• A.P. Pos. 3 - Displays current
value for Average Power in treadle
Position 3.
= Adustable start and end limits
Vacuum End Limit
U/S P
Irrigation ON ower
u um
Vac U/S Power End Limit
ping
Ram
1 2
Treadle Detent Full Depression
Released
Figure 2-76 Surgery Screen: Phaco Mode - 3D Submode (Advanced View shown)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.107

Vacuum Panel:
• Vacuum Start Up/Down Buttons - Set the vacuum level at treadle start of position 2.
• Vacuum More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup, which
simplifies large value changes by providing slider controls. Also provides the
capability to initiate a drainbag change.
The following vacuum controls are available only in the Advanced View:
• Flow Limit On/Off Button - Turns Flow Limit on or off. When the maximum
rate is reached, the vacuum level can no longer be increased. If the Flow Limit is
turned off, the vacuum level is limited only by the Start and End values.
• Flow Limit Start and End Up/Down Buttons - Set the start and end limits for flow
rate.
• Flow Limit Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Show the current flow level.
• Flow Limit More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup.
• Flow Limit Control Type Drop List - Determines whether the flow limit is fixed
or linear. In Fixed the limit is constant regardless of the flow level. In Linear the
limit varies depending on the flow level.
• Reflux Label - Read Only display of the current reflux configuration together with
its current value.
• Reflux More Information Button - Displays the Reflux More Information popup.
Aspiration Panel (This control is available only in the Advanced view by switching
the Function Mode from Vacuum to Flow):
• Flow Control Type Drop List - Determines whether the flow is fixed or linear.
• Flow Start Up/Down Buttons - If Linear control is selected, these buttons set the
flow level at treadle start. If Fixed control is selected, they are not active.
• Flow End Up/Down Buttons - If Linear control is selected, these buttons set the
flow level at full treadle. If Fixed control is selected, they set the fixed flow level.
• Dynamic Rise Drop List - Selects the rise value. The rise value determines the
slope of the increase applied.
• Flow More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup which
• Vacuum Limit Start and End Up/Down Buttons - Set the start and end limits for vacuum.
Linear the limit varies depending treadle depression.
• Flow/Vacuum Toggle: Switches between Flow mode and Vacuum mode.
its current value.
Ultrasound Panel:
• Phaco Power Start Up/Down Buttons - Set the power level at treadle start (of
position 2).
• Phaco Power End Up/Down Buttons - Set the power at full treadle.
• Phaco Power Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Show the current power value.
• Ultrasound More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup.
2.108 8065753060 Rev. Y
Phaco Mode: 3D SUBMODE - OZIL™ 3D
When an OZil™ handpiece is connected to the system, the 3D ultrasound panel
will appear as shown in Figure 2-77. Start and End limits for both Phaco power and
Torsional amplitude are adjustable by the user. In footswitch position 2, phaco power
and torsional amplitude will increase/decrease linearly from start limit to the end limit
according to the limits selected.
When the Phaco Power default setting is set to 0 (no phaco power), then only
torsional ultrasonic oscillations at the preset Torsional Amplitude are delivered,
for 100% of the time, to the handpiece tip. This allows the user to have continuous
torsional ultrasonic oscillations if so desired. If U/S power is added, then this mode
of operation provides 20% of its duty cycle for phaco power, then torsional ultrasonic
oscillations for the remaining 80% when in footpedal position 2, and repeats this
cycle over and over again as long as the footpedal is in position 2. This produces
continuous U/S alternations between phaco power and torsional amplitude.
Torsional Amplitude Panel:
• Torsional Amplitude Start Up/Down Buttons - Sets the torsional amplitude level
at treadle start of position 2.
• Torsional Amplitude End Up/Down Buttons - Sets the torsional amplitude at full
treadle.
• Torsional Amplitude Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Shows the current
torsional amplitude value.
• Torsional Amplitude More Information Button - Displays the More Information
popup.
OZil™ Metrics Panel -

Shows the current value
for Cumulative Dissipated
Energy (C.D.E.)
o
OZil ™ ™ Phac
Torsio
nal OZil
Vacuum End Limit
Irrigation ON
uum
ping
Ram
1 2
Released
Figure 2-77 Surgery Screen: Phaco Mode - 3D Submode- OZil™ 3D
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.109

Phaco Mode: BURST SUBMODE
In the Phaco Burst submode, fixed U/S power (Power %) can be adjusted for duration
(On Time) and time off between (Off Time) U/S power pulses. The frequency of
bursts is controlled with the footpedal from detent two to full treadle depression,
while the fixed burst length is set in milliseconds (msec). The actual time U/S power
is off, as controlled by the footpedal, is reflected in the Actual window.
The controls for each panel in Burst submode (see Figure 2-78) have the following
functions:
Vacuum Panel:
• Vacuum End Up/Down Buttons - Set the vacuum level at the end of position 2.
• Vacuum Start Up/Down Buttons - Set the vacuum level at the start of treadle
position 2.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Reflux Label

• U/S Time - Displays current value for
phaco power on time.
• A.P. Pos. 3 - Displays current value for
Average Power in treadle Position 3.
Vacuum End Limit
Irrigation ON
U/S Burst at
m
uu set limit
ac
in gV
as
re
Inc
1 2 3
Treadle Detent 1 Detent 2 Full Depression
Released
Figure 2-78 Surgery Screen: Phaco Mode - Burst Submode (Advanced View shown)
2.110 8065753060 Rev. Y

• Flow Limit Start and End Up/Down Buttons - Set the start and end limits for flow rate.
its current value.
• Flow Start Up/Down Buttons - When linear, set Flow at treadle start of position 2.
• Flow End Up/Down Buttons - Set the flow level at end of position 2.
• Dynamic Rise Drop List - Selection for the rise value. The rise value determines
the automatic adjustment of the flow set point when occlusion onset is reached.
vacuum.
its current value.
Ultrasound Panel:
• Power Start Up/Down Buttons - When Linear, set power at start of position 3.
• Power End Up/Down Buttons - Set the power at full treadle.
• Power Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Displays the current power value.
• Power Limit Control Type Drop List (Advanced view only) - Determines whether
the power is fixed or linear. In Fixed, the power is constant. In Linear, the power
varies depending on the treadle position.
• Phaco Power More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup,
which simplifies large value changes by providing slider controls.
• Phaco Burst On Time Up/Down Buttons - Set the Phaco Burst On time.
• Phaco Burst Off Time Up/Down Buttons - Set the Phaco Burst Off time.
• Phaco Burst Off Time Progress Bar and Numeric Value - Shows the current Phaco
Burst Off time.
• Phaco Burst More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.111

Phaco Mode: BURST SUBMODE - OZIL™ BURST
When operating in this mode, phaco burst is followed immediately by torsional burst,
followed by an off-time. Duration of the phaco burst is determined by the setting
on the panel, for example 35 ms in the Figure 2-79; duration of the torsional burst
is 70 ms. Duration of the off-time is determined by the footpedal in position 3. At
the beginning it is equal to 2500 ms, and is gradually reduced as the footpedal is
depressed. When the footpedal is depressed all the way, the off-time will be equal to
that set on the panel – 10 ms in the given example.
If Phaco Power Limit and/or Torsional Amplitude Limit are set to zero, then there are
no phaco or torsional contributions to the OZil™ burst, and the duty cycles (On ms)
are not adjustable.
treadle.
• Torsional Amplitude Limit Control Type Drop-Down List - Determines whether
the torsional amplitude is Fixed or Linear.
popup.
• Torsional On Time Control (in Burst panel) - Sets the Torsional Burst On Time.

Energy (C.D.E.)
Vacuum End Limit
Irrigation ON
er OZil™ Burst
um Pow
u aco
ac s in g Ph tu d e
in gV Incre
a
al Am
pli
as T o rsion
re &
Inc
1 2 3
Released
Figure 2-79 Surgery Screen: Phaco Mode - Burst Submode - OZil™ Burst
2.112 8065753060 Rev. Y

Phaco Mode: CUSTOM SUBMODE
The Custom submode is only available in the Advanced view.
In the Phaco Custom submode shown in Figure 2-80, fixed or linear U/S power
(Power %) can be adjusted for duration (On Time) and time off between (Off Time)
U/S power pulses. The frequency of bursts is controlled with the footpedal from
detent two to full treadle depression, while the fixed burst length is set in milliseconds
(msec). The actual percent of time U/S power is on and off is reflected in the On Time
and Off Time Actuals windows. The controls for each panel in Custom submode have
the following functions:
Vacuum Panel:
position 2.
• Vacuum End Up/Down Buttons - Set the vacuum level at the end of treadle
position 2.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Reflux Label

Vacuum End Limit
Irrigation ON Phaco Power (fixed)

um
cu
Va
ing ar)
line
rea
s
ower (
Inc co P
Pha
1 2 3
Released
Figure 2-80 Surgery Screen: Phaco Mode - Custom Submode (Advanced view shown)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.113

• Flow Limit Start and End Up/Down Buttons - Set the start and end limits for flow rate.
or linear. In Fixed, the limit is constant regardless of the flow level. In Linear, the
its current value.
• Flow Start Up/Down Buttons - When linear, set the flow level at start of position 2.
• Flow End Up/Down Buttons - Set the flow level at the end of position 2.
• Dynamic Rise Drop List - Select for the rise value. The rise value determines the
automatic adjustment of the flow set point when occlusion onset is reached.
vacuum.
• Flow/Vacuum Toggle: Switch between Flow mode and Vacuum mode.
its current value.
Ultrasound Panel:
• Phaco Power Start Up/Down Buttons - When linear, set power at start of position 3.
• Phaco Power Limit Control Drop Down List - Determines whether the power
is fixed or linear. In Fixed the power is constant regardless. In Linear the power
varies depending on the treadle position.
• Phaco Power More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup,
• Phaco Pulse On Time Up/Down Buttons - Set the Phaco pulse on time.
• Phaco Pulse On Time Progress Bar and Numeric Value - Show the current Phaco
pulse on time.
2.114 8065753060 Rev. Y

• Phaco Pulse On Time Limit Control Drop Down List - Determines whether the
pulse on time pulse type limit is decreasing, fixed, or increasing. In Fixed, the
Pulse On Time is constant. In Decreasing, the Pulse On Time is decreased as the
treadle is pressed downward. In Increasing, the Pulse On Time is increased as the
treadle is pressed downward.
• Phaco Pulse Off Time Up/Down Buttons - Set the Phaco pulse off time.
• Phaco Pulse Off Time Progress Bar and Numeric Value - Show the current Phaco
pulse off time.
• Phaco Pulse Off Time Control Drop Down List - Determines whether the pulse
off time pulse type limit is decreasing or fixed. In Decreasing, the Pulse Off Time
is decreased as the treadle is pressed downward. In Fixed, the Pulse Off Time is
constant.
• Phaco Pulse More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup,
• Smart Pulse Indicator - Displayed when U/S power is greater than zero and pulse
on time is less than 20 ms.
Phaco Mode: CUSTOM SUBMODE - OZIL™ CUSTOM PULSE

When operating in this mode, phaco power and ultrasonic oscillations are turned on
and off for a period of time determined by the user and the position of the footswitch
in position 3. The system repeats this sequence of events: phaco power on then off-
time, ultrasonic oscillations on then off-time. This screen is only available in the
Advanced View (see Figure 2-81).
• The on-time can be fixed at the selected setting throughout position 3, set to
increase at the beginning of position 3 to the set limit at the end of position 3, or
set to decrease from the set limit at the beginning of position 3 down to the set
limit at the end of position 3.
• The off-time can be fixed at the selected setting throughout position 3, or set to
decrease from 2500 ms at the beginning of position 3 down to the set limit at the
end of position 3.
treadle.
popup.
• Torsional Pulse On Time Control - Sets the Torsional Pulse On Time. The drop-
down list determines whether the pulse on time pulse type limit is decreasing,
fixed, or increasing. In Fixed, the Pulse On Time is constant. In Decreasing, the
Pulse On Time is decreased as the treadle is pressed downward. In Increasing, the
Pulse On Time is increased as the treadle is pressed downward.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.115

• Torsional Pulse Off Time Control (in Burst panel) - Sets the Torsional Pulse Off
Time. The drop-down list determines whether the pulse off time pulse type limit is
decreasing or fixed. In Decreasing, the Pulse Off Time is decreased as the treadle
is pressed downward. In Fixed, the Pulse Off Time is constant.
OZil™ Metrics Panel

- Shows the current
value for Cumulative
Dissipated Energy
(C.D.E.)
Vacuum End Limit
Irrigation ON
OZil™ Torsional Amplitude
uum
ac
in gV
as
re
Inc
1 2 3
Released
Figure 2-81 Surgery Screen: Phaco Mode - Custom Submode - OZil™ Custom Pulse (Advanced view
shown)
2.116 8065753060 Rev. Y

Phaco Mode: PULSED SUBMODE
In the Phaco Pulsed submode shown in Figure 2-82, fixed or linear U/S power
(Power %) can be adjusted for Rate (pulses per second-pps) and Time On (%) U/S
power pulses. The pulse is controlled with the footpedal from detent two to full
treadle depression.
The controls for each panel in Pulsed submode have the following functions:
Vacuum Panel:
position 2.
position 2.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Reflux Label

Vacuum End Limit
Phaco Power (fixed)
uum
ac
in gV ear)
as r (lin
re owe
Irrigation ON Inc oP
Phac
1 2 3
Released
Figure 2-82 Surgery Screen: Phaco Mode - Pulsed Submode (advanced view shown)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.117

• Flow Start and End Up/Down Buttons - Set the start and end limits for flow rate.
• Flow Limit Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Shows the current flow level.
its current value.
• Flow Start Up/Down Buttons - When linear, set flow at treadle start in position 2.
• Flow End Up/Down Buttons - Set the flow level at end of treadle position 2.
• Dynamic Rise Drop List - Select for the rise value. The rise value determines the
• Vacuum Limit Start and End Up/Down Buttons-Set the start and end limits for vacuum.
• Flow/Vacuum Toggle: Switch between Flow mode and Vacuum mode.
its current value.
Ultrasound Panel:
• Power Start Up/Down Buttons - When linear, set power at treadle start in position 3.
• Power End Up/Down Buttons - Set the power at full treadle.
• Power Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Shows the current power value.
• Phaco Power More Information Button - Displays the More Information dialog.
• Phaco Pulse Rate Up/Down Buttons - Set the Phaco Pulse Rate in pulses per
second (pps).
• Smart Pulse - Indicator for smart pulse. Becomes visible when power is greater
than 0 and pulse on time is less than 20 ms.
• Phaco Pulse Time On Up/Down Buttons - Set the Phaco Time On percentage.
• Phaco Pulse More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup.
The following Ultrasound panel controls are available only in the Advanced view:
• Power Limit Control Type Drop List - Determines whether the power
limit is fixed or linear. In Fixed, the limit is constant regardless of the
footswitch treadle position. In Linear, the limit varies depending on the
footswitch treadle position.
2.118 8065753060 Rev. Y
Phaco Mode: PULSED SUBMODE - OZIL™ PULSE
When operating in this mode, phaco power and ultrasonic oscillations turn on and off at
a frequency determined by the pulse rate (pps) setting, and on a duty cycle adjustable by
the operator (Time On (%)). The remaining pulse time, or percent time off, is an off-
time. The sum of phaco duty cycle and torsional duty cycle cannot exceed 100%.
For example, in Figure 2-83 the entire cycle of phaco, torsional, and off-time is 100 ms
duration because of the selected pulse rate of 10 pps. Duration of the phaco, therefore,
is 100 ms X 10% = 10 ms, and duration of the torsional is 100 ms X 80% = 80 ms.
The remaining 10 ms is an off period. Note that the off period follows application
of torsional ultrasound, while torsional ultrasound follows application of phaco
immediately.
If Phaco Power Limit and/or Torsional Amplitude Limit are set to zero, then there are
no phaco nor torsional contributions to the OZil™ pulse, and the duty cycles (Time On
(%)) are not adjustable.
treadle.
popup.
• Pulse Rate Up/Down Buttons - Set the Pulse Rate in pulses per second (pps).
• Phaco and Torsional On Time Controls-Sets the percentage of pulse On Time for Phaco
and Torsional, respectively, and the combination of the two cannot exceed 100%.

Energy (C.D.E.)
Vacuum End Limit
Irrigation ON
uum
ac
in gV
as
re
Inc

Released
Figure 2-83 Surgery Screen: Phaco Mode - Pulsed Submode OZil™ Pulse
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.119

Phaco Mode: CONTINUOUS SUBMODE
The Phaco Continuous submode provides continuous fixed or linear U/S power
(Power %). Phaco power is controlled with the footpedal from detent two to full
treadle depression.
The controls for each panel in Continuous submode shown in Figure 2-84 have the
following functions:
Vacuum Panel:
• Vacuum End Up/Down Buttons - Sets the vacuum level at full treadle.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Reflux Label

Vacuum End Limit
U/S Power (fixed)

m
cuu
Va
ing ar)
ea
s line
r ower (
Irrigation ON Inc U /S P
1 2 3
Released
Figure 2-84 Surgery Screen: Phaco Mode - Continuous Submode (Advanced view shown)
2.120 8065753060 Rev. Y

• Flow Start and End Up/Down Buttons - Set the start and end limits for flow rate.
its current value.
• Flow Start Up/Down Buttons - When linear, set the flow level at treadle start of
position 2.
• Flow End Up/Down Buttons - Set the flow level at end of treadle position 2.
• Dynamic Rise Drop List - Selects the rise value. The rise value determines the
vacuum.
its current value.
Ultrasound Panel:
• Phaco Power Start Up/Down Buttons - When linear, set power at treadle start of
position 3.
• Phaco Power Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Shows the current power value.
The following Ultrasound panel controls are available only in the Advanced view:
• Power Limit Control Type Drop List - Determines whether the power
limit is fixed or linear. In Fixed, the limit is constant regardless of the
footswitch treadle position. In Linear, the limit varies depending on the
footswitch treadle position.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.121

Phaco Mode: CONTINUOUS SUBMODE - OZIL™ CONTINUOUS
When the Phaco Power default setting is set to 0 (no phaco power), then only
torsional ultrasonic oscillations at the preset Torsional Amplitude are delivered,
for 100% of the time, to the handpiece tip. This allows the user to have continuous
torsional ultrasonic oscillations if so desired. If U/S power is added, then this mode
of operation provides 20% of its duty cycle for phaco power, then torsional ultrasonic
oscillations for the remaining 80% when in footpedal position 3, and repeats
this cycle as long as the footpedal is in position 3. This produces continuous U/S
alternations between phaco power and torsional amplitude.
The user can select between fixed or linear for both Phaco Power and Torsional
Amplitude from the Control Type drop down list on each control.
treadle.
popup.
OZil™ Metrics Panel

- Shows the current
value for Cumulative
Dissipated Energy
(C.D.E.)
Vacuum End Limit
Irrigation ON
uum
ac
in gV
as
re
Inc

Released
Figure 2-85 Surgery Screen: Phaco Mode - Continuous Submode - OZil™ Continuous
2.122 8065753060 Rev. Y

FRAGMENTATION MODE
Fragmentation mode is enabled when a fragmentation handpiece is connected to the
system and the Fragmentation Surgery step is selected. Four submodes are available, each
with its own default U/S power and vacuum limits. U/S power is enabled and disabled
using the footswitch or by pressing the power setting on the touch screen (except in
momentary mode). Micro and proportional reflux are available via the footswitch.
U/S Pulse controls are available in all submodes.
Fragmentation Mode: 3D SUBMODE

In Fragmentation 3D submode, vacuum and U/S power delivered to the probe are
simultaneously regulated by the amount of footpedal depression. The display contains
adjustable values for vacuum level at treadle start and at full depression; and U/S
power at treadle start and at full depression.
To prevent generating excessive flow when the footpedal is first depressed, the
vacuum level is ramped up from zero to the set starting level during the first part of
the pedal travel. The Ramping % is selected in the Doctor's Settings screen with an
available range of 15-90%.
The 3D submode screen is shown in Figure 2-86 along with a graphic representation
of the functions in each footswitch treadle position. Note that the start and end limits
for both U/S Power and vacuum are adjustable therefore any combination of limits is
valid. The graphic shows only one possibility.
Vacuum Panel:
• Vacuum Start Up/Down Buttons - Set the vacuum level at treadle start.
• Flow Limit Start and End Up/Down Buttons - Set the start and end limits for flow
rate.
its current value.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.123

Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Vacuum Panel
Vacuum End Limit

U/S P
ower
u um
ing
Ramp
Treadle Full Depression

Released
Figure 2-86 Surgery Screen: Fragmentation Mode - 3D Submode (Advanced view shown)
• Flow Start Up/Down Buttons - Set the flow level at treadle start.
vacuum.
Linear the limit varies depending upon treadle depression.
its current value.
2.124 8065753060 Rev. Y
Ultrasound Panel:
• Phaco Power Start Up/Down Buttons - Set the power level at treadle start.
• Pulse Rate On/Off Button - Turns the Pulse Rate on or off.
• Pulse Rate Up/Down Buttons - Set the pulse rate.
• Pulse More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup.
Fragmentation Mode: FIXED SUBMODE

In Fixed submode shown in Figure 2-87, the vacuum level is controlled linearly from
0 to the set value whereas the ultrasound power level is fixed. The controls for each
panel in Fixed submode have the following functions:
Vacuum Panel:
position 1.
• Vacuum Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current vacuum level.
simplifies large value changes by providing slider controls. Also provides panel
specific configuration capabilities such as Drainbag Change.
The following Vacuum controls are available only in the Advanced view:
• Flow Limit On/Off Button - Turns Flow Limit on or off. When the
value.
for flow rate.
• Flow Limit Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Displays the current flow rate.
• Reflux More Information Button - Displays the Reflux More Information
popup.
Aspiration Panel (This panel is available only in the Advanced View when the Flow
button is selected.)
• Flow Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current flow level.
• Aspiration More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup.
vacuum.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.125

• Vacuum Limit Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current vacuum
level.
• Flow / Vacuum Toggle - Switches between Flow mode and Vacuum mode.
Ultrasound Panel:
• Power On/Off Button - Turns ultrasound power on or off.
• Power End Up/Down Buttons - Set the power at full treadle. The Start value
tracks with the End value.
• Power Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current power value.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Reflux Label
Reflux More Information Button
Vacuum End Limit
m U/S Power (fixed)

uu
ac
in gV
as
re
Inc
1 2
Treadle Detent 1 Full Depression
Released
Figure 2-87 Surgery Screen: Fragmentation Mode - Fixed Submode (Advanced view shown)
2.126 8065753060 Rev. Y

Fragmentation Mode: LINEAR SUBMODE
Linear submode is very similar to the Fixed submode with the exception that the
treadle start values for both vacuum and ultrasound power are fixed at 0.
The controls for each panel in Linear submode shown in Figure 2-88 have the
following functions:
Vacuum Panel:
position 1.
rate is reached, the vacuum level can no longer be increased. If the Flow Limit
is turned off, the vacuum level is limited only by the End value.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Vacuum Panel
Vacuum End Limit
m U/S Power (linear)

uu
ac
in gV
as
re
Inc
1 2
Released
Figure 2-88 Surgery Screen: Fragmentation Mode - Linear Submode (Advanced view shown)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.127

for flow rate.
• Flow Limit Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current flow rate.
fixed or linear. In Fixed, the limit is constant regardless of the flow level. In
Linear, the limit varies depending on the flow level.
• Reflux Label - Read Only display of the current reflux configuration together
with its current value.
popup.
• Flow End Up/Down Buttons - Set the flow level at the end of treadle
position 1.
• Aspiration More Information Button - Displays the More Information
popup.
• Vacuum Limit Start and End Up/Down Buttons - Set the start and end
limits for vacuum.
• Vacuum Limit Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current
vacuum level.
• Vacuum Limit Control Type Drop List - Determines whether the vacuum
limit is fixed or linear. In Fixed the limit is constant regardless of the
vacuum level. In Linear the limit varies depending on the vacuum level.
• Vacuum Limit More Information Button - Displays the More Information
popup.
Ultrasound Panel:
Same as Fixed submode except that the start value is always zero then the U/S power
is increased linearly as the treadle is depressed.
• Power On/Off Button - Turns ultrasound Power on or off.
• Power End Up/Down Buttons - Set the Power at full treadle.
• Power Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current power value.
2.128 8065753060 Rev. Y

Fragmentation Mode: MOMENTARY SUBMODE
Momentary submode in Figure 2-89 is similar to the Fixed submode with the
exception that fixed ultrasound is only active when the assigned switch on the
footswitch button is pressed. See Doctor Settings/Footswitch for switch assignment.
Vacuum Panel:
position 1.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Vacuum Panel
Vacuum End Limit
U/S Power (fixed-activated by

assigned switch on footswitch)
u um
c
g Va
a sin
re
Inc
1
Released
Figure 2-89 Surgery Screen: Fragmentation Mode - Momentary Submode (Advanced view shown)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.129

The following Vacuum controls are available only in the Advanced view:
value.
for flow rate.
• Flow Limit Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current flow
rate.
• Flow Limit More Information Button - Displays the More Information
popup.
popup.
vacuum.
level.
Ultrasound Panel:
Same as Fixed submode except that there is no On/Off button to turn U/S power Off.
• Power End Up/Down Buttons - Set the power at full treadle. The Start value
tracks with the End value.
• Power Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Displays the current power value.
• Pulse Rate Up/Down Buttons - Sets the pulse rate.
2.130 8065753060 Rev. Y

IRRIGATION/ASPIRATION (I/A) MODE
In I/A mode shown in Figure 2-90, the Surgery screen contains panels for controlling
an I/A handpiece. The vacuum pressure is always controlled linearly and vacuum
cannot be turned off. When the system detects an occlusion in Flow mode, the word
"Occlusion" is displayed on the extraction panel under the primary limit control’s
label and the occlusion tone sounds.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Vacuum Panel

Standard Display Mode Control
Vacuum End Limit
m
cuu
g Va
a sin
re
Irrigation ON Inc
1 2
Released
Figure 2-90 Surgery Screen: Irrigation/Aspiration Mode (Advanced view shown)
In “Standard” display mode, only the Vacuum mode controls are available. The
controls for each panel in I/A mode have the following functions:
Vacuum Panel:
• Vacuum Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current vacuum level
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.131

the Flow Limit is turned off, the vacuum level is limited only by the Start
and End values.
for flow rate.
rate.
• Flow / Vacuum Toggle - Switches between Flow mode and Vacuum Mode.
popup.
• Flow Limit Control Drop Down List - Determines whether the flow limit
is fixed or linear. In Fixed, the limit is constant regardless of the flow
level. In Linear, the limit varies depending on the flow level.
popup.
Aspiration Panel (in Advanced View only when Flow mode is selected):
• Flow Start and End Up/Down Buttons - Set the flow level at start and full treadle.
vacuum.
level.
2.132 8065753060 Rev. Y

EXTRUSION MODE
In Extrusion mode the Surgery screen shown in Figure 2-91 contains the Vacuum
panel necessary for controlling an extrusion handpiece. The vacuum pressure is
always controlled linearly and vacuum cannot be turned off.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Vacuum Panel
Standard Display Mode Control
Vacuum End Limit
um
acu
ingV
r eas
Inc
Momentary Scissors Cut when Bimanual
mode on.

Released
Figure 2-91 Surgery Screen: Extrusion Mode (Advanced view shown)
controls for each panel in Extrusion mode have the following functions:
Vacuum Panel:
• Vacuum End Up/Down Buttons - Set the vacuum level at full treadle. The Start
value is always zero.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.133

value.
for flow rate.
rate.
• Flow / Vacuum Toggle - Switches between Flow mode and Vacuum mode
popup.
• Flow Limit Control Type Drop Down List - Determines whether the flow
limit is fixed or linear. In Fixed, the limit is constant regardless of the flow
level. In Linear, the limit varies depending on the flow level.
popup.
• Flow More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup.
vacuum.
level.
its current value.
Cutting Panel:
• Cut Rate End Up/Down Buttons - Set the cut rate.
• Cut Rate Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current cut rate.
2.134 8065753060 Rev. Y

AUTOSERT™ IOL INJECTOR MODE
In AutoSert™ Mode, the Surgery screen contains panels for setting up and controlling
the AutoSert™ IOL Injector handpiece which provides the capability to automate the
placement of intraocular lenses (IOL) into the eye following cataract removal.
When connected to the Constellation™ system, the IOL injector is calibrated, and
if successful, it becomes ready for use. Figure 2-92 shows the AutoSert™ surgery
screen along with the progression of steps in the Setup screen required to prepare the
handpiece for use.
The plunger can be loaded and the IOL preloaded in the Setup screen, the AutoSert™
injector step, or any surgical screen where the AutoSert button is displayed in the
Menu Bar. In the AutoSert™ injector step, the user can make changes to the Initial
Rate/Pause/Final Rate settings.
• The Load Plunger button is used to install a plunger, should this be required.
• The Preload IOL button is used by the nurse to prepare the IOL injector by
advancing the lens to the preload lens position. Alternatively, the doctor
can simply press the footpedal into position 2 and the preload activity will
automatically proceed.
• The Retract button is used to retract the handpiece plunger when lens insertion is
completed or when otherwise necessary. Alternatively, pressing and holding the
Retract button on the footswitch can also be used to retract the inserter.
During each of these activities a green progress bar appears to show the activity, and
a Cancel button also appears that allows the user to stop the activity at that point (see
Figure 2-92).
IOL Injection Panel:

• Initial Rate (mm/sec) - Once the lens is at the Preload Lens position, the Initial
Rate setting (mm/s) controls the fixed delivery velocity up to the Pause position.
• Pause (sec) - Once the Pause position is reached, a pre-programmed pause in
forward advancement is initiated. This momentary pause allows internal stresses
on the lens to be relieved, thus ensuring proper lens delivery.
• Final Rate (mm/sec) - This setting controls the fixed or linear velocity at which
the lens is injected into the eye.
PRECAUTION: The default values for the Initial Rate and Pause ensure proper IOL
injection over a worst case range of IOL size and ambient temperature conditions.
Please refer to the INTREPID™ AutoSert™ IOL Injector DFU and consult with your
Alcon representative for additional guidance in adjusting these parameters for your
environment.
After lens insertion (Initial Rate, Pause, Final Rate), the footpedal must be released
and the Retract button pressed to retract the inserter. The footpedal can be released
out of position 2 during these steps, causing a pause in the insertion activity. Pressing
into position 2 again causes the activity to resume from the point it stopped.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.135

The Load Plunger button is used

to install a plunger, should this be
required.
The Preload IOL button is used

by the nurse to prepare the IOL
injector by advancing the lens to the
preload lens position. Alternatively,
pressing the footswitch into position
2 will cause the preload activity to
automatically proceed.
The Retract button is used to retract

the handpiece plunger when lens
insertion is completed or when
otherwise necessary. Alternatively,
pressing and holding the Retract
button on the footswitch can also be
used to retract the inserter.
Position 1 Position 2
• In SETUP: • PRELOAD
Cancels any setup • INJECTION
FOOTSWITCH operation in progress - Initial Rate
CONTROL - Pause
• In SURGERY:
No Action - Final Rate

Released
Figure 2-92 Surgery Screen: AutoSert™ Mode
2.136 8065753060 Rev. Y

CAUTIONS
• Do not ultrasonically clean the IOL injector connector. Ultrasonic cleaning of IOL
injector connector will cause irreparable damage.
• Use care when handling handpiece, particularly when cleaning. Always clean
handpiece over a surface cushioned with a pad or rubber mat.
• Be sure handpiece cable connector is dry before connecting it to the console.
handpiece plunger is fully retracted.
• Do not immerse the IOL injector in any fluid when the plunger is not retracted.
• As part of a properly maintained surgical environment, it is recommended that
a backup IOL injector be made available in the event the AutoSert™ IOL injector
WARNINGS!
• The INTREPID™ AutoSert™ IOL Injector is non-sterile and must be cleaned
and sterilized prior to, and immediately after, each use.
• Never immerse the IOL injector in liquid after autoclaving; allow it to air cool
for at least 15 minutes. Quenching could result in a potentially hazardous
condition for the patient.
• The AutoSert™ IOL Injector delivery system is for the implantation of Alcon
qualified AcrySof ™ foldable IOLs. Unqualified lenses shall not be used with the
system. See INTREPID™ AutoSert™ IOL Injector DFU or AcrySof ™ IOL DFU, or
contact your Alcon representative, for qualified lens/cartridge combinations.
• The cartridge/IOL combination listed in the DFU, along with Alcon settings,
has been validated per section 5 of BS EN ISO 11979-3:2006. Appropriate use
of injector handpiece settings is important for successful IOL implantation.
Inappropriate use of settings may lead to a potentially hazardous condition
for the patient.
otherwise, this could expose non-sterile portion of shaft and result in a
potentially hazardous condition for the patient.
• The metal reusable plunger must be sterilized after each use. The reusable
plunger is to be installed onto the handpiece or into the wrench prior to
sterilization.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.137

LASER MODE
In Laser Mode, the Surgery screen shown in Figure 2-93 contains panels for
controlling a laser probe as well as an aspirating handpiece (which could be the laser
probe). The laser function has three modes that enable the different operational states
of the system.
Laser Modes:
• Standby – Settings can be adjusted in this mode, but the system cannot deliver
treatment laser energy.
• Ready Mode - This mode is initiated when the Standby/Ready button or the right
side switch (if enabled) on laser footswitch is pushed while the system is in
Standby mode. After the button is pushed, the laser transitions into Ready mode
and the background color of the laser panel changes to light green. The system
is now prepared to deliver treatment laser energy. Various conditions prevent the
system from transitioning to Ready mode including the following:
- Footswitch disconnected
- No identified probe connected
- Remote interlock open
- Tethered Dr. Filter disengaged
Pressing the Standby/Ready button while the system is in Ready mode,
immediately returns the system to Standby mode.
• Firing Mode - Pressing the footswitch in Ready mode causes the system to deliver
laser treatment energy. The message “LASER FIRING” is displayed during this time.
Aspiration Panel
Flow/Vacuum Toggle
Vacuum Panel
Figure 2-93 Surgery Screen: Laser Mode
2.138 8065753060 Rev. Y

The system has three treatment modes that determine how the treatment laser shots
are delivered.
Treatment Modes:
• Repeat – Generates laser shots continuously when the laser footswitch treadle is
depressed.
• Single Shot – When the laser footswitch treadle is pressed down, the laser fires a
single shot. The Interval buttons are inactive in this mode.
• Continuous – The laser keeps firing as long as the laser footswitch treadle is
depressed. The Duration and Interval buttons are inactive in this mode.
Laser Panel:
• Laser Mode - Selects laser Standby or Ready mode.
• Port Selection - Selects the port used for treatment.
• Treatment Mode - Selects the Treatment mode: Repeat, Single Shot, or Continuous.
• Power Up/Down Buttons - Adjust the treatment laser power to the values shown
in the table below:
532 Green Laser Power Values (in milliwatts)
30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
150 160 170 180 190 200 220 240 250 260 280 300
320 340 350 360 380 400 420 440 450 460 480 500
550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1100 1200
1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000
NOTE: The Constellation™ Laser determines the 532 green laser maximum
available power and limits the user setting to that maximum value if less than
2 W. The maximum selectable power may be less than 2 W (2000 mW) because
of the degradation of the laser engine over time.
• Duration Up/Down Buttons - The Duration buttons adjust the exposure time to the
following values in milliseconds:10, 20, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500,
700, 1000, 1500, and 2000 ms. This setting is only available in Repeat or Single
Shot modes.
NOTE: In Continuous mode, depending on the thermal load of the system,

the system may shut down prior to the footswitch being released, with an
indication on the display. It is not recommended to use exposure times longer
than 2 seconds in Continuous mode.
• Interval Up/Down Buttons - The Interval is the time between treatment shots
when the treatment mode is set for Repeat mode. The Interval Time buttons adjust
the interval time to the following values:
- 30 ms to 100 ms in 10 ms steps
- 100 ms to 300 ms in 50 ms steps
- 300 ms up to 1 second duration in 100 ms steps
• Aiming Beam Up/Down Buttons - Adjustment of the current relative intensity (0-
10) of the aiming beam.
• LIO Illumination Up/Down Buttons - Adjustment of the LIO illumination
intensity (0-10). (This setting has no effect when the Keeler LIO is used.)
• Shot Count Label - Displays the current shot count. Pressing the Reset button
resets the shot count to zero.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.139
• Energy Label - Displays the total energy. Pressing the Reset button resets the
Total Energy display to zero.
• Laser More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup which
simplifies large value changes by providing slider controls.
NOTES:
In tethered mode, all front panel controls on the tethered laser console except for
the emergency switch, the key switch, and the two port buttons are disabled.
The laser is controlled/fired by the laser footswitch and the vacuum is controlled
by the Constellation™ footswitch.
controls for each panel in Laser mode have the following functions:
Vacuum Panel:
• Vacuum On/Off Button - Turns vacuum off or on.
• Vacuum End Up/Down Buttons - Sets the vacuum level at full treadle. The Start
value is always zero.
• Vacuum Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Displays the current vacuum level.
value.
for flow rate.
• Flow Limit Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current flow rate.
popup.
• Flow Limit Control Drop Down List - Determines whether the flow limit
is fixed or linear. In Fixed, the limit is constant regardless of the flow
level. In Linear, the limit varies depending on the footswitch treadle
position.
popup.
2.140 8065753060 Rev. Y

• Flow On/Off Button - Turns flow off or on.
• Flow More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup.
vacuum.
level.
its current value.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.141

FORCEPS MODE
The Forceps Pressure Panel controls the pressure for opening and closing pneumatic
forceps. Figure 2-94 shows the Forceps surgery screen. The controls for each panel in
Forceps mode have the following functions:
Forceps Pressure
15% End Limit
e
Pressur
eps
ing Forc
Increas
Start Pressure

Released
Figure 2-94 Surgery Screen: Forceps Mode

Forceps Panel:
• Pressure Start Up/Down Buttons - Set the pressure at treadle start.
• Pressure Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current pressure value.
• Calibrate On/Off Button - Enters Calibration mode allowing the user select and
set the pressure at Start and Close.
- When Start is selected, the Start pressure is applied to the port and the Start
Up/Down buttons are active on the Pressure control to allow adjustment of
the Start pressure.
- When Close is selected, the Close pressure is applied to the port and the Close
Up/Down buttons are active on the Pressure control to allow adjustment of
the Close pressure.
- Pressing the "Save Calibration Values" button saves these values.
2.142 8065753060 Rev. Y

SCISSORS MODE
Scissors mode shown in Figure 2-95 provides cutting capability using pneumatically
powered scissors controlled by the footswitch. The pneumatically powered scissors
use a microscissors snapped onto the Alcon/Grieshaber™ pneumatic handpiece,
which is connected via tubing to a front panel pneumatic port. Two submodes are
available: MultiCut and Prop (Proportional). In Scissors mode the surgery screen
contains panels for controlling scissors and bimanual forceps.
WARNING!
Ensure proper scissors tip attachment to pneumatic handpiece. Prior to use in
eye, depress footpedal\button to ensure proper tip function.
Scissors Mode: MULTICUT SUBMODE

In the MultiCut submode, pressing the footpedal activates the scissors at a cut rate
proportional to the footpedal position up to the preset End limit, set by pressing the
up/down buttons next to the End limit readout. Single cuts are possible by adjusting
the cut rate to 1 cpm and momentarily pressing the footpedal.
The controls for each panel in Scissors MultiCut submode have the following
functions:
Cutting Panel:
• Cut Rate End Up/Down Buttons - Set the cut rate end limit.
• Cut Rate Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current cut rate.
Forceps Panel:
• Bimanual On/Off Button - Turning Bimanual mode on allows the control of the
pneumatic forceps while the system is in Scissors mode. All controls function the
same as when the system is in Forceps mode (see Forceps mode for a description).
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.143

Cut Rate End Limit
te
Ra
C ut
s ing
rea
Inc

Released
Forceps Pressure End Limit

15%
re
Cut Rate End Limit
su
P res
ps te
rce Ra
Fo ut
BIMANUAL MODE s ing
C
rea
Start Pressure Inc
Cut Rate= 1
1 2
Released
Figure 2-95 Surgery Screen: Scissors Mode - MultiCut
2.144 8065753060 Rev. Y

Scissors Mode: PROP SUBMODE
The Proportional submode shown in Figure 2-96 provides proportional control of the
opening and closing of the scissor blades, dependent upon the amount of footpedal
depression. The amount of scissors closure is indicated in the Pressure panel. When
the footpedal is fully depressed, the Close Limit is reached, and scissors should
be fully closed. Pressing the On/Off button in the Calibration panel displays the
Calibration panel that allows the user to adjust the scissors Start and Close Pressures.
15%
Cut Pressure End Limit
re
ssu
Pre
tting
Cu
Start Pressure

Released
Forceps Pressure End Limit

15% Cut Pressure End Limit
re re
ssu ssu
Pre Pre
ps ttin
g
rce 15%
Cu
Fo
BIMANUAL MODE
Start Pressure Start Pressure
1 2
Released
Figure 2-96 Surgery Screen: Scissors Mode - Proportional
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.145

The controls for each panel in Scissors Proportional submode have the following
functions:
Cutting Panel:
• Pressure Start Up/Down Buttons - Set the pressure at treadle start.
• Pressure Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current cut rate.
• Calibrate On/Off Button - Enters Calibration Mode allowing the user to select and
set the pressure at Start and Close.
- When Start is selected, the Start pressure is applied to the port and the Start
Up/Down buttons are active on the Pressure control to allow adjustment of the
Start pressure.
- When Close is selected, the Close pressure is applied to the port and the Close
Up/Down buttons are active on the Pressure control to allow adjustment of the
Close pressure.
- Pressing the Save Calibration Values button saves these values.
Forceps Panel:
• Bimanual On/Off Button - Turning Bimanual mode on allows the control of the
pneumatic forceps while the system is in Scissors mode. All controls function the
same as when the system is in Forceps mode (see Forceps mode for a description).
2.146 8065753060 Rev. Y

VISCOUS FLUID CONTROL (VFC) MODE
VFC (Viscous Fluid Control) mode provides pressure at the front panel VFC
connector for fluid injection (i.e., silicone oil), or vacuum for extraction, through the
VFC tubing set to a syringe. Using vacuum, the VFC mode also provides a means of
extruding fluid through the VFC syringe.
CAUTION
Always use Alcon-supplied Viscous Fluid Control Kits and follow all Directions for
Use. Do not use VFC without the plunger/stopper supplied with the kit. Do not aspirate
fluids directly into the console; this will cause damage to the console, increase risk of
electrical shock, and void all warranties.
Viscous Fluid Control (VFC) Mode: EXTRACT SUBMODE

Vacuum for fluid extraction is provided to the syringe proportional to footpedal
depression. Max Limit vacuum is reached at full depression. The controls on the
Extraction panel shown in Figure 2-97 have the following functions:
• Vacuum End Up/Down Buttons - Set the vacuum level at full treadle. Start value
is always zero.
• Extraction More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup that
Vacuum End Limit
m
uu
ac
ingV
reas
Inc

Released
Figure 2-97 Surgery Screen: VFC Mode - Extract Submode
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.147

Viscous Fluid Control (VFC) Mode: INJECT SUBMODE
In this submode injection pressure to the syringe is provided proportional to the
footpedal position up to the Max Limit setting. Vacuum is available in Bimanual mode
by pressing the Bimanual On/Off button.
WARNINGS!
• Double check the cannula connected to the syringe for a tight connection. It
must not be allowed to come loose.
• Adjust the Max Limit air pressure in accordance with the viscosity of fluids to
be injected.
Injection Pressure End Limit
re
ssu
n Pre
e ctio
Inj

Released
Injection Pressure End Limit

Vacuum End Limit
BIMANUAL MODE su
re
r es
nP
tio
ec
Inj Vacuum Start Limit
1 2
Released
Figure 2-98 Surgery Screen: VFC Mode - Injection Submode
2.148 8065753060 Rev. Y

Vacuum Panel controls:
• Bimanual-Vacuum On/Off Button - Turns Vacuum on or off. When Bimanual
mode is on, the control displayed is a dual value control.
vacuum.
• Vacuum More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup which
• Reflux Label - Read only display of the current Reflux configuration and its
current value.
• Reflux More Information Button - Displays the Reflux More Information popup
allowing the selection of Proportional (1-120 mmHg) or Micro (10-100%)
Reflux.
Injection Panel controls:

• Pressure End Up/Down Buttons - Set the pressure value at full treadle. Start value
is always zero.
• Pressure Progress Bar and Numerical Value - Display the current vacuum level.
• Injection More Information Button - Displays the More Information popup which
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.149

END CASE
The End Case screen, selected by pressing the End Case tab, displays case related
metrics as shown in Figure 2-99. It consists of a Summary panel area and a tabbed
interface area for displaying the various metrics associated with the case. The screen
also provides various controls for renaming the case, printing the End Case and Laser
forms, and customizing the form’s content and layout via the Setup Form popup.
Figure 2-99 End Case Screen: Anterior Tab

Viewing of the various metrics associated with the case is accomplished by selecting
the associated tabs - Anterior, Posterior, Laser, or Consumables. Pressing the Rename
button above the tabs displays a keyboard which enables the user to rename the case
from the default name (date of surgery).
The Print and Print Laser Form buttons are used to obtain a print-out of the End Case
Form and Laser Form respectively. The Laser Form is comprised of the End Case
Form’s first header and the Laser metrics table only. Modification of the End Case
Form’s layout and content is accomplished using the Setup Form button, which when
pressed, displays the End Case Form Setup popup.
End Case Summary Panel

The Summary panel area lists those procedure steps that were used during the case
along with their cumulative times. For a step to be included in the summary list, work
must have been performed using the step. In most cases, work is performed when the
treadle is depressed. Therefore, steps that are defined in the procedure but not actually
used to perform work, are not listed. This could occur, for example, if the surgeon
used the first step of a procedure, selected the second step but did not depress the
treadle, and then proceeded ahead to the third step to perform work. In this scenario,
steps 1 and 3 would be included in the summary list, but step 2 would not be included
in the summary since no work was performed with it.
2.150 8065753060 Rev. Y

In computing a step’s cumulative time, it is necessary for work to be done while
the step is selected in order for the current elapsed time to be added to the step’s
cumulative time. Therefore, a user may access a step and interact with the various
touchscreen controls for an extended period of time but, unless the treadle is
depressed, the current elapsed time will be discarded and will not be added to the
step’s cumulative time. If the step’s cumulative time is zero, the step will not be
shown in the step summary list.
Metrics Tabs
The End Case Metrics screens are accessed through the labeled tabs next to the
Summary panel. Tabs are provided for Anterior, Posterior, Laser, and Consumables.
When selected, each tab displays the associated metrics for that tab as shown by the
Anterior tab in Figure 2-99. The Consumables tab displays all consumable items that
have been detected by the system.
Setup Form
The End Case Form Settings screen shown in Figure 2-100 is displayed by pressing
the Setup Form button on the End Case screen (Figure 2-99). The screen shows a
picture of the End Case Form print-out and provides controls for navigating to other
pages in the print-out, and for customizing the layout/content of the print-out.
The buttons at the bottom of the Form Settings screen perform the following actions:
• Page arrow buttons - Pressing these buttons allows the user to move through each
page of the printout.
• Save button - Pressing the Save button causes the system to save the various
layout and content customization settings and return to the End Case screen.
• Cancel button - Returns the system back to the End Case screen without saving
changes made to content and layout.
Pressing the Edit Form button allows the
user to customize the layout and content of
the printout.
Edit
Button
Figure 2-100 End Case: Setup Form Screen
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.151

Setup Form: Editing the Form
To modify the form, press the Edit Form button. When pressed, the “smoked glass”
panel is retracted allowing access to the various customization controls. The editing
controls provide the following functionality:
• Cell navigation buttons including up, down, left, right.

• Cell text edit button.
• Drop list to permit the specification of a cell data fields.
• Cell appearance controls including font size and style, text alignment, and cell
border lines (on/off).
• Table insertion/deletion controls
• Table row height, insertion, and deletion controls.
• Table column width, insertion, and deletion controls.
• Revert to Defaults button.
Setup Form: Editing the Form - Customizing Table Cells

The form is composed of a number of tables which are in turn composed of cells
arranged in rows and columns. Each table cell provides various attributes that can be
customized with respect to their appearance and content displayed. A cell can contain
static text or it can be defined to include a data field whose text is determined at
runtime. An example of a data field would be Surgeon Name.
To customize a cell follow these steps:

1. Select a table on the form by pressing on it. The table is then shown with
selection handles. The active cell is shown in red.
2. Select the cell to be customized by using the Up, Down, Left, Right cell
navigation buttons located in the Cell Selection & Edit panel.
3. To specify static text for a cell, press the Edit button (see Figure 2-100). When
pressed, the keyboard popup is displayed allowing text to be entered by the user.
4. To specify a cell data field, press the Data Field drop list to display a list of
available data field types including, but not limited to, Surgeon Name, Date,
Procedure Name, etc. After selecting the desired data field, the associated data is
automatically entered into the cell.
5. Specify the font and point size for a cell’s text using the Font, Font Style, and
Font Size drop list controls. The Font Style drop list control is used to apply bold
and italics formatting to the cell’s text.
6. Select the desired text alignment by pressing the Left Alignment, Center
Alignment, or Right Alignment toggle buttons. The selected alignment will be
highlighted.
7. Select the desired cell borders to show or hide by pressing the Bottom, Top, Left,
or Right Border toggle buttons. If a border is on, it will be highlighted.
2.152 8065753060 Rev. Y

Setup Form: Editing the Form - Creating New Tables
To begin the customization process, the user must first select a table on the form by
pressing on it. The table is then shown with selection handles and the active cell is
shown in red.
To insert a new table after the selected table, follow these steps:
1. In the Table section of the Edit Form panel, press the Insert button (Ins). A table
with two rows and three columns appears below the selected table and the new
table is now the selected table. To delete the table, press the Delete button (Del).
The Table Type is selected from the Type dropdown list in the Table section of the
Edit Form panel. The default table type for new tables is Custom which contains
no entries or formatting (see Customizing Table Cells for information on editing
individual cells).
2. Select the type of table desired from the Type dropdown list. There are five
preformatted tables available from the list which automatically pull data from the
procedures performed. The Custom selection allows the user to create a custom
table to meet their particular requirements. Preformatted tables may also be
customized according to the users requirements.
3. To increase the height of the selected row, press the Height% dropdown button
and select an entry between 1 and 20%. The default row height is 2, so selecting 1
will result in a smaller row height and all selections above 2 will result in a larger
row height. The height of the selected row is displayed on the Height% button.
4. To insert or delete a row, press the Ins (insert) or Del (delete) button in the Row
section of the Edit Form panel.
5. To increase the width of the selected column, press the Width% dropdown button
and select an entry between 5 and 100%. The default column width is 30, so
selecting 5 through 25 will result in a smaller column width and all selections
above 30 will result in a larger column width. The width of the selected column is
displayed on the Width% button.
6. To insert or delete a column, press the Ins (insert) or Del (delete) button in the
Column section of the Edit Form panel.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.153

DEMO MODE
Demo Mode enables the user to navigate all available screens and simulate footswitch
actions without connecting surgical tools (such as cassette, handpieces, probes, etc.)
or source pressure. Demo Mode can be used to setup doctor and procedure settings
that will automatically be transferred over for use in regular mode. Any changes made
to existing doctor or procedure settings in Demo Mode will also carry over to the
regular mode when the system is restarted.
TO ENTER DEMO MODE:

Press the Options button on the menu bar then press the Demo Mode button (shown
in Figure 2-8); at the prompt, press “Yes” to enter Demo Mode. After 15-20 seconds,
the Demo Mode Setup screen appears as shown in Figure 2-101 (top screen).
Figure 2-101 Demo Mode Setup Screen
2.154 8065753060 Rev. Y

SETTING UP DEMO MODE:
Pressing one of the selections under “Quick Start” connects all surgical tools
associated with that type of procedure. For example, pressing the Anterior button
results in a premium anterior cassette with automatic stopcock, anterior vitreous
probe, and phaco handpiece being connected. The “connected icon” will
appear next to all connected instruments. Pressing the None selection disconnects all
instruments.
Additionally, the user can select an area on the Connection help diagram. In Figure
2-101, the Left Connection Panel is selected and each instrument that can be
connected to the panel is listed. Pressing on the instrument name displays a popup
that allows the user to disconnect the current instrument and connect another from the
list. After connecting the desired instruments press the Close button and the system
displays the main screen as shown in Figure 2-102. The user can return to the Demo
Mode Setup screen by pressing Options then Demo Options.
Displays Demo Mode Setup Screen
Demo
Mode
Indicator
Exits Demo Mode
and shuts down
the system
Figure 2-102 Demo Mode Main Screen
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.155

On the main screen, the “Demo Mode” label indicates that the system is in demo
mode. This label is displayed in all Demo Mode screens: Setup, Surgery, and End
Case screen.
USING DEMO MODE:

At this point the user can operate the user interface as if all connections performed in
the setup screen are active. Actions that can be taken include:
• Settings can be changed via the global controls.
• Doctors and procedures can be added/edited.
• The system will simulate the priming sequence (by pressing the Start Prime
button).
• Footswitch actions can be simulated.
• The simulated case can be reviewed in the End Case screens.
The footswitch simulator dialog is displayed by pressing the footswitch icon. It

provides for the simulation of all footswitch functions using an onscreen interface.
Once displayed, the popup can be repositioned to reveal the information on the
underlying screen. Using the Simulator, the user can simulate footswitch button
presses, treadle depression, and laser footswitch functions. Each of these functions is
accessed by selecting the tabs shown in Figure 2-103.
Footswitch Simulator: Buttons - In order to simulate footswitch button presses, the

Footswitch Mapping popup has been modified in Demo Mode to simulate footswitch
button activation by pressing buttons on the popup window. For example, to activate
Momentary Diathermy, press the associated button on the Footswitch Simulator
and the Diathermy global control will be highlighted as if the footswitch button was
pressed in normal operating mode.
2.156 8065753060 Rev. Y

Press buttons to simulate

footswitch button activation.
Move slider to simulate

treadle depression.
Press Fire Laser button

to simulate laser shot.
Figure 2-103 Footswitch Simulator Screens
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.157

Footswitch Simulator: Treadle - To simulate Treadle depression, select the Treadle
tab then move the Treadle Position slider control. Figure 2-104 shows the effects of
moving the slider in Vit 3D mode.
Surgery Setup:
• Vit 3D mode
• Infusion ON
Treadle Postion Slider

moved to 55%:
• Footswitch icon indicates
position 1
• Vacuum increases linearly
as treadle depressed
• Cut rate starts at 5000
cpm then decreases
linearly to 2500 as treadle
depressed
Figure 2-104 Footswitch Simulator Treadle Depression
Footswitch Simulator: Laser - To simulate firing the laser, place the system in Laser
mode, select the desired settings, select “Ready” mode, and select the Laser tab on the
footswitch simulator (see Figure 2-105).
Surgery Setup:
• Laser mode
• Single Shot Treatment
• Ready mode
Fire Laser button pressed

on Footswitch Simulator:
• “Laser Firing” is displayed
• Shot Count increases
• Energy reading increases
Figure 2-105 Laser Footswitch Simulator
EXIT DEMO MODE

To exit Demo Mode, select Options from the Menu Bar then press “Exit Demo
Mode.” The system will exit Demo Mode and shutdown. To restart the system in
regular mode, press the Standby Switch on the rear panel.
2.158 8065753060 Rev. Y

PROBES AND HANDPIECES
Different probes and handpieces are required for each operating mode of the
Constellation™ Vision System. Following is a representative selection of probes and
handpieces with a general description of each. See the Accessories and Parts section
of this manual, or consult your Alcon representative, for a complete selection of all
probes, handpieces, and handpiece tips available. NOTE: Please refer to Section
One for a list of Warnings and Cautions that apply to the use and care of probes
and handpieces.
Vitrectomy Probes
• 20, 23, 25, 25+™, and 27+™ GA UltraVit™ Probe
• 20 and 23 GA AVIT UltraVit™ Probe
• 23, 25+™and 27+™ GA HyperVit™ Probe
Figure 2-106 UltraVit™ 20 GA Probe

Pneumatic Handle
The Pneumatic Handle is a multi-purpose tool that is designed to drive forceps or
scissors tips. The console can drive these tips in multi-cut and proportional modes.
When two handpieces are used, with one in the forceps location and one in the
scissors position, they can be driven in the bimanual mode. Bimanual mode enables
forceps activation during the first portion of footpedal travel and scissors activation
during the second portion of footpedal travel.
Figure 2-107 Pneumatic Handle
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.159

Fragmentation Handpiece
The Fragmentation handpiece is configured to provide simultaneous vacuum and
fragmentation, or vacuum only, depending upon the console setup. The handpiece has
a stainless steel shell for improved reliability and durability. Other than attaching and
removing the needle and aspiration line, no assembly or disassembly is required.
Figure 2-108 Fragmentation Handpiece

Phaco Ultrasound Handpieces
Alcon's phaco handpieces integrate irrigation, aspiration and emulsification. The three
functions of the lens extraction step enable the surgeon to simultaneously maintain or
inflate the anterior chamber, emulsify the lens, and aspirate the lens material from the
eye. These handpieces require no disassembly other than removal of the disposable
tubing, the ultrasonic tip, and the infusion sleeve with or without the bubble
suppression insert.
WARNINGS!
Appropriate use of Constellation™ Vision System parameters and accessories is
important for successful procedures. Use of low vacuum limits, low flow rates,
low irrigation pressure, high power settings, extended power usage, power
usage during occlusion conditions (beeping tones), failure to sufficiently aspirate
viscoelastic prior to using power, excessively tight incisions, and combinations
of the above actions may result in significant temperature increases at incision
site and inside the eye, and lead to severe thermal eye tissue damage.
Directing energy toward non-lens material, such as iris or capsule, may cause
mechanical and/or thermal tissue damage.
Use of an ultrasonic handpiece other than the OZil™ torsional or the U/S, or use
of a handpiece repaired without Alcon authorization, is not permitted, and may
result in patient injury, including potential shock hazard to patient and/or operator.
Use of the OZil™ torsional or the U/S handpiece in the absence of irrigation flow
and/or in the presence of reduced or lost aspiration flow can cause excessive
heating and potential damage to the cornea and other tissues.
During any ultrasonic procedure, metal particles may result from inadvertent
touching of the ultrasonic tip with a second instrument. Another potential source
of metal particles resulting from any ultrasonic handpiece may be the result of
ultrasonic energy causing micro abrasion of the ultrasonic tip.
CAUTIONS
Do not test or operate the OZil™ torsional or U/S handpiece unless the tip is immersed
in BSS™ sterile irrigating solution or distilled water or is in surgical use. Irreparable
damage to the handpiece and tip can result if run dry.
Ensure that test chamber is filled with BSS™ sterile irrigating solution before tuning
the OZil™ torsional or U/S handpieces. Tuning a handpiece dry may result in premature
tip failure and breakage.
2.160 8065753060 Rev. Y

• Infiniti™ Ultrasonic (U/S) Handpiece - This handpiece is used for ultrasonic

applications on the Constellation™ Vision System with 1.1 mm TurboSonics™ tips
or 0.9 mm TurboSonics™ tips, including flared and/or ABS™ tips.
Figure 2-109 Infiniti™ Ultrasonic (U/S) Handpiece
• Infiniti™ OZil™ Torsional Handpiece - The OZil™ torsional handpiece integrates

all functions of the ultrasonic handpiece, and in addition provides ultrasonic
oscillations. This handpiece uses many of the same tips as the U/S handpiece; for
best performance of OZil™ torsional handpiece, use tips recommended by your
Alcon representative.
NOTE: The Constellation™ Vision System does not support the Centurion™
OZil™ handpiece.
s o ni
ltra
U scillation
O
nd
sou
Ultra
Figure 2-110 Infiniti™ OZil™ Torsional Handpiece
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.161

TurboSonics™ Family of Tips
U/S tips are made of medical grade titanium alloy, and are attached to the OZil™
torsional or U/S handpiece to deliver mechanical energy to the lens, assisting in
its removal by aspiration. Depending on the needs and technique preferred by the
surgeon, various styles of tips and tip bevels are available (see Figure 2-111). Various
U/S tip styles are color coded.
• 1.1 mm U/S Tips - The standard ultrasonic tips are the original 1.1 mm
TurboSonics™ tips. They are designed for use only with 1.1 mm infusion sleeves.
• 0.9 mm U/S Tips - The 0.9 mm ultrasonic tips are designed to allow entry through
a smaller incision. They are designed for use only with 0.9 mm infusion sleeves.
• Mackool** U/S Tips - The Mackool** ultrasonic tips contain a polymer tubing
over the main part of the tip shaft. This necessary part of the Mackool** tip
provides additional thermal and fluidic advantages.
• Aspiration Bypass System - The ABS™ tip contains a small hole in the distal
portion of the tip’s wall. This helps to maintain flow through the system even
during occlusion of the tip’s main port.
WARNINGS!
For phaco surgery, use only Alcon-certified Turbosonics™ MicroTip™ configurations
(.9 mm). Alcon does not recommend the use of standard Turbosonics™ tips (1.0
mm) with the Constellation™ Vision System. The use of 1.1 mm phaco tips could
result in undesirable fluidic instability. Please select irrigation and aspiration
settings which are appropriate for the tip selected.
Poor clinical performance will result if tip is not secured tightly to the handpiece.
Read all information printed on the consumable packs prior to use.
During any ultrasonic procedure, metal particles may result from inadvertent
touching of the ultrasonic tip with a second instrument. Another potential source
of metal particles resulting from any ultrasonic handpiece may be the result of
ultrasonic energy causing micro abrasion of the ultrasonic tip.
Standard U/S Tip - The 1.1 mm TurboSonics™ tip Kelman™ Tip - The Kelman™ tip has a bent shaft
with the round shaft is the original, classical U/S which generates transverse ultrasound motion, in addition
tip shape. The 0.9 mm has a smaller diameter shaft. to the conventional longitudinal motion, to enhance cutting
efficiency. In addition, the bend allows better visibility
during the surgical procedure.
small hole small hole
The Aspiration Bypass System - The ABS™ tip contains Flared ABS™ Tip - The flared tip has a larger proximal
a small hole in the distal portion of the tip's wall. port, providing increased holding force. They narrow in the
middle of the shaft, thus allowing smaller incisions and
improving occlusion breaks by reducing outflow from the
small hole anterior chamber, following occlusion breaks. Flared tips
also have the Aspiration Bypass System feature, to further
enhance performance.
Tapered Tip - The tapered ABS™ tip is a combination polymer tubing

of the 0.9 mm tip and the flared ABS™ tip. The shaft
inner and outer diameters is equivalent to straight tips,
while the distal end is comparable to flared tips. The
tapered ABS™ tip has the improved holding force of a Mackool** Series U/S Tip - The Mackool**
flared tip, and the same aspiration flow characteristics ultrasonic tip contains a polymer tubing over the
as a straight tip. main part of the tip shaft.
Figure 2-111 TurboSonics™ Tips

Shown here are samples of U/S tips used with the OZil™ torsional and the U/S handpieces.
2.162 8065753060 Rev. Y

MicroSmooth™ Infusion Sleeves
Infusion sleeves cover the tip of the handpiece to provide irrigation to the anterior
chamber of the eye during surgery (see Figure 2-112). Infusion sleeves are used
with the OZil™ torsional, the Infiniti™ U/S handpiece, and with some Ultraflow™
I/A handpieces. Infusion sleeves used with the OZil™ torsional and Infiniti™ U/S
handpieces may be used with a bubble suppression insert (BSI), when provided.
Infusion sleeves must be correctly matched to the specific tip type (see the following
descriptions).
INFUSION SLEEVE BUBBLE SUPPRESSION INSERT (BSI)
Figure 2-112 Infiniti™ U/S Handpiece shown with Infusion Sleeve and Bubble Suppression Insert
Depending on the needs and technique preferred by the surgeon, various styles of
infusion sleeves are available as listed in Table 2-5.
Table 2-5 MicroSmooth™ Infusion Sleeves

Sleeve Color Recommended
Infusion Sleeves
0.9 mm 1.1 mm Incision Size
High Infusion Semi-transparent Semi-transparent
3.2 mm
Sleeves purple blue
Standard -- Blue 3.0 mm
Micro Purple Blue/green 2.75 mm
Ultra Red Green 2.2 mm
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.163

Ultraflow™ Handpieces and Tips

The Ultraflow™ handpiece is used in I/A mode to maintain chamber pressure with
irrigation while removing cortical material via aspiration. (See Figure 2-113 and note
the band markings on the tips that identify size of tip aperture.) Some configurations
of the Ultraflow™ IT and SP handpieces also use infusion sleeves. The following
Ultraflow™ I/A handpieces and tips are available:
•
Ultraflow™ IT Handpiece and Interchangeable Tips - The Ultraflow™ IT consists
of a handpiece body that accepts interchangeable tips. These tips do not require an
adapter or infusion sleeve as they contain a built-in metal infusion sleeve.
•
Ultraflow™ IT Handpiece and Threaded Tip Adapter - Reusable I/A tips with
TurboSonics™ silicone infusion sleeves can be used with the Ultraflow™ IT
handpiece with threaded tip adapter.
•
Ultraflow™ SP Handpiece (Single-Piece with fixed tips) - The Ultraflow™ SP
consists of a single-piece handpiece with irrigation tip, threaded tip adapter, or I/A
tip with a built-in metal infusion sleeve. Various tip configurations are available.
WARNINGS!
Use of non-Alcon surgical reusable or disposable I/A handpieces that do not meet
Alcon surgical specifications, or use of an Alcon handpiece not specified for use
with the Constellation™ Vision System, may result in a fluidic imbalance. This, in
turn, may cause a shallowing or collapsing of the anterior chamber.
Exceeding the recommended level of 100 mmHg with a 0.5 mm or larger I/A tip
may cause anterior chamber shallowing and/or incarceration or tearing of the
posterior capsule.
I/A tips are not to be used with the OZil™ torsional or U/S handpieces.
2.164 8065753060 Rev. Y

120° Tip 90° Tip 45° Tip Curved Tip
O-Rings
Straight Tip
Figure 2-113 Ultraflow™ IT handpiece and tips
0.2 mm I/A Tip 0.5 mm I/A Tip
O-Rings
0.3 mm I/A Tip Threaded Tip Adapter
Figure 2-114 Ultraflow™ IT handpiece with infusion sleeve, reusable I/A tip, and threaded tip adapter
O-Ring Extractor
Large O-Rings
Small O-Rings
Figure 2-115 Ultraflow™ O-ring tool with large and small O-rings
Figure 2-116 Ultraflow™ SP handpiece (handpiece shown with .3 mm 45° tip)
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.165

Diathermy/Coagulation Handpieces
Single use Bipolar Coagulation Brushes are available in a wide variety of
configurations: straight, curved, 20-gauge, 23-gauge, 25-gauge, 27-gauge, tapered,
and widestroke. All single use bipolar accessories are available with and without
cables. Also available are reusable and single-use bipolar cables.
Bipolar Coagulation Forceps are lightweight and ergonomically designed to reduce

hand fatigue, as well as to provide precise control and safety. They are available in
high-conductive non-stick alloy, titanium, or single-use configurations. They are also
available with a wide variety of tip styles.
Figure 2-117 Single use bipolar brush
INTREPID™ AUTOSERT™ IOL Injector
The INTREPID™ AutoSert™ IOL Injector is intended to deliver qualified AcrySof ™

intraocular lenses into the eye following cataract removal (see Figure 2-118). The IOL
injector, after proper preparation with a loaded, single use cartridge, gives the surgeon
footpedal control of AcrySof ™ lens insertion. Please refer to the INTREPID™ AutoSert™
IOL Injector DFU for qualified cartridge/IOL combinations.
The IOL injector comes with a detachable and reusable plunger. Please refer to the
INTREPID™ AutoSert™ IOL Injector DFU for instructions on proper preparation and
use of the handpiece and plunger.
Figure 2-118 INTREPID™ AUTOSERT™ IOL INJECTOR

The AutoSert™ Injector gives the surgeon footpedal control of IOL insertion (single use cartridge with lens
not shown).
2.166 8065753060 Rev. Y

CAUTIONS
• Do not ultrasonically clean the AutoSert™ IOL Injector connector. Ultrasonic
cleaning of connector will cause irreparable damage.
• Use care when handling AutoSert™ IOL Injector, particularly when cleaning. Always
clean AutoSert™ IOL Injector over a surface cushioned with a pad or rubber mat.
• Be sure AutoSert™ IOL Injector cable connector is dry before connecting it to console.
• Do not immerse AutoSert™ IOL Injector in any fluid when plunger is not retracted.
AutoSert™ IOL Injector plunger is fully retracted.
• As part of a properly maintained surgical environment, it is recommended that a
backup IOL injector be made available in the event the AutoSert™ IOL injector
WARNINGS!
• The INTREPID™ AutoSert™ IOL Injector is non-sterile and must be cleaned and
sterilized prior to, and immediately after, each use.
• Never immerse the IOL injector in liquid after autoclaving; allow it to air cool for at
least 15 minutes. Quenching could result in a potentially hazardous condition for
the patient.
• The AutoSert™ IOL Injector delivery system is for the implantation of Alcon qualified
AcrySof ™ foldable IOLs. Unqualified lenses shall not be used with the system. See
INTREPID™ AutoSert™ IOL Injector DFU or AcrySof ™ IOL DFU, or contact your Alcon
representative, for qualified lens/cartridge combinations.
• The cartridge/IOL combination listed in the DFU, along with Alcon settings, has
been validated per section 5 of BS EN ISO 11979-3:2006. Appropriate use of injector
handpiece settings is important for successful IOL implantation. Inappropriate use
of settings may lead to a potentially hazardous condition for the patient.
otherwise, this could expose non-sterile portion of shaft and result in a potentially
hazardous condition for the patient.
• The metal reusable plunger must be sterilized after each use. The reusable plunger
is to be installed onto the handpiece or into the wrench prior to sterilization.
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.167

THE CONSTELLATION™ CASSETTE
The cassette is the interface between the Constellation™ console and the surgical
handpiece. It is used to regulate BSS™ irrigating fluid to the handpiece, aspirate debris
from the handpiece, monitor irrigation and aspiration pressure, and deposit the debris
in a sealed drainage bag for disposal. The cassette ports are color coded and keyed
for ease of identification and connection to the administration tubing sets. This will
ensure proper connections each time the system is setup.
The premium combined cassette shown in Figure 2-119 is a consumable assembly

capable of providing all the functions needed to perform anterior, posterior, and
combined surgeries. It provides fluid aspiration and pressurized fluid (or filtered
air) infusion to the eye at a constant IOP independent of aspiration flow rates during
posterior segment surgery. The infusion fluid source to the cassette can be changed
during a procedure without interruption or re-priming the tubing connecting the
cassette and the infusion cannula.
Specialized cassettes for posterior and anterior procedures are available and have only
those ports necessary to perform the associated procedure. See Consumable Pack
Configurations on the following pages for detailed information on the type of cassette
contained in each pack.
2.168 8065753060 Rev. Y

WARNINGS!
All fluids aspirated during surgery should be treated as biohazards. Take appropriate
precautions when handling instruments and lines in contact with aspirated fluids.
Drain bag volume should not exceed 500 ml “Max. Capacity.” Exceeding this
volume may result in a biohazardous condition.
Pressure Source Port (gray)
Irrigation Port (light green)

(combined and anterior only) Infusion Source Port (red)
Aspiration Port 2 LPAS Port (white)

(light blue) (combined and posterior only)
Aspiration Port 1 (blue)

Infusion Port (green)
(combined and posterior only)
(combined and posterior only)
Drain Bag
Figure 2-119 The Constellation™ Combined Cassette
8065753060 Rev. Y 2.169

CONSUMABLE PACK CONFIGURATIONS
Constellation™ Consumables Procedure Packs are available in multiple
configurations to meet the user’s needs for each procedure. There are three main
types of Consumables Packs: Posterior segment, Anterior segment and Combined
Procedure (both Posterior and Anterior).
The packs are available in various gauge/size offerings to suit the needs of the
surgeon. The basic options for the Constellation™ Consumables Procedure
Packs are listed in Table 2-6. Contact your Alcon representative for available Pack
configurations.
WARNING!
Attach only Alcon supplied consumables to console and cassette luer fittings. Do
not connect consumables to the patient's intravenous connections.
Table 2-6 Consumable Pack Contents

PACK TYPE
ACCESSORY TYPE
Combined Posterior Anterior
• Combined Procedure
• Posterior Cassette
Cassette
• Premium Administration • Anterior Cassette
• Premium Administration
Tubing Set • Premium Administration
Tubing Set
Cassette • Premium Infusion FA/X Tubing Set
• Premium Infusion FA/X
Tubing Set • Irrigation Aspiration
Tubing Set
• Auxiliary Aspiration/ Tubing Set
• Irrigation Aspiration
Extrusion Tubing Set
Tubing Set
• 20000 cpm HyperVit™ • 20000 cpm HyperVit™
Probe Probe
• 10000 cpm UltraVit™ • 10000 cpm UltraVit™
Vit Probe Probe Probe
--
(20, 23, 25, or 27 GA) • 7500 cpm UltraVit™ • 7500 cpm UltraVit™
Probe Probe
• 5000 cpm UltraVit™ • 5000 cpm UltraVit™
Probe Probe
• Standard Endoilluminator • Standard Endoilluminator
Endoilluminator Probes
• Wide angle • Wide angle --
(20, 23, 25, or 27 GA)
Endoilluminator Endoilluminator
• High flow infusion cannula • High flow infusion cannula
• Posterior Small Parts Kit • Posterior Small Parts Kit
Posterior Accessories • MVR Blade (20 GA only) • MVR Blade (20 GA only)
--
(20, 23, 25, or 27 GA) • Standard (23/25 GA) • Standard (23/25 GA)
or Valved Entry System or Valved Entry System
(23/25/27 GA) (23/25/27 GA)
Anterior Accessories
• Anterior Small Parts Kit -- • Anterior Small Parts Kit
(0.9 mm or 1.1 mm)

SECTION THREE - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
INTRODUCTION
This section details the recommended initial setup for the Constellation™ Vision
System. These procedures may be modified to conform to hospital requirements and
practices as you become experienced in using the system.
The procedures are divided into two columns and presume a surgical team of three
people: Surgeon and Scrub Nurse in the sterile field, and a Circulating Nurse in
the non‑sterile field. In the left column a directive is given; in the right column the
responsible team member is identified.
Any problems pertaining to setup and check‑out procedures should first be directed to
the Troubleshooting section of this manual. If questions still exist, contact the Alcon
Technical Services Department or your local Alcon representative.
IMPORTANT NOTE: For accessory setup and use information, please refer to
the "Directions for Use" included with each accessory.
In addition, the Constellation™ Vision System contains setup Help videos that can be
accessed by pressing the Help button located at the top of the display.
POWER UP SEQUENCE
When the power switch is turned on, and the standby switch is pressed, the
Constellation™ Vision System logo screen appears while the system performs
its self-test diagnostics. The system is capable of detecting and reporting a wide
range of advisories, errors, and faults. Many of these are checked during the power
up procedure. If an operational condition is detected during power up, the user is
informed and the instrument becomes non‑operational until the advisory, error, or
fault is corrected. Upon successful completion of the self-tests, the system enters the
setup screen.
8065753060 Rev. Y 3.1

Table 3-1 INITIAL SYSTEM SETUP
1. Position the system and the optional instrument tray as required

for the procedure to be performed. For additional information,
refer to the procedure "Positioning the Instrument Tray" later in
Circulating Nurse
this section of the manual. NOTE: The instrument tray height
should be positioned so that it is approximately at mid-
cassette level.
2. Constellation™ Footswitch: Connect the Constellation™
footswitch by matching the red dot on the footswitch cable
connector to the red dot on the footswitch, plug cable into
footswitch. Plug the other end of the footswitch cable into
the rear panel on the console or on the front of the optional
base (match red dots for proper orientation). Note: Only
the Constellation™ footswitch should be used with the
Constellation™ Vision System.
Circulating Nurse
Laser Footswitch: If the optional laser will be used in the
procedure, connect the laser footswitch to the Constellation™
Vision System rear panel (see Figure 2-2 for rear panel
connections). If the laser will be tethered to the Constellation™
console, refer to the procedure "Connecting a PurePoint™ Laser
to the Constellation™ Vision System in Tethered Mode" later in this
section of the manual.
3. Connect pressure source to rear panel as described in the
procedure "Connecting the Constellation™ Vision System to a
Facility Pressure Source" in this section of the manual.
WARNING! Circulating Nurse

Verify tank pressure/facility pressure prior to surgery. If air source
replacement is needed during surgery, be sure to remove instruments
from the eye and plug cannulas as necessary. The system will revert
to a backup BSS™ pressure of 30 mmHg.
4. If the Video Overlay feature will be used, connect the external

Circulating Nurse
equipment as shown in Figure 3-13 or Figure 3-15.
CAUTION
Do not use portable socket outlets or power strip with this system.
5. Plug main power cord into a suitable wall outlet or receptacle.

Turn Power switch located at the bottom of the rear panel next
to the power cord, to the On position (this switch remains ON
in the "I" position). Turn system power ON by pressing the Circulating Nurse
Standby switch located at the middle of the rear panel.
If this is the first use of the instrument, the Doctor/Procedure

selection popup appears after power up. Refer to Section Two
for a detailed description of the screens displayed during setup
and surgery.
3.2 8065753060 Rev. Y

Table 3-1 INITIAL SYSTEM SETUP
6. Press the Doctor button and select an available doctor, or add a

Circulating Nurse
doctor by following the steps presented on the display.
7. Scan the pack or select the appropriate handpiece, tip,
accessories, and procedure types. The following accessories
have been designed for use with the Constellation™ Vision
System:
• Constellation™ Procedure Packs
• Auto Gas Filler Pack
• Fragmentation Pack
• Viscous Fluid Control Pack
• Extrusion Accessories Circulating Nurse
• Fiber Optic Illuminator Accessories
• Diathermy Accessories
• Pneumatic Handpiece Accessories
• Anterior Vitrectomy Probe Packs
NOTE: Refer to the Directions For Use (DFU) included

with each accessory kit/consumable pack for detailed
instructions on how to setup that accessory.
CAUTION
U/S and fragmentation handpieces must be at room temperature before
use. Allow handpiece to air cool after steam autoclave (at least 15
Circulating Nurse
minutes). Never immerse in liquid to cool.
8. Sterilize the instruments according to hospital procedure (refer

to Section Four for additional cleaning/sterilization information).
8065753060 Rev. Y 3.3

POSITIONING THE INSTRUMENT TRAY
The tray is capable of accommodating a variety of positions in the operating room
environment: right, left, front and rear of the surgeon as well as the front of the bed. In
addition, the tray can be installed on either side of the system. The tray height and position
are adjustable by pulling the Instrument Tray Latch Release shown in Figure 3-1.
WARNING!
The maximum allowable load on the instrument tray is 20 lb (9 kg). If the load
exceeds this limit, the tray arm will automatically lower itself in order to avoid
tipping the system over. Additionally, if the instrument tray is positioned over a
patient, a mayo stand should be placed beneath it to avoid a potential collapse
of the tray arm onto the patient.
NOTE: The Instrument Tray may be

installed on either side of the system.
Instrument Tray Position Latch Release

Pulling this latch release allows the tray to be
moved vertically (up and down), and to rotate
at the three points shown in this illustration.
These three pivot points allow the tray to be
placed in virtually any position necessary to
accommodate most surgery setups. Releasing
the latch locks the tray in the current position.
Instrument Tray Horizontal/Vertical Latch Release

Pulling this latch release in the direction shown allows the user
to rotate the tray to the horizontal or vertical (stored) position.
Each position locks in place when the latch is released.
Figure 3-1 Positioning the Instrument Tray
3.4 8065753060 Rev. Y

Placing the Instrument Tray in the Stored Position
WARNING!
Place the instrument tray in the stored position (see Figure 3-2) prior to
transportation to avoid a situation that could cause the system to tip.
1 Pull the Horizontal/Vertical Latch Release (see Figure 3-1) and rotate the
instrument tray to the vertical position shown in Figure 3-2.
2 Pull the Position Latch Release and move the tray and arm assembly into the
stored position shown in Figure 3-2.
Instrument Tray in the vertical position Instrument Tray/Arm in the stored position
Figure 3-2 Storing the Instrument Tray
CAUTION
DO NOT push or pull on the tray arm without pulling
the green release handle - damage to sensitive
components may result (see Figure 3-3).
Figure 3-3 Tray Arm CAUTION

DO NOT push or pull on the tray arm without pulling the green release handle - damage to sensitive
components may result.
8065753060 Rev. Y 3.5

CONNECTING THE CONSTELLATION™ VISION SYSTEM TO A FACILITY PRESSURE
SOURCE
CAUTION
If smaller ID fittings are used in conjunction with the inlet hose fittings, system
performance may be affected at “Minimal Inlet Pressure” (58.8 to 72.5 psig).
NOTES:
• To ensure proper function of the Constellation™ Vision System, the following
conditions must be met:
- All pressure source fittings and hoses used must have a minimum of 1/4 inch
inside diameter.
- The pressure source and regulators must be able to support a maximum flow
of 100 slpm.
• Use thread sealant when connecting fittings.
Pressure Source Configuration

The pressure hose is shipped in a configuration that is compatible with some facility
pressure source fittings. The shipped configuration is shown in Figure 3-4.
Right Angle Fitting

(1/4 F X 1/4 M - BSTP Elbow)
To Facility Air Source

(1/4 F BSPT X Male Schrader)
To Constellation™ Rear Panel
Figure 3-4 Pressure Hose Configuration for Facility with an Pressure Source
To connect the Constellation™ Vision System to a facility pressure source, perform

the following steps:
1 Determine if facility pressure source is compatible with the provided hose
configuration.
2 Connect hose to the facility pressure source.
3 Connect the quick disconnect fitting to the Constellation™ Vision System rear
panel.
NOTE: A right angle fitting is included with the hose assembly and may be used
to replace the fitting on the Constellation™ Vision System rear panel if desired. In
this configuration, remove the quick disconnect fitting from the hose then thread
the hose onto the right angle fitting on the rear panel (no quick disconnect).
3.6 8065753060 Rev. Y
INSTALLATION AND REPLACEMENT OF ISPAN** GAS BOTTLES
The following instructions detail the installation and replacement of the ISPAN**
gas bottles that support the Auto Gas Fill functionality of the Constellation™ Vision
System equipped with optional base unit. Figure 3-5 shows the C3F8 and SF6 gas
bottles and their associated regulators.
NOTES:
• The ISPAN** gas bottle and console connection are uniquely configured and
color coded for each type of gas to prevent misconnection. Gas bottles may
vary according to date of manufacture.
• Cylinders should be returned to ALCON in return boxes only.
• For return boxes for empty cylinders contact your local Alcon representative
or USA Only: Call 1-800-TO-ALCON (800-862-5266).
• Tank transportation is governed by the Department of Transportation.
Restrictions apply. Outside of USA, follow your local requirements.
Figure 3-5 ISPAN** Gas Bottles

C3F8 Gas Bottle and regulator (does not contain O-Ring); SF6 Gas Bottle and regulator (contains O-Ring)
8065753060 Rev. Y 3.7

Installation of ISPAN** Gas Bottle
1 For SF6: Place the included o-ring (o-ring for SF6 only) in the regulator fitting
(see Figure 3-6) and attach the regulator to the SF6 gas bottle via the threaded
compression fitting. Using a wrench, carefully tighten regulators to tanks (see
Figure 3-7). The specified gas is labeled on the body of each regulator.
Figure 3-6 Place O-Ring inside SF6 Regulator
Figure 3-7 Connecting the SF6 Regulator to the SF6 Gas Bottle
2 For C3F8: Connect the C3F8 Regulator to the C3F8 Gas Bottle and tighten the
nut closest to the valve using a wrench as shown in Figure 3-8. DO NOT adjust
the center nut.
Adjust nut closest to valve. DO NOT adjust center nut.
Figure 3-8 Connecting the C3F8 Regulator to the C3F8 Gas Bottle
3.8 8065753060 Rev. Y

3 Place the bottle/regulator assembly in the ISPAN** Gas Tank Holder on the rear
of the base unit (see Figure 3-9). Fasten the clip on the tank holder to secure the
bottle assembly.
Figure 3-9 Attaching Bottle/Regulator Assemblies to Rear of System
4 Attach appropriate quick-connect fitting from the tubing set on the rear of the
table top console to the regulator (see Figure 3-10). These connectors are color-
coded and configured to prevent misconnection.
Figure 3-10 Attaching the Quick-Connect Fitting
8065753060 Rev. Y 3.9

5 Ensure the Auto Gas Fill tubing set is connected to the AGF Tank Connector on
the rear panel of the table top console. Properly installed ISPAN** gas bottles
are shown in Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11 Installed ISPAN** Gas Bottles
6 Open the valve on the bottle by rotating the colored handle counterclockwise.
NOTE: The pressure regulators are pre-set at the factory and do not need
user adjustment.
Removal of ISPAN** Gas Bottle

1 Ensure the valve on the gas bottle is fully closed by rotating the colored handle
clockwise.
2 Disconnect the regulator from the AGF tubing set by disconnecting the quick
connect fitting at the tubing to regulator interface. NOTE: A small amount of
residual gas may exhaust from the line during disconnection.
3 Remove the gas tank from the ISPAN** Gas Tank Holder by loosening the
retainer clip.
4 Remove the gas tank from the regulator by loosening the threaded compression
fitting. Be sure to save the o-ring (SF6 only).
5 Dispose of the empty gas tank in accordance to the special disposal instructions
indicated on the gas tank.
3.10 8065753060 Rev. Y

CONNECTING A PUREPOINT LASER TO THE CONSTELLATION™ VISION SYSTEM IN
“TETHERED” MODE
If the system does not contain the optional laser module, an Alcon PurePoint™ Laser
can be connected (tethered) to the Constellation™ Vision System using an ethernet
cable. In this configuration, the Constellation™ system console has functional control
over the laser and the systems function as if the optional laser module is installed. To
connect the PurePoint™ Laser and the Constellation™ Vision System, perform the
following steps:
1. Ensure that both systems are OFF.
2. Connect the laser footswitch, Dr. filter, remote interlock, laser status, and laser
delivery devices to the PurePoint™ Laser console as described in the PurePoint
Operator’s manual.
3. Connect an ethernet cable between the “Tether Port” on the PurePoint Laser
rear panel and the “Tethered Laser” port on the Constellation™ Vision System
rear panel.
4. Turn the Constellation™ Vision System ON.
5. Turn the PurePoint™ Laser ON. The PurePoint Laser will turn on but the
screen will remain blank.
All changes to the laser setup and adjustments to the various laser parameters are
made through the Constellation™ system touch screen. For additional information,
refer to the Laser Setup Panel and the Laser Mode Surgery screen later in this section
of the manual.
NOTE: In tethered mode, all PurePoint™ Laser front panel controls except for
the emergency switch are disabled.
8065753060 Rev. Y 3.11

STANDARD DEFINITION VIDEO OVERLAY
If the system is configured with a standard definition video overlay, the screen
displayed is shown in Figure 3-12. This screen consists of four main areas:
• Header - The header is displayed along the top of the screen.

• Globals - Globals are displayed on the left side of the screen. Setpoints are
displayed in off-white text when globals are off. Actual values are displayed in
blue when globals are on.
• Surgical Values - Surgical values are diplayed on the right side of the screen and
are dependent on the current mode/submode. When treadle is NOT depressed,
setpoint values are displayed in off-white text. If the Start and End setpoint values
can be changed, both setpoint values are displayed. If the control type is fixed,
or only the End setpoint value can be changed, only the End setpoint value is
displayed. When treadle is depressed, actual values are displayed in blue.
• Indicators - There are four indicators displayed in the lower-center part of
the screen to indicate the status of Reflux, Laser Ready or Firing, and Video
Recording.
Figure 3-12 Standard Video Overlay Screen
Standard Definition Video Overlay Connections

Refer to Figure 3-13 for connecting a camera, video recorder, and monitor to a
Constellation™ Vision System configured for a Standard Definition Video Overlay.
3.12 8065753060 Rev. Y

Camera
Camera output to Constellation™

Vision System rear panel input
(S-Video or Composite Video)
Eye
This serial port will provide start/stop Constellation™ Vision System Rear Panel
control of a RS-232 based video recorder (system with Standard Definition Video Overlay)
NOTE: You must use either

VGA monitor direct connection Composite in/out or S-Video in/out.
Do not use use C-in/S-out, or S-in/C-out.
Video output (Composite Video or S-Video)

to HDD/DVD Recorder or Monitor input
VCR output
to Monitor input
Video Recorder
Monitor
Figure 3-13 Standard Definition Video Overlay Connection Diagram
8065753060 Rev. Y 3.13

HIGH DEFINITION VIDEO OVERLAY (HDVO)
The Constellation™ Vision System can be configured with an optional High
Definition Video Overlay card. The high definition video overlay screen shown in
Figure 3-14 consists of five main areas:
• Header - The header displayed along the top of the screen includes the Alcon
and Constellation™ Vision System logos. Both the header and footer are removed
after the system has gone through one complete display cycle and are displayed
again when the system enters a new mode or submode, or a user action causes any
of the data fields in the footer to be refreshed.
• Footer - The footer is displayed along the bottom of the screen. The content of the
center area of the footer alternates between displaying doctor, procedure, and step
name (when applicable).
• Globals - Global control values are displayed on the left side of the screen. Global
values are only displayed when the corresponding global function is turned on.
• Surgical Values - Surgical values are diplayed on the right side of the screen
and are dependent on the current mode/submode. Both the Start and End
setpoint values are displayed for progress bar controls. When the treadle is NOT
depressed, or for a momentary surgical function the corresponding footswitch
button is not pressed, 0 is displayed. When the treadle or footswitch button is
depressed, the actual values are displayed in a larger font size and the progress bar
is updated according to the current treadle position.
• Indicators:
- Footswitch - A Footswitch icon is displayed in the top left corner of the
screen. The current treadle position is displayed in the center of the icon.
When a footswitch switch is depressed, an arrow is displayed next to the
corresponding switch.
- Laser State - The current state of the Laser is indicated on the Laser
surgical control on right side of the screen in Laser modes. When the Laser
transitions between Standby, Ready, and Firing states, the displayed text on
the Laser control is updated and the background color is changed to match
the new state of the Laser.
• Status - The Status Area is located in the bottom left corner of the screen and
displays the status of the following items: Occlusion, Diathermy, Micro-Reflux,
Proportional Reflux, and Continuous Reflux.
High Definition Video Overlay Connections

Refer to Figure 3-15 for connecting a camera, video recorder, and monitor to a
Constellation™ Vision System configured for a High Definition Video Overlay.
The Video Recorder is a separate piece of equipment supplied by the customer. The
video recorder listed below is the only recorder approved for use with Constellation™
Vision System.
• Sony Medical Grade DVD Recorder (high definition) P/N HVO-1000HD
Sony Electronics Inc. - Medical Systems Division
1 Sony Drive, Park Ridge, NJ 07656-8003
3.14 8065753060 Rev. Y

Figure 3-14 High Definition Video Overlay Screen
SD Camera HD Camera
Eye Eye
Camera SD output Camera HD output

to rear panel input to rear panel input
(S-Video) (HDMI)
HDMI or VGA monitor direct

connection (HDMI shown)
Constellation™ Vision System Rear Panel
This serial port will provide start/stop HD Video output (HDMI)

control of a RS-232 based video recorder to HDD/DVD Recorder
or Monitor input
VCR output
to Monitor input
HD Video Recorder
HD Monitor
Figure 3-15 High Definition Video Overlay Connection Diagram
8065753060 Rev. Y 3.15

NEGENUITY™ 3D VISUALIZATION SYSTEM CONNECTIONS
Constellation™ systems with the High Definition Video Overlay can be connected to
the NEGENUITY™ 3D Visualization System as described below.
1. Connect the Constellation™ system to the NEGENUITY™ 3D Visualization
System with Cat 5 or Cat 6 ethernet cable as shown in Figure 3-16.
2. Boot up both systems.
3. On the Constellation™ system, press the Options button in the menu bar then
select System.
4. In the Settings tab, select Enabled for NEGENUITY™ 3D Visualization.
5. Press Restart when the popup is displayed. The system must be restarted for the
NEGENUITY™ configuration changes to take effect.
6. Press the Options button again, then select System.
7. In the Video Overlay tab, select Enabled for Video Overlay, then press Save.
NOTE: In the Options/System/VideoOverlay/NEGENUITY™ Margin, the margin
should remain at 0 for proper display of Video Overlay on the NEGENUITY™ system.
8. Press the NEGENUITY™ button in the menu bar to access the NEGENUITY™
menu and adjust the NEGENUITY™ settings. Refer to "Menu Bar:
NEGENUITY™ Button" on page 2.53 for details on adjusting the NEGENUITY™
settings.
Constellation™ Vision System Rear Panel
(system with High Definition Video Overlay) NEGENUITY™ 3D
Visualization System
a) Connect ethernet cable

to Constellation™ rear
panel.
NEGENUITY™ EPU
b) Route ethernet cable

through opening in
NEGENUITY™ panel.
c) Open the NEGENUITY™

side panel for access to the
EPU, and connect ethernet
cable to EPU ethernet port.
Figure 3-16 NEGENUITY™ 3D Visualization System to Constellation™ System Connection Diagram
3.16 8065753060 Rev. Y

CONSTELLATION™ PROCEDURE PACK
Constellation™ Procedure Packs are available in three (3) procedural pack

configurations: Constellation™ Vitrectomy Pack, Constellation™ Phaco Pack, and
Constellation™ Combined Procedure Pack. Each pack contains the sterile single-use
supplies necessary to perform one Posterior segment, Anterior segment, or Combined
Procedure respectively. The Combined Procedure covers both Anterior and Posterior
segment procedures.
WARNINGS!
1. If any item in the pack is received in a defective condition, Alcon is to be notified immediately.
Do not use any of the contents if the sterile package is damaged or the seal is broken in any
way. In these cases, please contact:
By Phone:
In USA (800) 757-9780
Ask for Medical Safety
International (817) 293-0450
Or contact local Alcon Representative
By Mail:
Alcon Research, Ltd
Attention: Medical Safety (AB2-6)
6201 South Freeway
Fort Worth, TX 76134-2099
USA
By E-mail: MedicalSafetyHouston@alconlabs.com
Each pack is identified by a lot number which provides traceability and should be given to
Medical Safety Department when discussing the pack.
2. Improper usage or assembly could result in a potentially hazardous condition for the patient.
Mismatch of consumable components and use of settings not specially adjusted for a
particular combination of consumable components may create a patient hazard.
3. Visually confirm that adequate infusion flow is occurring prior to attachment of the infusion
cannula to the eye.
4. Do not operate Vitrectomy probes in air. This could result in performance degradation and/or
potential hazard.
5. Replace Vitrectomy Probe if any of the following conditions are observed:
a. Excessive air bubbles are in the aspiration line.
b. Air bubbles are exiting the cutter port.
c. The cutter does not fully close or does not move when the probe is actuated.
d. The cutting port is not open when the probe is idle.
e. If a reduction of cutting capability or vacuum is observed during the surgical
procedure, stop immediately and replace the probe.
6. Minimize the light intensity and duration of exposure to the retina to reduce the risk of retinal
photic injury.
7. Use of incisions that are smaller than recommended during lens removal can lead to
mechanical and/or thermal damage to the eye tissue.
8065753060 Rev. Y 3.17


SECTION FOUR - CARE AND MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION
This section of the manual is designed to inform the operator of basic care and
maintenance of the instrument. If a problem occurs on the instrument, call the Alcon
Technical Services Department and give details of the breakdown circumstances and
effects. From these elements, a specialized technician will evaluate the problem and
determine the maintenance requirements.
For optimum performance, it is the user’s responsibility to schedule preventive

maintenance service on the system and its accessories at least two times each year.
Alcon’s Field Service Engineers are trained and equipped to provide the highest
quality of workmanship.
CAUTION
There are no operator replaceable parts, including the illuminator lamps. Contact Alcon
Technical Services for all servicing issues.
WARNING!
The Constellation™ Vision System battery can only be serviced by a factory-trained
Alcon service personnel. Access by untrained personnel can lead to injury.
CARE AND CLEANING

The following recommendations are for proper care of the Constellation™ Vision
System:
• Follow cleaning and maintenance schedules outlined in this section of the manual.
• Periodically check chassis appearance.
• Pay attention to correct operation of controls, connectors, and indicators.
• Damaged hardware must be replaced to ensure safe operation. Call Alcon
Technical Services for assistance.
WARNING!
A qualified technician must perform a visual inspection of the following components
every twelve months:
• Warning Labels (see section one of this manual)
• Power Cord
In case of a deficiency, do not use the system; call Alcon Technical Services.
A qualified technician must check ground continuity for leakage current every
twelve months to ensure they are within the applicable standards (for example:
EN60601-1/IEC601-1). Values must be recorded, and if they are above the applicable
standards, do not use the system; call Alcon Technical Services.
8065753060 Rev. Y 4.1

UPON COMPLETION OF THE PROCEDURE
CAUTION
Do not remove tubing from cassette or fluid in cassette reservoirs will leak down front
of machine.
1 Select End Case - Press End Case tab at top right corner of screen. The system
will confirm that you want to end the case. Select Yes or No.
2 Ensure infusion clamp is closed and turn Infusion off - Press “Infusion” icon
at top left corner of screen to turn infusion off. The system will confirm that
you want to turn off infusion. Select “Continue” and the cassette will start the
cleaning process.
3 Once cleaning is complete, remove irrigation bottle from hanger and set aside.
Remove spike from irrigation bottle.
4 Push ejection button above cassette to remove. Discard cassette with tubing per
facility guidlines.
5 Move the irrigation bottle holder to its storage position.
6 Press Standby switch located at top of rear panel (or Shutdown in Options
menu) to remove operating power from the system.
7 Turn the Main power switch OFF. It is located in the middle of the rear panel
above the power cord.
8 Remove air hose. Turn off C3F8 and SF6 valves.
9 Disconnect the power cable from the wall receptacle and wind the cable around
the cord wrap.
10 Place the footswitch and cable in storage compartment in front of base.
11 If required, the front panel, the console, the footswitch, and the remote control
may be wiped with non-corrosive germicidal solution, alcohol, or mild soap and
water.
CAUTIONS
• Do not clean console or accessories using solvents or abrasives.
• Avoid spilling BSS™ solution, or moisture of any kind, around the electrical
handpiece connectors.
12 Clean handpieces, probes, cables, forceps, etc., as instructed in DFU's supplied
with each accessory.
4.2 8065753060 Rev. Y

STERILIZATION INSTRUCTIONS
Please consult the accompanying Directions For Use (DFU) for cleaning and
sterilization instructions for Alcon approved reusable accessories. The DFU will
provide the recommended time and temperature guidelines for steam autoclave
cycles performed by Alcon, Inc. The sterility assurance level achieved with these
parameters must be validated by each surgical facility. Please refer to Association
for the Advancement of Medical Instrumentation (AAMI) Standards or your facility’s
standard procedures for the most current specifications.
Additionally, per the Sterilizer Equipment Manual, the sterilizer reservoir is to be

filled with distilled or deionized water.

NOTE: The reusable items will withstand steam autoclave cycles at 134° C
(273°F). Due to the variations found in steam autoclaves and the variable
bioburden on devices in clinical use, it is not possible for Alcon to provide
specific parameters to ensure an adequate sterility assurance level. Validation of
the individual autoclave, and verification of the sterility assurance level achieved
with a given steam sterilization cycle, must be performed by each surgical
facility. Please refer to current AAMI Standards or your facility’s standard
procedures for the most current specifications.
8065753060 Rev. Y 4.3

DISPOSAL OF XENON LAMPS
WARNING!
The bulb of the xenon lamp is under constant high pressure. There is a risk it may
burst with explosive force if knocked or damaged. Protective measures:
- Keep the lamp in its protective sleeve at all times during installation
- If you are handling the lamp without its protective sleeve, always wear safety
goggles, a face mask, gauntlets with wrist protectors and a breast protector.
In the USA contact the Alcon Technical Services Department for lamp disposal at
800/832-7827. Outside the USA contact your local Alcon affiliate.
REPLACEMENT OF REMOTE CONTROL BATTERIES
WARNING!
Changing batteries will cause the remote to default to channel A; therefore the
remote may need to be reset to the instrument's unique channel after installing
new batteries.
1 Loosen two captive screws on the rear cover with a standard slotted screwdriver
and remove cover.
2 Replace old batteries and replace cover (correct battery positions are identified
inside each battery slot). When closing the cover it is important that the rubber
buttons slide into the slots in other half of the remote without binding (see
Figure 4-1).
3 To check correct installation of batteries, press a backlight button on the side of
the remote and verify that the remote control buttons illuminate, then turn off
after a few seconds. If illuminated buttons don't turn off, rubber buttons are not
properly inserted into slots, so you must repeat the procedure.
4 Dispose of batteries following local governing ordinances and recycling plans.
Rubber Buttons(2)
must enter slots
without binding
Figure 4-1 Remote Control Battery Replacement
4.4 8065753060 Rev. Y

LASER MAINTENANCE
Calibration verification must be performed at least every twelve months to verify that
the laser output is within tolerance and calibration is not required. It is recommended
to call Alcon Technical Services before conducting the calibration verification
procedure.
CAUTION
Serious damage to the instrument may occur if these procedures are not performed by
qualified personnel.
Special Tools
• Computer with browser software (MicroSoft** Internet Explorer or equivalent);
TFTP file transfer program, or equivalent.
• Custom service ethernet cable (Alcon p/n 023-100)
• Power Meter, Thermopile type (Coherent FieldMaster w/ LM-10 head or
equivalent)
• Energy Meter (optional) for direct energy measurements (Ophir Nova meter, with
3A-P or PE25-BB head, or equivalent)
• Oscilloscope / Voltmeter (Fluke Scopemeter, or equivalent)
• Laser Safety Goggles (OD4 or above, at 532 nm wavelength)
• Optics cleaning kit, including spectroscopic grade methanol, lens paper, and air
blower
• LIO Voltage Load Box (Alcon dwg 995-5620-069)
• Timing Photocell (Alcon dwg 995-5320-038)
Service Computer Connection

A computer with an ethernet connection and browser software (MicroSoft** Internet
Explorer or equivalent) is required to calibrate the Constellation™ laser. The IP / URL
addresses and passwords used to establish communication are subject to change.
Contact Alcon Technical Services for information on the most current settings.
In some cases it may be necessary to temporarily change the TCP/IP settings

and/or proxy/firewall settings on the service computer, and this usually requires
administrative access rights.
The ethernet cable used for service computer connection is a custom cable. Contact
Alcon Technical Services for more information.
8065753060 Rev. Y 4.5

LASER POWER VERIFICATION
WARNING!
Laser light emitted from the fiber and laser head is powerful enough to cause
serious eye or skin damage. Maintenance should be performed only by
properly trained personnel, following established guidelines for laser safety.
The use of protective eye wear is mandatory.
NOTE: Calibrated Power / Exposure Time may be verified by two different test
methods:
1) Watts X Time method: Use an oscilloscope to measure exposure
time, and power meter to measure output power, and perform the
multiplication to enter value in the energy matrix on the data sheet.
2) Energy method: If an appropriate energy-meter is available, enter
“N/A” for the exposure time and power fields on the data sheet, and use
the energy-meter to measure and record values directly into the energy
matrix.
1 Exposure Time Verification

1.1 Connect a test fiber or endoprobe to the system and direct the distal output into
the photo cell connected to an ocilloscope.
1.2 Adjust the distance between the endoprobe and photo cell to obtain a beam size
of 2 mm or more on the photo cell. Use aiming beam to determine spot size on
the photo cell.
1.3 Set the exposure time to 0.01 s and treatment beam power to minimum, then
select READY mode.
1.4 Fire the laser and record the exposure time as determined from the oscilloscope.
1.5 Repeat steps 1.3 and 1.4 for each time value listed in Table 4-1.
2 Endoprobe Power Verification

2.1 Direct the endoprobe distal output beam into the wattmeter cell connected to a
wattmeter.
2.2 Set the exposure time to CW.
2.3 Set the treatment power to 0.10 W then press the Standby/Ready key.
2.4 Fire the laser and record the power reading as determined from the Wattmeter.
2.5 Repeat steps 2.3 and 2.4 for each value listed in the Endoprobe section of Table
4-1.
3 LIO Power Verification

3.1 Direct the LIO distal output beam into the wattmeter cell.
3.2 Set the exposure time to CW.
4.6 8065753060 Rev. Y

3.3 Set the treatment power to 0.10 W then press the Standby/Ready key.
3.4 Fire the laser and record the power reading as determined from the Wattmeter.
3.5 Repeat steps 3.3 and 3.4 for each value listed in the LIO section of Table 4-1.
4 Energy Matrix Completion

4.1 Complete the matrix in Table 4-1 by multiplying actual power by actual
exposure time and recording the result, as shown in the example below.
0.01 S Measured
exposure
Measured power 0.011 time entered
entered here
here
Product of
0.50 W 0.51 0.00561 power x time entered
here and compared to
(0.00425 - 0.00575) tolerance in brackets.
4.2 Ensure that all calculated results are within the values listed in each matrix cell.
The listed values are ±15% of the set energy.
• If all calculated energy values are within the specified limits, the system
calibration is OK.
• If any of the calculated energy results are not within the specified limits,
the terminal efficiencies will need to be adjusted. Perform the "Setting the
Calibration Factor (Terminal Efficiencies)" procedure following Table 4-1,
or call Alcon Technical Services.
5 Aiming Beam Calibration
5.1 With the unit off, connect the service ethernet cable between the Constellation™
console “Tethered Laser” connector on the rear panel, and service computer
then turn the system ON. Allow two minutes for the Laser Module to initialize.
5.2 Type the IP address into the address box, and hit return. When the page loads,
enter the password. Click the Output Calibration tab at the top of the screen.
5.3 Adjust aiming beam power output for Port 1 as high as possible but less than
950 μW.
5.4 Click “Set Max Value” for Aiming Beam on the computer.
5.5 Repeat for Port 2.
6 LIO Illumination Calibration

6.1 Connect the LIO Voltage Load Box to the front panel LIO Illumination port, and
connect the scopemeter/DVM across the resistor to read the voltage.
6.2 Adjust LIO Illumination knob to obtain 6.3V +/- 0.3V.
6.3 Click “Set Max Value” for LIO Illumination on the computer.
8065753060 Rev. Y 4.7

Table 4-1 Laser Energy Matrix for Calibration Verification
Exposure Time > 0.01 S

Power
>
0.10 W
ENDOPROBE
(0.0085 - 0.0115)
0.30 W
(0.0255 - 0.0345)
0.70 W
(0.0595 - 0.0805)
0.10 W
(0.0085 - 0.0115)
LIO
0.30 W
(0.0255 - 0.0345)
0.70 W
(0.0595 - 0.0805)
SETTING THE CALIBRATION FACTOR (TERMINAL EFFICIENCIES)

If unable to successfully complete the Energy Matrix table, use the following
procedure to adjust the Calibration Factor, and retest.
1 With the unit off, connect the service ethernet cable between the Constellation™
console “Tethered Laser” connector on the rear panel and service computer, then
turn system ON. Allow two minutes for the laser module to initialize.
2 Turn the computer ON and start the browser program. Type the IP address into
the address box, and press return. When the page loads, enter the password.
3 On the Internal Calibration screen, enter 100% for Calibration Factor for Endo
and LIO, and click Save for each. Restart the system when complete.
4 Direct the distal output beam of the selected device into the wattmeter cell. Set
power to 1.0 watt on the console, exposure time to CW, and select READY
mode.
5 Fire the laser and record the power reading as determined from the wattmeter.
Divide the reading, in milliwatts, by 10 to determine the new value for
Calibration Factor for that device.
Example: 895 milliwatts recorded power = 89.5% Calibration Factor
6 Using the service computer, return to the Internal Calibration screen, enter the
new value in the Calibration Factor window for the respective device, and click
the SAVE button. Restart the system when complete.
7 Repeat as needed to bring all values within compliance to complete the Energy
Matrix in Table 4-1, for each delivery device. If unable to successfully complete
the matrix, perform the Laser Calibration procedure on the next page.
4.8 8065753060 Rev. Y

LASER CALIBRATION
WARNING!
Laser light emitted from the fiber and laser head is powerful enough to cause
serious eye or skin damage. Maintenance should be performed only by properly
trained personnel, following established guidelines for laser safety. The use of
protective eye wear is mandatory.
1 With the unit off, connect the service ethernet cable between the Constellation™
console “Tethered Laser” connector on the rear panel and service computer, then
turn system ON. Allow two minutes for the laser module to initialize.
Note: IP / URL addresses and passwords are subject to change. Contact

your local Alcon representative for information on most current settings.
2 Type the IP address into the address box, and press return. When the page loads,
enter the password.
3 Photomonitors Calibration
Pmon 1 Low-Power Calibration -
3.1 Select Port 1 on the console.
3.2 Press “Output Calibration” tab on computer.
3.3 Set laser in CONTINUOUS mode on the console.
3.4 Set POWER to 100 mw on the console.
3.5 Select READY mode on the console.
3.6 Press “Start Pmon1 Calibration” on the computer.
3.7 Fire the laser and measure output power directly from Port 1.
3.8 Input 0.10 W into the Low Power Display field.
3.9 Input the power, as previously measured, into the Actual Low Power Field, and
press Save.
3.10 Repeat the Pmon 1 Low-Power Calibration as needed (two or three times) to
bring Displayed/Actual tracking as close as possible.
Pmon 1 High-Power Calibration -
3.11 Set laser in CONTINUOUS mode on the console.
3.12 Set POWER to 1 Watt on the console.
3.13 Select READY mode on the console.
3.14 Press “Start Pmon1 Calibration” on the computer.
3.15 Fire the laser and measure output power directly from Port 1.
3.16 Input 1.0 Watt into the High Power Display field.
8065753060 Rev. Y 4.9

3.17 Input the power, as previously measured, into the Actual High Power Field, and
press Save.
3.18 Repeat the Pmon 1 High-Power Calibration as needed (two or three times) to
bring Displayed/Actual tracking as close as possible.
3.19 Repeat steps 3.1 through 3.20 for Low/High Power Calibration for Pmon 2.
3.20 Repeat Laser Power Verification and Setting the Calibration Factor as required
to successfully complete the Energy Matrix for each delivery device, then
continue to step 4.
4 Exposure Time Calibration

4.1 Use the test setup described in Exposure Time Verification and set the output
power to 30 mW, exposure time to 10 mS, Single Shot mode.
4.2 Fire the laser and determine the actual values for exposure and interpulse times,
as measured on the oscilloscope. Enter and save the correction value, on the
Internal Calibration screen, to bring the actual time value as close as possible to
the displayed value.
4.3 Select Repeat mode and set the interpulse time to 30 mS.
4.4 Fire the laser and determine the actual value for interpulse time as measured on
the oscilloscope. Enter and save the correction value on the internal calibration
screen to bring the actual time value as close as possible to the displayed value.

SECTION FIVE - TROUBLESHOOTING
SYSTEM MESSAGES
The system communicates information to the user through the display of System
Messages which are displayed and described to the user as Faults, Errors, Advisories
or System Information. These terms are used to classify the level of response required
to ensure fail-safe operation of the system. The presentation of a System Message
alone does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred. System Messages typically
occur when the system detects a condition that is not met but is required for the
system to continue. System Messages and associated actions are intended functions
presented as a precursor to mitigate an unanticipated condition.
System Messages are priority based, with Fault Messages being the highest priority,
followed by Error Messages, Advisory Messages, and Information Messages. Each
type of message is color coded as follows:
• Fault:
- Recoverable Fault - Red stop sign with blue background
- Unrecoverable Fault - Red stop sign with black background
• Error - Yellow
• Advisory - Green
• Information - Blue
Each message also has a number associated with it that indicates the submodule
that prompted the message. The number range for each submodule in the system is
assigned as follows:
• Host Submodule - 1000 to 1999
• Supervisor Submodule - 2000 to 2999
• Fluidics Submodule - 3000 to 3999
• US/Diathermy Submodule - 4000 to 4999
• Table Top Illuminator Submodule - 5000 to 5999
• Pneumatics Submodule - 6000 to 6999
• Auxillary Illuminator Submodule - 7000 to 7999
• Laser Submodule - 8000 to 8999
When an Advisory or Information message is displayed that is related to a setup issue,

it may be helpful to access the Video or Wizard Help for assistance in solving the
issue. These help aids are available in any of the setup screens by pressing the Help
button.
The Event Log (shown in Figure 5-10) displays a list of the system messages that
have occurred on the system. It is recommended to view the Event Log for details of
a system message prior to calling your local Alcon representative for assistance.
For additional assistance in determining what action to take in the event a system
message is displayed, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide in Figure 5-11.
8065753060 Rev. Y 5.1

System Fault Messages
System Fault messages are displayed full screen and come in two types: Recoverable
and Unrecoverable as shown in Figure 5-1.
The system performs the following actions when a fault condition is detected:
• The applicable System Fault screen is shown with appropriate Fault Number and
one or more acknowledgment buttons.
• A fault tone is generated.
• All surgical functions are placed in a safe state.
• All operator input from the touch screen and footswitch is ignored (with the
exception of the [Start Recovery], [Quick Start], and [Shutdown] buttons).
The majority of all generated system faults are recoverable and the displayed Fault
message includes the following recovery instructions:
Recovery Instructions:
1) Stabilize eye. Leave infusion cannula in, remove other
instruments (i.e. vit probe/illuminator) and plug trocar
cannulas/sclerotomies.
2) Press the "Start Recovery" button.
3) Wait for recovery to complete and continue the case.
After the system recovers from a fault, the system state is restored to the state when
the fault occurred.
See "Recovery from an Unrecoverable Fault Screen or Unexpected Shut Down" on

page 5.7 for a step-by-step procedure for recovering from an Unrecoverable Fault
Screen.
Recoverable System Fault Display Screen Unrecoverable System Fault Display Screen
Figure 5-1 System Fault Display Screen Examples
5.2 8065753060 Rev. Y

System Error Messages
System Error messages are displayed in a popup window as shown in Figure 5-2.
These messages are displayed when the system detects a condition that is not met
and requires partial elements of the system to shutdown in a safe state. The partial
shutdown cannot be reversed until the next power cycle. The system performs the
following actions when an error is detected.
• The System Error dialog is shown with the appropriate error number, description,
and buttons. The upper right corner shows the name of the submodule generating
the error.
• An error tone is generated.
• All surgical functions associated with the error become unavailable. These
functions are also put into a safe state and are grayed out on the touch screen.
• The System Error dialog is removed when the operator presses either Recover
or Cancel. If the Cancel button is pressed, no attempt is made to recover and the
related surgical function is unavailable and its buttons grayed-out. In this case,
pressing a grayed-out (unavailable) surgical function, the System Error dialog is
displayed again with the same error number.
If the Recover button is pressed, an Error Recovery popup is displayed as shown in
Figure 5-2. This popup contains instructions on how to step through the recovery
process. Upon pressing the Start Recovery button, the recovery sequence is initiated
and an attempt is made to recover (reset and restart) the failed module. After recovery
is complete, the system displays a message indicating whether or not the recovery
was successful.
Pressing the Cancel button in the Error Recovery popup, removes the popup and
continues system operation without attempting to recover the failed module.
Figure 5-2 System Error Popup Window

8065753060 Rev. Y 5.3
System Advisory Messages

System Advisory messages are displayed in a popup window as shown in Figure 5-3.
Advisory messages are displayed when the system detects that a minor condition
is not being met, typically a situation that can be corrected by the user. When an
advisory condition is detected, the system performs the following actions:
• The System Advisory popup is shown with an appropriate advisory number,

description, and one or more acknowledgment buttons. The upper right corner
also shows the name of the submodule generating the advisory.
• An advisory tone is generated
The System Advisory popup is removed when the operator presses a button to
acknowledge the advisory or the condition causing the advisory no longer exists.
Certain advisory messages that only present a single user response button may also be
configured to automatically fade away.
Figure 5-3 System Advisory Popup Window
5.4 8065753060 Rev. Y

System Information Messages

Information messages are displayed in a popup window as shown in Figure 5-4.
Information messages are displayed to advise the user of the current system state
based upon current user interaction. When an information condition is detected the
following actions occur:
• A System Information dialog is displayed with appropriate information number,

description, and one or more acknowledgment buttons. The upper right corner
also shows the name of the submodule generating the informational discrepancy.
• An information tone is generated.
The System Information dialog is removed when the operator presses a button to
acknowledge the informational discrepancy or the condition causing the informational
discrepancy no longer exists. Certain informational messages that only present a
single user response button may also be configured to automatically fade away.
Figure 5-4 System Information Popup Window
8065753060 Rev. Y 5.5

Power Lost/Recovery
If the system experiences a loss of power, all surgical functions are stopped and the
"Power Lost" message shown in Figure 5-5 is displayed. If system power is not
restored within 1 minute, the system automatically powers down.
If power is restored within 1 minute, the system displays the "Power Recovered"
message and the system will be restored to the doctor and settings in use at the time
of power loss. Accumulated metrics and calibration state are not restored. In order to
resume a procedure after a loss of power, the handpieces/probes must be recalibrated/
reprimed.
Figure 5-5 Power Lost and Power Recovered Screens
5.6 8065753060 Rev. Y

Recovery from an Unrecoverable Fault Screen or Unexpected Shut Down

NOTE: This procedure is for an unrecoverable fault condition as indicated by
the screen shown below. Recoverable fault screens have a blue background and
include recovery instructions.
1 Stabilize eye. Leave infusion cannula in, remove other instruments (i.e. vit
probe/illuminator) and plug trocar cannulae/sclerotomies.
Turn system ON (press the Standby Switch) or if a Fault Screen is displayed,

select “Quick Start” (see Figure 5-6).
Standby
Switch
Quick Start Button
Figure 5-6 Standby Switch Location and Quick Start Button on Fault Screen
2 Immediately clamp smaller infusion cannula tubing with hemostats. (See Figure
5-7). Infusion pressure will be off when Setup Screen is displayed.
NOTE: The yellow stopcock is optional and may not be part of setup.
Green Luer Fitting Yellow Stopcock
Infusion tubing
with Snap Clamp
Infusion Cannula
Figure 5-7 Clamped Infusion Cannula Tubing (Stopcock optional)
8065753060 Rev. Y 5.7

NOTE: DO NOT select Doctor and Procedure until prime is complete.

IOP Control, if being used, will NOT be available. Machine will default to
pressurized infusion.
3 Disconnect green luer fitting from infusion tubing or stopcock.
4 Place green striped infusion tubing with snap clamp in a sterile cup as shown in
Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8 Infusion Tubing in Sterile Cup
5 Ensure snap clamp is open.

6 When Setup Screen is displayed, select the following
• PROBE “Skip Prime” (see Figure 5-9)
• Handpiece “None”
Infusion ON Button
Figure 5-9 Setup Screen Selections
5.8 8065753060 Rev. Y

7 Select “Start Prime”. NOTE: Priming will take about 1 minute to complete.
8 Press Infusion ON button and clear any bubbles.
9 Close the snap clamp.
10 Reconnect the green luer fitting.
11 Open snap clamp and remove hemostats from the smaller infusion tubing.
12 Select Doctor and Procedure, then continue the case.
8065753060 Rev. Y 5.9

Event Log
Figure 5-10 shows the Event Log where system messages are displayed that have
occurred during the previous seven days. The list can be filtered to display a specific
type of message by pressing the associated button on the right side of the screen.
To view the Event Log:

1. Press Options from the Menu bar.
2. Under the Info tab press "Event Log." The default view is displayed showing a list
of all faults, errors, advisories, and information messages. Pressing the associated
button will hide that type of message on the list. If the list goes beyond the
viewable area, a scroll bar is provided to move through the list.
3. For an expanded view of a specific message, select the message on the list, then
press View Details. A pop up appears with a description of the message and the
date and time it occurred.
4. Press Close to go back to the previous screen.
Figure 5-10 The Event Log
5.10 8065753060 Rev. Y

Problem No message is displayed, Contact Alcon Technical Support or your

Encountered but unable to setup and local Alcon representative.
operate as described in this
operator's manual and other
applicable labeling.
System displays an Access the Video Help for assistance. If

Information or Advisory unable to fix the problem, write down the
number and message. number and message exactly as it appears
These messages are on the screen, then contact Alcon Technical
displayed within a dialog Support or your local Alcon representative.
box. Information messages
have a blue border, while
Advisories are green.
System displays an Error Attempt Error recovery by pressing Recover

number and message. button on Error popup and following
These messages are directions on the Error Recovery popup
displayed within a dialog box
and have a yellow border. If recovery is unsuccessful, write down
the Error number and message exactly
as it appears on the screen, then contact
Alcon Technical Support or your local Alcon
representative. Some or all of the functions
could be disabled. Do not use unit unless
the case is already started and no back-up is
available.
System displays a Fault For Recoverable Faults, attempt Fault

number and message. recovery by following the directions on the
These messages are System Fault screen.
displayed full screen and
have a red border. For Unrecoverable Faults, follow directions
on page 5.7 for recovery from Unrecoverable
Fault Screen or Unexpected Shut Down.
If recovery is unsuccessful, write down

the Fault number and message exactly
as it appears on the screen, then contact
Alcon Technical Support or your local Alcon
representative. Discontinue use of unit until
the problem is resolved.
Figure 5-11 Troubleshooting Guide
8065753060 Rev. Y 5.11


SECTION SIX - ACCESSORIES AND PARTS

In this section of the Constellation™ Vision System Operator's Manual is a list of Alcon‑approved
accessories and replacement items. Use of non‑approved accessories is not permitted.
Please contact the Alcon Sales Department for in-service information prior to initial use of
handpieces, accessories, or packs. For additional information, please contact the Alcon Sales
Department.
Phone: Write:
(800) 862‑5266 or Alcon, Inc.
(817) 293‑0450 6201 South Freeway
Ask for Customer Service Fort Worth, TX. 76134‑2099
INTERNATIONAL: Please contact your local Alcon Sales Office.
The Constellation™ Vision System is designed around the Table Top and the accessories listed in
Table 6-1 can be added for expanded functionality. The Table Top can operate as a standalone unit,
and is also the primary user interface that operates and controls the add-on accessories. The laser
module, auxiliary illuminator, and the tray arm assembly attach to the Base therefore the Base must
be installed in order to use these accessories.
ACCESSORIES
Table 6-1 General Accessories
DESCRIPTION SUPPLIED BY CATALOG NUMBER/SUPPLIER
8065753041
Table Top† Alcon 8065751536 (China)
8065751817 (Japan)
Base Unit† Alcon 8065751451
Laser Module Kit† Alcon 8065751450
Auxiliary Illuminator† Alcon 8065751452
TRAY ARM ASSEMBLY† (all three items required):
• Tray Arm 8065751539
Alcon
• Ballast 8065751540
• Support Column 8065751541
Constellation™ Remote Alcon 8065750968
Constellation™ Footswitch Alcon 8065750977
Constellation™ Pneumatic Pressure Hose Alcon 8065751694
Monolith Dust Cover Alcon 8065751507
Table Dust Cover Alcon 8065751508
Laser Footswitch Alcon 562-1360-501
Laser Room Interlock Alcon 562-1362-501
PurePoint™ Laser System† Alcon 8065750597
PurePoint™ LIO (Keeler) Alcon 8065752987
PurePoint™ LIO (Heine**) Alcon 8065751050
PurePoint™ LIO RFID Alcon 562-1331-001
MMC Data Card Customer Any SD data card up to 2 GB
High Definition Video Overlay Alcon 8065753061
Video Recorder - High Definition Customer Sony HVO-1000HD
NEGENUITY™ 3D Visualization System (1.2B)† Alcon 8065753091
NEGENUITY™ 3D Visualization System (4K OLE)† Alcon 8065753090
† Alcon installation required
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.1

NOTE: Refer to the Directions For Use (DFU) included with each accessory kit/consumable
pack for detailed instructions on how to setup that accessory.
Table 6-2 General Consumables

DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER
Remote Control Transfer Pouch 20000TP
Constellation™ Standalone Drain Bags 8065751162
Constellation™ Tray Arm Cover 8065751163
Infusion Tubing Set with Auto Infusion Valve 8065750914
Auxiliary Aspiration Tubing 8065750917
Irrigation/Aspiration Tubing Set 8065750918
GFI Administration Tubing Set 8065750920
Table 6-3 Laser Accessories and Consumables

PurePoint™ Laser System 8065750597
Filter, Microscope Wild 8065-5002-01
Front Actuated Filter, Microscope 8065750448
PurePoint™ LIO (Heine**) 8065751050
PurePoint™ LIO (Keeler) 8065752987
Passive Dr. Filter 8065751051
25 GA Straight Laser Probe with RFID 8065750978
20 GA Curved Laser Probe - CHANG Aspirating with RFID 8065750979
20 GA Straight Laser Probe - CHANG Aspirating Soft Tip with RFID 8065750981
20 GA Curved Illuminated Laser Probe with RFID-SMA/STD ACMI 8065750982
20 GA Straight Illuminated Laser Probe with RFID-SMA/STD ACMI 8065750983
20 GA Curved Illuminated Laser Probe with RFID-SMA/RFID-ACMI 8065750985
20 GA Straight Illuminated Laser Probe with RFID-SMA/RFID-ACMI 8065750986
20 GA Curved Laser Probe with RFID 8065750989
23 GA Flexible Tip Laser Probe 8065751111
25 GA Flexible Tip Laser Probe 8065751112
23 GA Flexible Tip Laser Probe with RFID 8065751113
25 GA Flexible Tip Laser Probe with RFID 8065751114
23 GA Illuminated Flexible Curved Laser Probe 8065751588
25 GA Illuminated Flexible Curved Laser Probe 8065751589
23 GA Illuminated Flexible Curved Laser Probe with RFID-SMA/STD-ACMI 8065751590
25 GA Illuminated Flexible Curved Laser Probe with RFID-SMA/STD-ACMI 8065751591
23 GA Illuminated Flexible Curved Laser Probe with RFID-SMA/RFID-ACMI 8065751592
25 GA Illuminated Flexible Curved Laser Probe with RFID-SMA/RFID-ACMI 8065751593
27+™ Flexible Tip Laser Probe 8065751708
27+™ Flexible Tip Laser Probe w/ RFID 8065751709
Endo Laser Probe Curved 20G Alcon/Coherent 8065010203
Endo Laser Probe Straight 20G Alcon/Coh 8065010219
Aspirating Endo Laser Probe Curved 20G Alcon/Coh 8065010703
Aspirating Endo Laser Probe Straight 20G Alcon/Coh 8065010719
Probe Laser 25G 8065750133
6.2 8065753060 Rev. Y

Table 6-3 Laser Accessories and Consumables
23 GA Artic Illum Laser Probe W/RFID 8065752554
Table 6-4 Posterior Segment Accessories

UltraVit™ Probes / HyperVit™ Probes
Constellation™ 20 GA UltraVit™ Vitrectomy Probe, 5000 CPM 8065750948
Constellation™ 25+™ UltraVit™ Vitrectomy Probe, 5000 CPM 8065751438
Constellation™ 23 UltraVit™ Vitrectomy Probe, 7500 CPM 8065751571
Constellation™ 25+™ GA UltraVit™ Vitrectomy Probe, 7500 CPM 8065751570
27+™ UltraVit™ 7500 CPM Vit Probe 8065751700
23 GA UltraVit™ 10000 CPM Vit Probe 8065752407
25 UltraVit™ 10000 CPM Vit Probe 8065752408
25+™ UltraVit™ 10000 CPM Vit Probe 8065752409
27+™ GA UltraVit™ 10000 CPM Vit Probe 8065752411
23 GA UltraVit™ Bev 10000 CPM Vit Probe 8065752413
25 GA UltraVit™ Bev 10000 CPM Vit Probe 8065752414
25+™ GA UltraVit™ Bev 10000 CPM Vit Probe 8065752415
27+™ GA UltraVit™ Bev 10000 CPM Vit Probe 8065752417
23 GA HyperVit™ 20000 CPM Vit Probe 8065830020
25+™ HyperVit™ 20000 CPM Vit Probe 8065830022
27+™ HyperVit™ 20000 CPM Vit Probe 8065830023
23 GA HyperVit™ Bev 20000 CPM Vit Probe 8065830024
25+™ HyperVit™ Bev 20000 CPM Vit Probe 8065830026
27+™ HyperVit™ Bev 20000 CPM Vit Probe 8065830027
Endoilluminators with RFID
20 GA Straight Endoilluminator w/ RFID 8065750971
20 GA Shielded Bullet Endoilluminator w/ RFID 8065750973
20 GA Bullet Endoilluminator w/ RFID 8065750974
20 GA Sapphire Wide Angle Endoilluminator w/ RFID 8065750975
20 GA Ryan Pik Endoilluminator 8065751000
20 GA End Irrigating Endoilluminator 8065751001
20 GA Illuminated Mem Pik 8065751002
20 GA Shielded Bullet Endoilluminator w/ Pik 8065751003
25+™ Straight Endoilluminator w/RFID 8065751441
25+™ Sapphire Wide Angle Endoilluminator w/ RFID 8065751486
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.3

25 GA Chandelier 8065751577
27+™ Endoilluminator 8065751701
20 GA Sapphire Wide Angle Illum Probe 8065750425
Probe,Illumination,25 GA 8065750426
Endoilluminator,23 GA 8065750802
Probe,Endo,23 GA 8065750803
Endoilluminator,25 GA,En,Stalon 8065751165
23 GA Wide Ang W/Rfid 8065751183
25 GA Wide Ang Lt Prb 8065751186
Illuminated Pik,25 GA 8065751575
Illuminated Pik,23 GA 8065751578
Endoilluminators
Wide Angle Diffusion Light Pipe (Product of Grieshaber) 630.45
Infusion and Extrusion Accessories
20 GA Self Retaining Infusion Cannula, 4.0 mm 8065750580
23 GA Infusion Cannula 8065750841
25 GA Infusion Cannula 8065751459
20 GA Self-Retaining Infusion Cannula w/Tray 8065752148
23 GA Infusion Cannula w/Tray 8065752149
23 GA Sutured Infusion Cannula, 4mm w/Tray 8065752150
25 GA Infusion Cannula w/Tray 8065752151
27+™ Infusion Cannula w/Tray 8065752173
20 GA Soft Tip Extrusion Needle 8065149520
23 GA Soft Tip Extrusion Needle 8065149523
25 GA Soft Tip Needle 8065149525
23 GA Small Parts Kit 8065750842
23 GA Trocar Plug 8065750837
19/20 Gauge Scleral Plugs 8065807550
27+™ Valved Entry System 3 ea 8065751697
23GA 6 mm Cannula 1 ea 8065751444
23GA Enhanced Entry System 1 ea 8065751446
23GA Valved Entry System 1 ea 8065751585
27+™ Advanced DSP Backflush Blunt 337.87
27+™ Advanced DSP Backflush Soft Tip 337.88
Soft Tip Needle 23G Disposable 8065149523
23G 1.0mm Soft Tip,DSP 8065149527
20G Soft Tip,DSP 8065149528
27G Soft Tip,DSP 8065149529
25G 1.0mm Soft Tip,DSP 8065149530
6.4 8065753060 Rev. Y

Lens Fragmentation
Constellation™ Fragmentation Handpiece 8065750888
20 GA Fragmentation Pack 8065750958
Diathermy
Diathermy Probe DSP, 25Ga 339.21
27+™ Diathermy Probe, DSP 339.31
Auto Gas Fill
Auto Gas Fill Pack 8065751014
C3F8 450 Gram Cylinder 8065797104
SF6 450 Gram Cylinder 8065797004
C3F8 125 Gram Cylinder 8065797105
SF6 125 Gram Cylinder 8065797005
Pneumatic Handpiece and Accessories
Constellation™ Pneumatic Handpiece DSP 725.03
Posterior Standalone Accessories
Constellation™ Viscous Fluid Control (VFC) Pack 8065750957
Table 6-5 Anterior Segment Accessories

U/S Handpiece
Infiniti™ Ultrasound Handpiece 8065750121
Infiniti™ OZil™ Handpiece 8065750469
U/S Tips
30° KELMAN™, 0.9 mm 30KTS
30° Round, 0.9 mm 30RTS
30° Round, 1.1 mm Flared ABS 8065740806
30° Round, 0.9 mm MicroTip Flared ABS 8065740837
45° Round, 0.9 mm MicroTip Flared ABS 8065740838
30° KELMAN™, 0.9 mm MicroTip Flared ABS 8065740839
30° Round, 0.9 mm Tapered ABS 8065750261
30° KELMAN™, 0.9 mm Tapered ABS 8065750263
45° KELMAN™, 0.9 mm Tapered ABS 8065750264
30° KELMAN™, 0.9 mm Mini-Flared ABS 8065750852
45° KELMAN™, 0.9 mm Mini-Flared ABS 8065750853
30° OZil™ - 12, 0.9 mm Mini-Flared ABS 8065751176
45° OZil™ - 12, 0.9 mm Mini-Flared ABS 8065751177
30° Reverse OZil™ - 12, 0.9 mm Mini-Flared ABS 8065751178
30° Reverse OZil™ - 12, 1.1 mm Mini-Flared ABS 8065751179
30° Round, 0.9 mm ABS 8065790020
30° KELMAN™, 0.9 mm ABS 8065790022
45° KELMAN™, 0.9 mm ABS 8065790023
30° KELMAN™, 0.9mm Mini-Tip ABS 8065752065
45° KELMAN™, 0.9mm Mini-Tip ABS 8065752066
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.5

Irrigation Sleeves/Small Parts Kits
0.9 mm MICROSMOOTH™ High Infusion Sleeve Small Parts Kit 8065740842
1.1 mm MICROSMOOTH™ High Infusion Sleeve Small Parts Kit, 8065740872
0.9 mm MICROSMOOTH™ Small Parts Kit, 8065750159
1.1 mm MICROSMOOTH™ Small Parts Kit, 8065750160
0.9 mm MICROSMOOTH™ Ultra Sleeves Small Parts Kit 8065750517
1.1 mm MICROSMOOTH™ Ultra Sleeves Small Parts Kit 8065750518
1.1 mm MICROSMOOTH™ Micro Sleeves Small Parts Kit 8065750519
Intrepid™ Ultra Small Parts Kits 8065752900
Intrepid™ Nano Small Parts Kits 8065752901
BSS 15ml Bottle 0065079515
BSS 250ml Bottle glass 0065079525
BSS 30ml Bottle 0065079530
BSS 500ml Bottle glass 0065079550
BSS Plus 250ml Bottle kit glass 0065080025
BSS Plus 500ml Bottle kit glass 0065080050
6.6 8065753060 Rev. Y

BSS™ Irrigating Solution1
The following bottles and bags are provided under the following codes.
International customers should contact their local distributor for more specific
ordering information.
BSS™ Irrigating Solution bottle, 500 ml
0065079550 0007950010
0065079557 0007950012
0065079501 0007950025
0065079550M 0007950038
0065079558 0007950055
0065079560 0007950059
0065079562 0007950062
0065079523 0007950072
0065079518 0007950077
0065079519 0007950080
0065079520 0007950094
0065079534 0007950097
0065079536 0007950099
0065079537 0007950100
0065079574 0007950114
0065079570 0007950118
0065079572 0007950119
0065079577 0007950122
0065079579 0007950124
0065079587 0007950127
0065079594 0007950132
0065079589 0007950134
0065179501 0007950137
0065179507 0007950148
0065179513 0007950156
0065179546 0007950191
0065179554 0007950199
0065179559 0007950204
0065179563 0007950207
0065179597 0007950208
0065179571 0017950062
0065179527 0007950172
0065179528 0007950173
0065179530 0007950175
0065179531 0007950176
0065179532 0007950177
0065179533 0007950178
0065179534 0007950179
0065179536 0007950181
0065179538 0007950183
0065179539 0007950184
0065179540 0007950185
0065179541 0007950186
0065179542 0007950187
0065179543 0007950188
0065179547 0007950192
0065179550 0007950195
0065179553 0007950198
0065179555 0007950200
0065179557 0007950202
0065179558 0007950203
0065179560 0007950205
0065179561 0007950206
0065179570 0017950061
0065179573 0017950064
1 Part contacts the patient or fluid path during surgery (an applied part).
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.7

BSS PLUS™ Irrigating Solution2
The following bottles and bags are provided under the following codes.
International customers should contact their local distributor for more specific
ordering information.
BSS PLUS™ Irrigating Solution bottle, 500 ml
0065080011 0008000002
0065080050 0008000009
0065080054MAL 0008000013
0065080012 0008000014
0065080033 0008000015
0065080040 0008000016
0065080013 0008000017
0065080034 0008000023
0065080004 0008000025
0065080041 0008000029
0065080003 0008000038
0065080061 0008000039
0065080047 0008000048
0065080049 0008000049
0065080058 0008000052
0065080064 0008000055
0065080065 0008000056
0065080069 0008000057
0065080066 0008000060
0065080067 0008000062
0065080072 0008000063
0065080075 0008000066
0065080076 0008000068
0065080081 0008000073
0065080085 0008000077
0065080086 0008000078
0065080087 0008000079
0065080091 0008000083
0065082003 0008200003
0065082004 0008200004
0065082005 0008200005
0065082006 0008200006
0065082009 0008200009
0065082011 0008200011
0065080092 0008000084
0065080093 0008000085
0065080094 0008000086
0065080097 0008000089
0065080098 0008000090
0065080103 0008000095
0065080104 0008000096
0065080106 0008000098
0065080107 0008000099
0065080111 0008000103
0065080115 0008000107
0065082001 0008200001
0065082002 0008200002
0065082007 0008200007
2 Part contacts the patient or fluid path during surgery (an applied part).
6.8 8065753060 Rev. Y

I/A Accessories-Reusable
I/A Tip .033 OD, .3mm, Intrepid 8065751012
I/A Tip .033 OD, .3mm Bent, Intrepid 8065751013
I/A Tip 0.3 mm, Polymer, Straight 8065751510
I/A Tip 0.3 mm, Polymer, Angled 8065751511
I/A Tip 0.3 mm, Polymer, Curved 8065751512
Silicone I/A Tip, Bent 8065740969
Silicone I/A Tip, Straight 8065740970
ULTRAFLOW™ SP Straight Tip, 3 mm 8065817001
ULTRAFLOW™ Tip Protector, Standalone 8065817002
ULTRAFLOW™ SP 45° Bent Tip, .3 mm 8065817201
ULTRAFLOW™ SP 90° Bent Tip, .3mm 8065817301
ULTRAFLOW™ SP Irrigation Only Luer 8065817501
ULTRAFLOW™ SP Curved Tip, .3mm 8065817601
ULTRAFLOW™ I/A Box 8065-A001-01
Replacement O-ring ULTRA O-RNG RPL
Anterior Vitrectomy
Constellation™ 20 GA Anterior Vitrectomy Pack 8065751020
Anterior Vitrectomy Coaxial Irrigation Sleeve 8065750352
Bipolar Accessories-Single Use
Curved Jewelers/Iris Forceps 8065129101
Coaptation Forceps 8065129301
Straight Jewelers/Iris Forceps 8065129501
BVI1 Wet-Field Eraser Bipolar, 18G, Bevel Tip, Straight 221250
BVI1 Wet-Field Eraser Bipolar, 18G, Blunt Tip, Angled 45 degree 221251
BVI1 Wet-Field Eraser Bipolar, 20G, Blunt Tip, Straight 221260
BVI1 Wet-Field Eraser Bipolar, 20-23G, Tapered, Fine Tip, Straight 221265
1BVI contact information:
Beaver-Visitec International, Inc
411 Waverley Oaks Road, Waltham, MA 02452
TEL: (866) 906-8080 FAX: (866) 906-4304
Website: http://www.beaver-visitec.com
Pro Med Instruments Bipolar Accessories
Doro Reusable Bipolar Cable, 3.6m (12') 5011.241
Doro Reusable Bipolar Cable, 4.6m (15') 5011.242
AutoSert™ IOL INJECTOR
AutoSert™ INTREPID™ IOL Injector (with plunger and wrench) 8065751755
Plunger, IOL Injector 8065751776
Wrench, IOL Injector 8065751775
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.9

Constellation™ Consumables Pack
The Constellation™ Total Plus™ Pak product family consists of three (3) segment-
based procedure packs:
• Vitrectomy Packs (Posterior Segment)
• Phaco Packs (Anterior Segment)
• Combined Procedure Packs (Posterior and Anterior Segment).
The procedure packs are an assemblage of accessories (listed in the previous tables)
specifically for use with the Constellation™ Vision System. Contact your local Alcon
Representative for available Constellation™ Procedure Packs.
6.10 8065753060 Rev. Y

ALCON PUREPOINT™ LASER INDIRECT OPHTHALMOSCOPE (LIO) - HEINE**
Introduction
The PurePoint™ Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope (LIO) is an accessory for use
exclusively with the Alcon PurePoint™ Laser and the Constellation™ Vision System.
The PurePoint™ LIO is composed of a HEINE** diagnostic headset with integral
laser delivery adaptation and an illumination power supply. The treatment laser beam
and the aiming beam are both provided by the PurePoint™ Laser.
The PurePoint™ LIO is connected to the laser via a fiber optic cable for the treatment
and aiming beams, and by electrical cable for illumination. The illumination light is
adjustable from approximately 0 to 1000 lux using the illumination control knob on
the power supply.
A permanent Doctor Protection Filter protects the surgeon against incidental laser
beam reflections. The operator will have a colored† view through the Doctor
Protection Filter due to blocking of the 532 nm wavelength (green).
Figure 6-1 The PurePoint™ Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope (HEINE**)
† Newer Doctor Protection Filters will have less tint than older ones.
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.11

WARNINGS!
The head-worn Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope (LIO) is designed solely for examination
and treatment of the eye, particularly the retina.
Use only the illumination power supply provided on the Constellation™ Vision System
or the PurePoint™ Laser System (in tethered mode). It is specially designed for the
PurePoint™ LIO.
Insure that the selection on the Constellation™ Vision System display is LIO. It is the
responsibility of the operator to verify that the selection is correctly confirmed.
The operator will have a colored** (pink) view through the Doctor Protection Filter due to
blocking of the 532 nm wavelength (green).
The operator must be careful to avoid potential secondary reflections; therefore the room
used to treat the patient should be approved by a qualified laser safety officer.
All personnel in the treatment room must wear protective eyewear (OD 4 or above at 532
nm) when the system is in Standby, Ready, or Firing modes.
The laser delivery system is an integral part of the LIO and is not designed to be used
with an observer. Never use a teaching or observation system in conjunction with the LIO.
There is no eye protection provided for the observer.
Before each use of the headset, the operator must check the permanent Doctor Protection
Filter for scratches, breaks, or alterations. If there is any doubt, please call Alcon Technical
Services, and discontinue use of device.
There are potential hazards when inserting, steeply bending, or improperly handling of
the fiber optic cable. Not following the recommendations of the manufacturer may lead to
damage to the fiber or delivery system and/or harm to the patient or user.
Since the aiming beam passes down the same delivery system as the treatment beam,
it provides a good method of checking the integrity of the delivery system. If the aiming
beam spot is not present at the distal end of the delivery system, or its intensity is reduced
or it looks diffused, this is a possible indication of a damaged or not properly working
delivery system. If there is any doubt, contact Alcon Technical Services.
The use of flammable anesthetics or oxidizing gases such as nitrous oxide (N2O) and
oxygen should be avoided. Some materials - for example cotton wool when saturated with
oxygen - may be ignited by the high temperatures produced in normal use of the laser
equipment. The solvents of adhesives and flammable solutions used for cleaning and
disinfecting should be allowed to evaporate before the laser equipment is used. There is
also danger of ignition of endogenous gases.
A qualified technician must perform a visual inspection of the following components every
twelve months: warning labels, power cords, and fuses. In case of a deficiency, do not use
the system; call Alcon Technical Services.
A qualified technician must verify the LIO performance by performing an LIO calibration,
power output, and energy matrix test every twelve months to ensure the LIO is operating
within specifications. See Section Four of this operator's manual for instructions. If the
LIO is not operating within specifications, do not use the system; call Alcon Technical
Services.
A qualified technician must check and record ground continuity and both polarities for
leakage current every twelve months to ensure they are within the applicable standards
(for example: EN60601-1/lEC601-1). If they are above the applicable standards, or 50%
above initial measurement, do not use the system; call Alcon Technical Services.
6.12 8065753060 Rev. Y

PurePoint™ LIO Icons and Labels (HEINE**)
The labels and icons shown in Figure 6-2 are found on the PurePoint™ LIO and are
defined as indicated.
Use appropriate take-back

Caution: Consult accompanying
documents system (See Environmental
Considerations in this manual)
Follow Instructions for Use
(white figure with blue
background) No Continuous Use of LIO-AT;
10 Minutes ON/20 Minutes OFF.
Laser Radiation
Manufacture Date
Laser Aperture
532 nm Fragile - Handle Laser Fiber

With Care
542-1476-001REV
NOTE: The LIO may use either of the label examples shown above depending upon the date of manufacture.
Figure 6-2 PurePoint™ LIO Labeling (HEINE**)
Table 6-6 PurePoint™ LIO Technical Specifications (HEINE**)

CATEGORY SPECIFICATION
Width: 22.0 cm (8.7 inches)
Dimensions Length: 24.2 cm (9.5 inches)
Height: 20.0 cm (7.9 inches)
Headset Weight 571 g (1.26 lbs.)
Operating: Temperature: 15º C ≤ Tº ≤ 35º C
Relative Humidity: 10% to 90% with no condensation
Environmental Limitations
Storage: Temperature: -40º C ≤ Tº ≤ 70º C
PurePoint™ Laser with PurePoint™ LIO complies with CE MDD
requirements (CE 0123).
Not suitable for use in the presence of flammable anesthetic, oxygen, or
Miscellaneous
nitrous oxide.
System not protected against the ingress of water.
Class Ib, IEC 601-1
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.13

PurePoint™ LIO Safety Features
• Labels on the instrument warn the operator about laser dangers.
• The illuminator power knob controls the illumination power supply.
• A protective housing covers the laser source completely and the beam will only
exit through the LIO exit window.
• A permanent Doctor Protection Filter on the LIO headset protects the operator
from incidental reflections of the laser beam. Prior to using the laser system,
ensure that the filter is in good condition and that it has not been damaged,
displaced, or moved.
• An emergency switch located on the Constellation™ Vision System can be used
to shut off power to the laser. After using the emergency switch, pull it back to its
initial position to restore power and start the instrument.
General System Precautions

All personnel operating laser systems shall follow each of the general safety
precautions listed below.
• Never look into the laser beam.

• Restrict laser room access to people whose presence is required and who are
familiar with the laser precautions.
• The laser room should be clearly identified with proper warning signs.
• Never direct the laser beam towards an opening in the rooms light shielding walls
or window or door coverings..
• Never place any reflecting object in the path of the laser beam, or direct the laser
beam toward objects that may reflect light (such as surgical instruments).
• Turn the LIO illuminator power knob to OFF when not in use.
• Only authorized personnel thoroughly familiar with the recommendations
contained in this manual may operate the LIO. Any use of this laser system
beyond the design intentions may result in dangerous exposure to laser radiation.
• Familiarity and understanding the use and application of the Indirect
Ophthalmoscope is a prerequisite to using the LIO.
Using the Optics Overband

The pivoting overband allows the laser optics to be pushed up out of the operator's
field of view (see Figure 6-3). It is locked in the end position and can only be released
by pressing the Overband Adjustment Knob.
To pivot the overband, press the Overband Adjustment Knob with the right hand
and pivot the overband into the desired position (up for the “rest” position and down
for the “working” position). When the unit is properly adjusted, the overband can
be lowered into the same pre-selected working position. Once set, changing the
adjustments is required only if another examiner uses the instrument.
6.14 8065753060 Rev. Y

Figure 6-3 Adjusting the PurePoint™ LIO Overband (HEINE**)
Observation Optics Adjustment

1. Loosen the Observation Optics Adjustment Knob (see Figure 6-4) so that the
observation optics are free to move. The Observation Optics Adjustment Knob
can be unscrewed and reversed to the other side for left-handed operators.
Remove dust cover protecting delivery window.
2. Place the LIO on your head and adjust the circumference and height using the
Circumference and Height Adjustment Knobs so that the headband is firmly
positioned but comfortable.
3. For convenience, use clothing clip to attach the fiber/cable assembly to clothing.
4. Move the eyepieces as close as possible to your eyes and look at the light spot
at a distance of 30 cm. A small object (such as a pencil) held in front of the
eyepieces at 30 cm must be clearly focused.
5. Using the Delivery Mirror Control Knob, adjust the optics so that the light spot
is centered vertically in your field of view, then tighten the Observation Optics
Adjustment Knob.
6. If the light spot is not centered horizontally, adjust the headband left or right
accordingly.
7. Adjust the pupil distance setting by viewing the light spot alternately with the
left eye then the right eye, and sliding the eyepieces so that the spot is centered
within your field of view.
8. Remove the LIO and look at the scale on the eyepieces to insure that the pupil
distance is symmetrical. If not, center the headset and readjust the eyepieces.
Correct adjustment of the optics is particularly important when examining small
pupils.
Once set, changing the adjustments is required only if another examiner uses the
instrument.
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.15

Controls for Observation and Illumination
The Aperture Lever (see Figure 6-4) allows you to choose between two different-
sized illumination fields. The choice of illumination field size depends mainly on the
size of the patient’s pupil (the small illumination field is the recommended setting).
The positions of the Aperture Lever for large and small illumination fields are marked
with large and small black dots, respectively.
The Convergence Control Knob provides synchronized adjustment of both

examination and illumination beams to suit the patient's pupil size. Wide convergence
and parallax selection allows for maximum stereopsis with large pupils. Narrow
convergence and parallax selection allows stereoscopic examination for small pupils.
NOTE: Use the small pupil setting and narrowest convergence angle at the small
illumination field size setting; otherwise, clipping (shadow) of the illumination
field will occur. The Convergence Control Knob adjustment range is limited in
the LIO to 50% of the original HEINE** range to accommodate for the laser
beam delivery requirements.
The Delivery Mirror Control Knob can be rotated to move both the illumination beam
and the laser beam in the vertical plane.
CAUTION
Do not use the LIO with the illumination power supply set at maximum intensity for
more than 10 continuous minutes. The LIO must be allowed to cool down at least
20 minutes between uses. Use as little observation/illumination light as possible and
always switch power supply OFF using the illuminator power knob.
Height Adjustment Knob
Circumference
Adjustment Knob
(on backside of band)
Observation Optics
Adjustment Knob
Aperture Lever
Laser Vertical Laser Spot Size Lever

Adjustment Knob
Delivery Mirror
Control Knob
Convergence Control Knob
Figure 6-4 PurePoint™ LIO Controls and Adjustments (HEINE**)
6.16 8065753060 Rev. Y

Using the PurePoint™ LIO for Observation (HEINE**)
If the PurePoint™ LIO is used for illumination purposes only, the laser fiber still
needs to be connected to the PurePoint™ Laser.
1. Turn the illumination power on and adjust the light intensity using the
illuminator power knob.
Using the PurePoint™ LIO for Laser Treatment (HEINE**)

Using the system in this mode enables photocoagulation with the LIO.
WARNING!
All the personnel in the room during the operation must wear protective safety
eyewear with a minimum optical density OD 4 to filter 532nm radiation.
Before each use of the headset, the operator must examine the permanent
Doctor Protection Filter for scratches, breaks, or alterations by looking through
the ocular lens. If there is any doubt, discontinue use of device and please call
Alcon Technical Service.
NOTE: The PurePoint™ LIO is shipped with +2 diopter ocular lenses installed.
These may be changed with 0 (zero) diopter lenses.
1. If desired, change the ocular lenses by unscrewing the eyecup retainer in the
counterclockwise direction, change each lens, and replace the eyecup retainers.
Ensure that the new lenses are clean; i.e. no fingerprints or debris. Refer to the
PurePoint™ LIO maintenance section for cleaning instructions.
Figure 6-5 Eyecup Retainers and Ocular Lens on the PurePoint™ LIO
2. Turn the Constellation™ Vision System console power ON and make the
appropriate selections.
3. Select the appropriate illumination field size by toggling the illumination
aperture lever to the desired setting.
4. Adjust the illumination intensity using the LIO Intensity up/down buttons.
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.17

5. On the touchscreen, set the power below the nominal titration level. If the power
parameter is not set below the nominal titration level, the message “Set Power <
xxxx mW” will appear on the display.
6. If necessary press the Reset button to reset the shot counter to 0.
You can now adjust exposure time, aiming beam power, and treatment beam
power.
7. Select exposure time by pressing the Exposure Time Adjustment arrow buttons.
WARNING!
Verify that all personnel are wearing protective eyewear (OD 4 or above at 532 nm)
as soon as the system is in Standby/Ready mode, as well as during treatment.
NOTE: It is not recommended to use exposure times longer than two seconds
in CW (Continuous Wave) mode. Depending on the thermal load,
the system may shut down prior to the footswitch being released. A
message will appear on the display indicating this condition.
8. Select the aiming beam intensity by pressing the Aiming Beam up/down
buttons.
WARNING!
9. Set the desired treatment power by pressing the Power up/down buttons.
10. Select the laser spot size using the Laser Spot Size lever (see Figure 6-4). The
positions of the Laser Spot Size lever for large (approximately 1 mm) and small
(approximately 0.5 mm) laser spot sizes are marked with large and small black
dots on the right side of the box, respectively. The change of laser spot size from
large to small results in approximately four times increase in irradiance within
the treatment area, provided that laser power was not adjusted.
It is recommended to adjust laser power each time the Laser Spot Size Control
setting is changed. Start with low power and a short duration pulse, then
increase until the desired coagulation result is achieved.
WARNING!
If unsure which settings are required, select a low power, short duration, and large
laser spot size. Failure to properly adjust delivered energy may lead to patient injury.
6.18 8065753060 Rev. Y

11. Press the Ready selection under Laser Mode on the touchscreen. The system
will emit a voice confirmation that it has entered Ready mode.
NOTE: The footswitch must be released to proceed to Ready mode. If the

footswitch is depressed during power-up or while in Standby mode,
“Release footswitch” is displayed. Release footswitch and proceed.
12. Use the Laser Vertical Adjustment knob (see Figure 6-4) on the laser delivery
adaptation to aim the laser at the desired location within the illumination field.
13. Press the footswitch when ready to fire. The system will emit a four millisecond
beep each time the laser fires. If the footswitch is not pressed within 2 minutes
starting from entry into “Ready” mode, the system emits one beep and switches
to “Standby” mode.
NOTE: The aiming beam is off during treatment beam exposure, except in
repeat mode.
14. Repeat the firing procedure as often as necessary, making adjustments to power
output and duration as appropriate to complete the treatment session.
15. When the treatment is completed, release the footswitch and press the Standby
button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: The Emergency switch on the front panel must only be used in case of
emergency. After using the Emergency switch, return it to its initial
position to restore power and start the instrument.
PurePoint™ LIO MAINTENANCE (HEINE**)

This section contains information for basic care and maintenance of the LIO. If a
problem occurs on the instrument, call the Alcon Technical Services department and
give details of the breakdown circumstances and effects. From these elements, a
technician will evaluate the problem and determine the maintenance requirements.
Checking the LIO Appearance

The condition of the hardware components must be checked periodically to identify
any fault which might cause incorrect operation of the system.
• Operation of controls and indicators.
• State of the fibers and connecting cables.
• Check permanent Doctor Protection Filter for damage; i.e., scratches and cracks.
Any damaged hardware must be replaced. Contact your Alcon Technical Service
representative.
CAUTION
Care and cleaning operations must be performed with the instrument turned off and
power disconnected.
Headset Care and Maintenance

• The eyepieces and the glass in front of the binocular assembly can be cleaned
with a soft cloth (dipped in alcohol if necessary).
• The cushions for forehead and nape can be removed for wiping with soapy water.
• The rest of the instrument can be cleaned with a soft cloth dipped in alcohol.
Under no circumstances should cleaning fluids be used.
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.19
Storage
The PurePoint™ LIO should be stored either on the headset stand or in its storage
case when not in use to prevent inadvertent damage to the headset or cables.
Changing the Illumination Bulb

1. Ensure that the LIO is not connected to the Constellation™ Vision System.
2. Pull the cord socket away from the bulb connector (see Figure 6-6).
3. Unscrew and remove the bulb connector, then pull the bulb out of the socket.
WARNING!
The bulb and bulb connector may be hot, and can burn your fingers.
CAUTION
Do not touch the glass part of the new bulb directly with your fingers. Oil from fingers
can dramatically reduce bulb life.
4. Clean the new bulb with a soft, clean cloth.
5. Insert the new bulb so its locating pin engages in the housing slit.
6. Rest the bulb connector on the base of the bulb and firmly screw it in.
7. Re-connect the cord socket.
Figure 6-6 PurePoint™ LIO Bulb Replacement (HEINE**)

Calibration
Alcon recommends that the LIO be calibrated on an annual basis as an integral
part of the laser system with which it is used. Refer to Section Four for calibration
information.
PurePoint ™ LIO SPARE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES

Bulb 6V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P/N 542-1119-001
Laser Protective Eyewear. . . . . . . . . P/N 8065750107
28 D Lens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P/N 8065750158
20 D Lens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P/N 8065-6879-01
+2 D Ocular Lens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P/N 301-361
0 D Ocular Lens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P/N 301-362
Headset Stand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P/N 8065750891
6.20 8065753060 Rev. Y
ALCON PUREPOINT™ LASER INDIRECT OPHTHALMOSCOPE (LIO) - KEELER
Introduction
The PurePoint™ Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope (LIO) is an accessory for use
exclusively with the PurePoint™ Laser and the Constellation™ Vision System. The
PurePoint™ LIO is composed of a diagnostic headset with integral laser delivery
mechanism and LED illumination that is powered by a rechargeable lithium battery
pack. The treatment laser beam and the aiming beam are both provided by the
PurePoint™ Laser.
The PurePoint™ LIO is connected to the laser via a fiber optic cable for the treatment
and aiming beams. The angle of projection of the laser is adjustable by approximately
+/- 3 degrees. The illumination light is adjustable from approximately 1300 to 6500
lux using the illumination control knob on the headset.
A permanent Doctor Protection Filter protects the surgeon against incidental laser
beam reflections.
The PurePoint™ LIO has no applied parts (parts that may contact the patient).
Figure 6-7 The Alcon PurePoint™ Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope (Keeler)
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.21

WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
The head-worn Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope (LIO) is designed solely for examination
and treatment of the eye, particularly the retina.
The PurePoint™ LIO must be installed by an Alcon trained representative for power
output verification prior to the initial use. To schedule installation, contact the Alcon
Technical Services Department at 800-832-7827. Outside the USA, contact your local
Alcon Affiliate.
Insure that the selection on the Constellation™ Vision System display is LIO. It is the
responsibility of the operator to verify that the selection is correctly confirmed.
The operator must be careful to avoid potential secondary reflections; therefore, the
room used to treat the patient should be approved by a qualified laser safety officer.
All personnel in the treatment room must wear protective eye wear (OD 4 or above at 532
nm) when the system is in Standby, Ready, or Firing modes.
The laser delivery system is an integral part of the LIO and is not designed to be used
with an observer. Never use a teaching or observation system in conjunction with the
LIO. There is no eye protection provided for the observer.
Never treat a patient when the PurePoint™ Laser is connected to a service computer.
Before each use of the headset, the operator must check the permanent Doctor
Protection Filter for scratches, breaks, or alterations. If there is any doubt, please call
Alcon Technical Services, and discontinue use of device.
There are potential hazards when inserting, steeply bending, or improperly handling the
fiber optic cable. Not following the recommendations of the manufacturer may lead to
damage to the fiber or delivery system and/or harm to the patient or user.
Since the aiming beam passes down the same delivery system as the treatment beam,
it provides a good method of checking the integrity of the delivery system. If the aiming
beam spot is not present at the distal end of the delivery system, or its intensity is
reduced or it looks diffused, this a possible indication of a damaged or not properly
working delivery system. If there is any doubt, contact Alcon Technical Services.
The use of flammable anesthetics or oxidizing gases such as nitrous oxide (N2O) and
oxygen should be avoided. Some materials - for example cotton wool when saturated
with oxygen - may be ignited by the high temperatures produced in normal use of the
laser equipment. The solvents of adhesives and flammable solutions used for cleaning
and disinfecting should be allowed to evaporate before the laser equipment is used.
There is also danger of ignition of endogenous gases.
A qualified technician must verify LIO performance every twelve months to ensure the
LIO is operating within specifications. See Section Four of this operator’s manual for
instructions on verifying and calibrating the system. If the LIO is not operating within
specifications, do not use the system; call Alcon Technical Services.
This device must only be used by clinicians trained in the use of ophthalmic laser
devices.
This device is designed for safe use with a laser of 532 nm wavelength. Check the
markings on the top of the LIO (near the optical fiber connection) and ensure they match
those on the connected Laser.
Always look through the ophthalmoscope when the treatment beam is activated. Do not
look over the ophthalmoscope when the treatment beam is activated.
This product should not be immersed in fluids.
Do not disassemble or modify the battery. There are no serviceable parts inside.
6.22 8065753060 Rev. Y

WARNINGS and CAUTIONS (continued)
Do not dispose of battery in fire, puncture or short circuit, Dispose of batteries in line
with local environmental regulations.
Do not use a battery that is deformed, leaking, corroded or visually damaged. Handle
a damaged or leaking battery with care. If you come into contact with electrolyte,
wash exposed area with soap and water. If it contacts the eye, seek medical attention
immediately.
Use only Alcon supplied batteries, chargers and power supplies as per the accessories
listed.
When replacing lithium battery pack, turn illumination power off and attach new pack.
Remove batteries when device may not be used for prolonged periods.
Do not charge battery in any environment where the temperature may exceed 40˚C or fall
below 0˚C.
Ensure device is securely held in docking station to minimize risk of injury or damage to
equipment.
At product end of life dispose of in accordance with local environmental guidelines

(WEEE).
The LIO is intended to be used with the LIO LED only. Any other light source used with
the LIO will not function.
The LIO is intended to be used with the LIO docking station only.
No other equipment apart from the LIO and spare battery should be mounted onto the
charging dock when fixed to the wall to prevent the likelihood of the charging dock from
falling.
Switch off the electrical supply and disconnect from the mains electrical supply before
cleaning and inspection.
Do not fit mains power adapter into a damaged mains outlet socket.
Route charger power cords and fiber optic cable safely to eliminate risk of tripping or
damage to equipment.
LED’s can reach high temperatures in use – allow to cool before handling.
Do not exceed maximum recommended exposure time.
Maintenance, care, and cleaning must be performed with the instrument turned off and
power disconnected.
To minimize hazardous light exposure, operate light source at lowest intensity setting
consistent with adequate visibility of the surgical area.
The light emitted from this instrument is potentially hazardous. The longer the duration
of exposure, the greater the risk of ocular damage. Exposure to light from this instrument
when operated at maximum intensity will exceed the safety guideline after 60 minutes
using a ancillary 20D lens.
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.23

Safety Considerations – Illumination
It is well established that exposure of the eye to intense light sources for extended
periods of time poses a risk of retinal photic injury. Many ophthalmic instruments
illuminate the eye with intense light. The decision about the intensity of the light
level to use in any procedure must be made on a case to case basis. In each case, the
clinician must make a risk benefit judgement about the intensity of light to be used.
Use of insufficient intensity may result in inadequate visualization and adverse effects
more serious than retinal photic damage. Further, despite all efforts taken to minimize
the risk of retinal damage, damage may still occur. Retinal photic injury is a possible
complication of the need to use bright light to clearly visualize ocular structure during
delicate ophthalmic surgical procedure.
While no visible retinal lesions have been identified for ophthalmic instruments, it
is recommended that illumination levels be set to the minimum level necessary to
perform the function. Young children and persons with diseased eyes may be at a
higher risk. The risk may also be increased if the person being examined has had
any exposure with the same instrument or any other ophthalmic instrument using an
intense visible light source during the previous 24 hours. This will apply particularly
if the eye has been exposed to retinal photography.
CAUTION
The light emitted from this instrument is potentially hazardous. The longer the
duration of exposure, the greater the risk of ocular damage. Exposure to light from this
instrument when operated at maximum intensity will exceed the safety guideline after
60 minutes using a ancillary 20D lens.
Figure 6-8 Relative Spectral Output of LED Light Source
6.24 8065753060 Rev. Y

PurePoint™ LIO (Keeler) Icons and Labels
The labels and icons shown in Figure 6-9 are found on the PurePoint™ LIO and are
defined as indicated.
Caution: Consult accompanying documents (black figure on yellow

background)
Follow Instructions For Use (white figure on blue background)
Laser Aperture (black figure on yellow background)
Date of Manufacture
Manufacturer
No continuous use of LIO; 10 minutes ON / 20 minutes OFF
Use appropriate take-back system
Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope

USA: THIS DEVICE CONFORMS TO
ALL APPLICABLE STANDARDS OF
THE RADIATION CONTROL FOR
8065752987 HEALTH AND SAFETY ACT OF 1968
GTIN 00380657529872
562-1579-001 REV. B
ALCON LABORATORIES, INC.

6 2 0 1 S O U T H F R E E W AY
FORT WORTH, TX 76134-2099 USA
a Novartis company
* a trademark of Novartis
562-1580-001 REV. A 562-1578-001 REV. B
* a trademark of Novartis
Figure 6-9 PurePoint™ LIO Labeling (Keeler)
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.25

Table 6-7 PurePoint™ LIO Technical Specifications (Keeler)
CATEGORY SPECIFICATION
Width: 25.0 cm (9.8 inches)
Dimensions Length: 34.0 cm (13.4 inches)
Height: 20.0 cm (7.9 inches)
Net Weight
(including fiber optical <800 g (1.76 lbs)
cable)
Input mains data: 100-240V; 50/60Hz; 700mA
Power supply rating: 12V; 2.5amps (PSU only)
Electrical Characteristics Operation: Continuous
Classification: Class II equipment (charging dock & PSU only)
IP rating: IPX0
Transport: Temperature: -40º C≤ Tº ≤ 70º C
Storage: Temperature: -10º C≤ Tº ≤ 55º C

Environmental Limitations
Operating: Temperature: 10º C≤ Tº ≤ 35º C

Illumination Intensity: 6500 Lux +/-500
Illumination patch sizes: 18/34/43mm +/-5%
(Measurements taken at 280mm from the center of the dichroic mirror.)
Ophthalmoscope
Interpupillary adjustment: 48 to 76mm
Ophthalmoscope filters: Red free, Blue and Diffused
PurePoint™ Laser complies with CE MDD requirements (CE 0123).
Not suitable for use in the presence of flammable anesthetic, oxygen,

Miscellaneous
or nitrous oxide.
System not protected against the ingress of water.

6.26 8065753060 Rev. Y

PurePoint™ LIO (Keeler) Safety Features
• Labels on the instrument warn the operator about laser dangers.
• A protective housing covers the laser source completely and the beam will only
exit through the LIO exit window.
• A permanent Doctor Protection Filter on the LIO headset protects the operator
from incidental reflections of the laser beam. Prior to using the laser system,
ensure that the filter is in good condition and that it has not been damaged,
displaced, or moved.
• An emergency switch located on the Constellation™ Vision System console can
be used to shut off power to the laser. After using the emergency switch, pull it
back to its initial position to restore power and start the instrument.
General System Precautions

All personnel operating laser systems shall follow each of the general safety
precautions listed below.
• Never look into the laser beam.

• Restrict laser room access to people whose presence is required and who are
familiar with the laser precautions.
• The laser room should be clearly identified with proper warning signs.
• Never direct the laser beam towards an opening.
• Never place any reflecting object in the path of the laser beam, or direct the laser
beam toward objects that may reflect light (such as surgical instruments).
• Turn the laser OFF when not in use.
• Turn the LIO illuminator power knob to OFF when not in use.
• Only authorized personnel thoroughly familiar with the recommendations
contained in this manual may operate the LIO. Any use of this laser system
beyond the design intentions may result in dangerous exposure to laser radiation.
• Familiarity and understanding the use and application of the Indirect
Ophthalmoscope is a prerequisite to using the LIO.
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.27

LIO Controls and Components (Keeler)

Headband Height Adjustment Knob
Headband Circumference
Adjustment Knob
Brow Band
Tension Knob (2)
Illumination On/Off and

Intensity Adjustment Knob
Illumination Vertical Adjustment Knob

Laser Vertical Adjustment Knob
Observation Optics
Adjustment Knob Aperture
Lever
Filter
Selection
Lever
Illumination LED
Under some single fault conditions the
temperature of the surface shown below
could get hot and there is a possible risk of
a burn if touched.
Laser View Top View
Figure 6-10 PurePoint™ LIO (Keeler) Controls and Adjustments
6.28 8065753060 Rev. Y

Aperture Lever
The Aperture Lever shown in Figure 6-11 allows you to choose between three
different-sized illumination fields. The choice of illumination field size depends
mainly on the size of the patient’s pupil. When an aperture is selected, the
illumination and viewing mirrors automatically adjust for maximum stereopsis.
Aperture Lever
Figure 6-11 The Aperture Lever
• Large - This large, round, uniform patch is suitable for routine examinations
through fully dilated pupils. In this position the mirror remains in the
forward position and the optics are diverged.
• Intermediate - The intermediate patch is designed to reduce reflections
when entering a partially or poorly dilated pupil (3 mm). It is also ideal for
close inspection of particular fundal areas. The mirror and optics stay in the
mid position.
• Small - This light patch is ideal for small, undilated pupils. The mirror
moves back and the optics automatically converge.
Filter Selection Lever

The Filter Selection Lever shown in Figure 6-12 has the following selections:
Blue Circle - Cobalt blue filter for fluorescein angioscopy.
White Circle - Clear light; select the clear with no filter when inspecting a
specific pathology and a brighter, whiter light is desired.
Green Circle - Red free filter; this filter reduces the red light so blood will appear
black, silhouetted against a dark background.
Diffuser - This unique extra wide beam of diffused light permits a more relaxed
technique during more challenging fundus examinations. When using this filter,
the alignment between the headset, the condensing lens, and the pupil, in order to
achieve a full lens image, is not as critical as with the conventional beam.
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.29

Filter Selection Lever
Figure 6-12 The Filter Selection Lever
Illumination On/Off and Intensity Adjustment Knob

Rotating this knob (see Figure 6-10) in the clockwise direction turns the illumination
LEDs on and increases the intensity.
Illumination Vertical Adjustment Knob
The illumination patch can be adjusted up or down using the Illumination Vertical
Adjustment Knob. The illumination control has a larger adjustment range than
the laser control so it is recommended to adjust the laser first, then overlay the
illumination.
Laser Vertical Adjustment Knob
The laser angle of projection can be adjusted up or down using the Laser Vertical
Adjustment Knob.
Observation Optics Adjustment Knob
Loosening this knob allows the Observation Optics to move freely while the user is
positioning the LIO on their head.
Headband Height and Circumference Adjustment Knobs
Turning these knobs adjusts the height and circumference of the headband to ensure
that the LIO is firmly and comfortably fit to the user's head.
6.30 8065753060 Rev. Y

Battery and Charging Station
The PurePoint™ LIO uses a rechargeable battery, attached to the rear of the
headband, to power the illumination LED (see Figure 6-13). The Battery Status LED
flashes when the battery requires charging. At that time the battery can be replaced
with the spare battery from the charging station shown in Figure 6-14.
Status LED Battery
Figure 6-13 Rechargeable Battery
Battery Charging Station

The Battery Charging Station is used to charge both the spare battery and the battery
currently mounted on the LIO headband. The battery pack can be used at any time
during the charging cycle and will automatically resume charging when the battery
is placed back in the charging station. The direction arrow on the charging station
indicates which battery is being charged. The LED's on the charging station indicate
the status of the charges as follows:
• No indicator - Battery is fully charged.
• Flashing indicator - Top up charge.
• Solid indicator - Rapid charge.
Spare Battery
Charging Dock
Charging Spare
Battery LED
Charging Battery
on LIO Headband
LIO Headband
Charging Dock
Figure 6-14 Battery Charging Station
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.31

Mounting the Battery Charging Station
1. Use the provided template to mark the position of the charging station and drill
holes.
2. Using Figure 6-15 as reference, install the mounting screws and mount the
charging station as shown.
Figure 6-15 Reference Diagram for Mounting the Battery Charging Station
3. Replace the power supply blanking plate with the appropriate mains plug
adaptor (if required). Plug the power supply into an appropriate mains plug and
connect it to the charging station.
Charging Batteries on the Charging Station

1. Ensure the charging station is plugged in and the LIO illumination is turned off.
2. Place the spare battery and/or the LIO headset into the charger as shown in
Figure 6-16.
The battery attached to the LIO headset will take approximately 2 hours to fully
charge and will last approximately 2 hours on the full power setting. The spare
battery will take approximately 4 hours to charge.
6.32 8065753060 Rev. Y

Spare Battery Dock
Power
Supply
Connector
Figure 6-16 Placing the Headset in the Charger
Removing and Replacing the Battery on the LIO Headset

3. Release the battery by pressing the release button and lifting the battery pack
from the LIO headset as shown in Figure 6-17.
4. Install battery onto the LIO headset by placing the rear of the battery in place
and pressing the front of the battery until it snaps into place on the headset.
NOTE: Removing and replacing the spare battery on the charging station
is accomplished in the same manner.
Release Button
Removing the battery
Replacing the battery
Figure 6-17 Removing and Replacing the Battery on the LIO Headset
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.33

USING THE PUREPOINT™ LIO (Keeler)
Adjusting the Headband
1. Loosen the Observation Optics Adjustment Knob (see Figure 6-10) so that the
Binocular Block is allowed to move. The Observation Optics Adjustment Knob
can be unscrewed and reversed to the other side for left-handed operators.
2. Place the LIO on your head and adjust the circumference and height using the
Circumference and Height Adjustment Knobs so that the headband is firmly
positioned but fits comfortably on the head (see Figure 6-18).
Height Adjustment Knob -

rotate so band over top of
head fits firmly.
Brow Band Adjustment Knob -

rotate to adjust height of metal
brow bar/optics block.
Circumference Adjustment Knob -

rotate to fit firmly around head.
Figure 6-18 Adjusting The PurePoint™ LIO Headband (Keeler)
3. For convenience, use clothing clip to attach the fiber/cable assembly to clothing.
4. Ophthalmoscope Angle Alignment
4.1 For vertical alignment of the eyepieces and binocular block, adjust the
height of the Metal Outer Brow Bar if necessary by using the Brow Band
Tension Knobs located on each side of the headset.
4.2 Position the Binocular Block as close to the eyes or spectacles as possible
for maximum field of view and tighten the Observation Optics Adjustment
Knob.
6.34 8065753060 Rev. Y

5. Interpupillary Distance Setting Control
5.1 Set the Aperture to the large light patch setting.
5.2 Place an object, perhaps a pen or your thumb, approximately 40 cm from
the face and center it horizontally in the light patch.
5.3 Close one eye. Using the thumb and forefinger of the opposite hand, slide
the P.D. Control of the open eye (located directly under each eyepiece) so
that the object moves into the center of the field, keeping the object in the
center of the light patch.
5.4 Repeat for the other eye.
5.5 Ensure the object is clearly focused.
6. Using the Illumination Adjustment Knob, adjust the optics so that the light spot
is centered vertically in your field of view, then tighten the Observation Optics
Adjustment Knob.
7. If the light spot is not centered horizontally, adjust the headband left or right
accordingly.
8. Adjust the pupil distance setting by viewing the light spot alternately with the
left eye then the right eye, and sliding the eyepieces so that the spot is centered
within your field of view.
9. Remove the LIO and look at the scale on the eyepieces to insure that the pupil
distance is symmetrical. If not, center the headset and readjust the eyepieces.
Correct adjustment of the optics is particularly important when examining small
pupils.
10. Once set, changing the adjustments is required only if another examiner uses the
instrument.
WARNING!
Using the PurePoint™ LIO (Keeler) for Observation

11. Turn the illumination power on and adjust the light intensity using the
Illuminator Power knob.
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.35

Using the PurePoint™ LIO (Keeler) for Laser Treatment
Using the system in this mode enables photocoagulation with the LIO.
WARNING!
All the personnel in the room during the operation must wear protective safety
eye wear with a minimum optical density OD 4 to filter 532 nm radiation.
Before each use of the headset, the operator must examine the permanent Doctor
Protection Filter for scratches, breaks, or alterations by looking through the
ocular lens. If there is any doubt, discontinue use of device and please call Alcon
Technical Service.
NOTE: The PurePoint™ LIO is shipped with +2 diopter ocular lenses installed. These
may be changed with 0 (zero) diopter lenses.
12. If desired, change the ocular lenses by unscrewing the eyecup retainers in the
counterclockwise direction, change each lens, and replace the eyecup retainers.
Ensure that the new lenses are clean; i.e., no fingerprints or debris. Refer to the
PurePoint™ LIO maintenance section for cleaning instructions.
13. Turn the Constellation™ Vision System console power ON and make the
appropriate selections as specified in this manual.
14. Turn LIO Illumination ON.
15. Select the appropriate illumination field size using the Aperture lever.
16. Adjust the illumination intensity using the Illumination Intensity Adjustment
knob.
17. On the touchscreen, set the power below the nominal titration level.
18. If necessary, press the Reset button to reset the shot counter to 0.
19. Select exposure time by pressing the Exposure Time Adjustment arrow buttons.
WARNING!
Verify that all personnel are wearing protective eye wear (OD 4 or above at
532 nm) as soon as the system is in Standby/Ready mode, as well as during
treatment.
NOTE: It is not recommended to use exposure times longer than two seconds in
CW (Continuous Wave) mode. Depending on the thermal load, the system may
shut down prior to the footswitch being released. A message will appear on the
display indicating this condition.
20. Select the aiming beam intensity by pressing the Aiming Beam up/down
buttons.
WARNING!
6.36 8065753060 Rev. Y

21. Set the desired treatment power by pressing the Power up/down buttons.
22. Press the Ready selection under Laser Mode on the touchscreen. The system
will emit a voice confirmation that it has entered Ready mode.
NOTE: The footswitch must be released to proceed to Ready mode. If

the footswitch is depressed during power-up or while in Standby mode,
“Release footswitch” is displayed. Release footswitch and proceed.
23. Use the Laser Vertical Adjustment knob on the laser delivery adaptation to aim
the laser at the desired location within the illumination field.
24. Press the footswitch when ready to fire. The system will emit a 4 millisecond
beep each time the laser fires. If the footswitch is not pressed within 2 minutes
starting from entry into “Ready” mode, the system emits one beep and switches
to “Standby” mode.
NOTE: The aiming beam is off during treatment beam exposure, except in
repeat mode.
25. Repeat the firing procedure as often as necessary, making adjustments to power
output and duration as appropriate to complete the treatment session.
26. When the treatment is complete, release the footswitch and press the Standby
button on the touchscreen.
Turn Off Sequence
27. Turn the key to the OFF (O) position and, for safety reasons, remove the key.
NOTE: The Emergency switch on the front panel must only be used in case
of emergency. After using the Emergency switch, pull it back to its initial
position to restore power and start the instrument.
28. Place the Illumination On/Off switch to the OFF (O) position.
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.37

PUREPOINT™ LIO (KEELER) MAINTENANCE
This section contains information for basic care and maintenance of the instrument.
If a problem occurs on the instrument, call the Alcon Technical Services department
and give details of the breakdown circumstances and effects. From these elements, a
technician will evaluate the problem and determine the maintenance requirements.
Checking the LIO Appearance
The condition of the hardware components must be checked periodically to identify
any fault which might cause incorrect operation of the system.
• Overall appearance.
• Operation of controls and indicators.
• State of the fibers and RFID/SMA connector.
• Check permanent Doctor Protection Filter for damage; i.e., scratches and cracks
by looking through the ocular lens.
• Check mirror at front of LIO for damage.
Any damaged hardware must be replaced. Contact your Alcon Technical Service
representative.
WARNING!
Care and cleaning operations must be performed with the instrument turned off
and power disconnected.
Headset Care and Maintenance

• Wipe the external surface with a clean, absorbent, non-shedding cloth dampened
with a water/detergent solution (2% detergent by volume) or water/isopropyl
alcohol solution (70% IPA by volume). Avoid optical surfaces.
• Ensure that excess solution does not enter the instrument. Use caution to ensure
cloth is not saturated with solution.
Storage
The PurePoint™ LIO should be stored either on the Charging Station or in a storage
case when not in use to prevent inadvertent damage to the headset or fiber optic cable.
6.38 8065753060 Rev. Y

Changing The Illumination LED
1. Ensure that the Illumination On/Off Switch is in the OFF (O) position.
WARNING!
The LED may get hot during prolonged use.
2. Allow the LED to cool.

3. Grasp the LED on each side and pull out to remove from the illumination block
(see Figure 6-19).
Illumination LED
Pull LED out to remove
Figure 6-19 LED Removal

4. Insert the new LED ensuring that the alignment key is in the proper orientation
(facing upward) so that the LED easily slides into the opening then snaps into
place. NOTE: Only LEDs provided by Alcon should be used in the LIO.
5. Ensure that the red switch on the Illumination On/Off and Intensity knob
assembly is in the forward position as shown in Figure 6-20.
8065753060 Rev. Y 6.39

Red switch in
forward position
Figure 6-20 Illuminator Rheostat (red) Switch Position
POWER VERIFICATION
Alcon recommends that a power verification be performed on an annual basis as an integral
part of the laser system with which it is used. Refer to Section Four of this manual for system
calibration information.
PUREPOINT™ LIO (KEELER) ACCESSORIES

• 8065753009 Illumination LED
• 8065753010 Battery Pack
• 8065753011 Battery Charger

Constellation™ Vision
ReferSystem
to the Product Lifecycle Management system for the latest revision.
SECTION SEVEN - INDEX
Symbols D
3D SUBMODE........................................................................ 2.90 Detailed Setup........................................................................ 2.74
(Hold) Duration....................................................................... 2.36 DFU.......................................................................................... 4.3
% Time On............................................................................ 2.119 diagnostics............................................................................... 3.1
Diathermy/Coagulation Handpieces..................................... 2.166
A
Diathermy Global Control....................................................... 2.64
Diathermy Power.................................................................... 1.25
Directions For Use (DFU)......................................................... 4.3
About Constellation™............................................................. 2.50 display panel................................................................... 2.1, 2.14
ABS™................................................................................... 2.162 display screens....................................................................... 2.14
Accessories Setup Panel....................................................... 2.71 DISPOSAL OF XENON LAMPS............................................... 4.4
Accessory Equipment............................................................. 1.10 Doctor Protection Filter........................................................... 1.35
Accurus™ Classic.................................................................. 2.85 DOCTOR SETTINGS............................................................. 2.22
AcrySof™ intraocular lenses................................................ 2.166 drainage bag........................................................................ 2.168
Add Favorite........................................................................... 2.19 DVD/CD.................................................................................. 2.46
Add to Procedure................................................................... 2.19 DVD/RW................................................................................... 2.7
Advisory Messages........................................................... 5.3, 5.4 Dynamic Rise....................................................................... 2.103
Aiming Beam On During Standby Mode................................ 2.36
Air Pressure Requirements.................................................... 1.10
Aspiration Bypass System.................................................... 2.162
Audio Input........................................................................ 2.7, 2.8
E
AUTO GAS FILL............................................................ 2.44, 2.80 eConnectivity.......................................................................... 2.39
Auto Gas Filling...................................................................... 2.71 Electrical Connectors............................................................... 2.1
Auto Gas Fill Purge Cycles.................................................... 2.38 electrical interconnections........................................................ 2.7
AutoSert™ IOL Injector........................................................ 2.166 Electromagnetic Emissions.................................................... 1.12
Auxiliary Illuminator Module Eject Button................................. 2.9 Electromagnetic Immunity...................................................... 1.13
EMC Statement...................................................................... 1.12
B
End Case................................................................................ 2.57
END CASE........................................................................... 2.150
Endoprobe Power Verification.................................................. 4.6
Barcode Reader....................................................................... 2.7 Energy Matrix........................................................................... 4.8
Barcode scanner connection............................................. 2.7, 2.8 Environmental Limitations........................................................ 1.4
Basic Setup............................................................................ 2.66 Equipotential Ground Connector.............................................. 2.9
batteries are installed............................................................. 2.13 error message........................................................................ 1.17
Bimanual mode...................................................................... 2.88 Event Log............................................................................... 2.49
biohazards................................................................... 1.23, 2.169 Exposure Time Verification....................................................... 4.6
Bottle Hanger........................................................................... 2.2 EXTRACT SUBMODE.......................................................... 2.147
Bubble Suppression Insert................................................... 2.163 EXTRAS................................................................................. 2.43
BURST SUBMODE................................................... 2.110, 2.112 EXTRUSION MODE............................................................. 2.133
buttons.................................................................................... 2.14
C F
Facility Pressure Source Connectors....................................... 2.8
CALIBRATION VERIFICATION................................................ 4.4 Fault Messages........................................................................ 5.2
CARE AND CLEANING............................................................ 4.1 FCC Compliance Statement................................................... 1.14
care and maintenance.............................................................. 4.1 Field Service........................................................................... 2.43
CASSETTE.......................................................................... 2.168 Fill Progress........................................................................... 2.44
caster wheels........................................................................... 2.4 FIXED SUBMODE................................................................ 2.125
Cautions..................................................................................... ix Fluid/Air Exchange (F/AX) Global Control............................. 2.62
CD/DVD.................................................................................. 2.46 Fluidic Management System.................................................... 2.1
Circulating Nurse...................................................................... 3.1 fluidics module.......................................................................... 2.1
Clean Cassette....................................................................... 2.43 Fluidics Module........................................................................ 2.1
cleaning.................................................................................... 4.1 Fluidics Setup Panel............................................................... 2.67
cleaning and sterilization instructions....................................... 4.3 footswitch........................................................................ 2.2, 2.10
Coagulation Handpieces...................................................... 2.166 Footswitch..................................................................... 2.28, 2.30
Composite Video In/Out.................................................... 2.7, 2.8 Footswitch Button Actions...................................................... 2.31
Configure Printer.................................................................... 2.38 footswitch cable connector....................................................... 3.2
CONNECTING A PUREPOINT LASER.................................. 3.11 Footswitch Configuration........................................................ 2.35
Connectors............................................................................... 2.1 Footswitch Storage Hook......................................................... 2.2
connectors and outlets............................................................. 2.7 Force English......................................................................... 2.41
Consumables................................................................ 2.45, 2.79 Forceps.................................................................................. 2.71
Continuous........................................................................... 2.122 FORCEPS MODE................................................................ 2.142
CONTINUOUS SUBMODE...... 2.107, 2.109, 2.120, 2.122, 2.123 Fragmatome™* handpiece.................................................. 2.160
Contra Indications.................................................................. 1.36 Fragmentation Handpiece.................................................... 2.160
Copying data.......................................................................... 2.48 FRAGMENTATION MODE................................................... 2.123
Creating New Tables............................................................ 2.153 front display panel.................................................................. 2.14
Customer Service................................................................... 1.24 Front Display Panel.................................................................. 2.1
Custom Procedure................................................................. 2.86 FRONT PANEL......................................................................... 2.1
CUSTOM SUBMODE................................................ 2.113, 2.115
8065753060 Rev. Y 7.1

Constellation
™ Vision System
Laser Safety........................................................................... 1.36

G LASER SAFETY..................................................................... 1.32
Laser settings......................................................................... 2.35
Gas Mix Ratio Guide.............................................................. 2.45 Lasers Setup Panel................................................................ 2.73
Gas Selection......................................................................... 2.44 lens insertion........................................................................ 2.135
General Safety Precautions................................................... 1.32 LINEAR SUBMODE............................................................. 2.127
GLOBAL CONTROLS............................................................ 2.58 LIO................................................................................. 6.11, 6.21
GN2........................................................................................ 1.10 LIO Bulb Replacement........................................................... 6.20
Ground Connector.................................................................... 2.9 LIO Icons and Labels.................................................... 6.13, 6.25
LIO Labeling.................................................................. 6.25, 6.26
H
LIO Maintenance........................................................... 6.19, 6.38
LIO Power Verification.............................................................. 4.6
LIO Safety Features...................................................... 6.14, 6.27
handpieces and probes........................................................ 2.159 LIO Technical Specifications................................................... 6.13
Handpiece Setup Panel.......................................................... 2.69 Load Plunger button.................................................. 2.135, 2.136
Help........................................................................................ 2.53 logo screen............................................................................... 3.1
Hi-Def Margin......................................................................... 2.41 Longitudinal Pulse Duration................................................. 2.106
High Definition Video Overlay................................................. 2.41 Longitudinal / Torsional Ratio............................................... 2.106
horizontal/vertical switches..................................................... 2.10
I M
Mackool** U/S Tips............................................................... 2.162
I/A handpiece........................................................................ 2.164 Main Power Switch................................................................... 2.9
IEC Standard.......................................................................... 1.10 Main Screen........................................................................... 2.15
Illumination............................................................................... 2.4 Manual Revision Record............................................................. iii
ILLUMINATOR........................................................................ 1.29 Menu Bar................................................................................ 2.16
Illuminator Global Control....................................................... 2.65 Metrics.................................................................................. 2.151
Illuminator Module Eject Button................................................ 2.9 MicroSmooth™* Infusion Sleeves........................................ 2.163
Indications for Use.................................................................... 1.2 Modify Procedure................................................................... 2.19
Industry of Canada (IC).......................................................... 1.15 MOMENTARY SUBMODE.......................................... 2.93, 2.129
Infiniti™ Ultrasonic (U/S) Handpiece.................................... 2.161 Monitor Type........................................................................... 2.40
Information Messages.............................................................. 5.5 moving the instrument.............................................................. 2.4
Infusion sleeves.................................................................... 2.163 MP3................................................................................... 2.7, 2.8
Infusion Sleeves................................................................... 2.163 MULTICUT SUBMODE........................................................ 2.143
Initial Rate............................................................................ 2.135 multi media card (MMC)........................................................... 2.1
INITIAL SYSTEM SETUP......................................................... 3.2 Multiple Cut or MPC submode............................................. 2.143
Inject..................................................................................... 2.148
Injector.................................................................................. 2.166
INJECT SUBMODE.............................................................. 2.148
installation.............................................................................. 1.10
N
Installation.............................................................................. 1.10 N2........................................................................................... 1.10
instrument tray.......................................................................... 2.2 Navigation.............................................................................. 2.57
Instrument Tray........................................................................ 2.2 Network Connection............................................................... 2.38
intraocular lenses................................................................. 2.166 NGENUITY*.......... 1.2, 2.7, 3.16, 2.30, 2.41, 2.53, 2.53–2.56, 2.8
INTREPID™ AutoSert™ IOL Injector................................... 2.166 NGENUITY* 3D Visualization................................................. 2.38
IOL Injector.................................................................. 1.20, 2.166 NGENUITY * Auxiliary............................................................ 2.30
IP Settings dialog.................................................................. 2.105 NGENUITY* Image Orientation.............................................. 2.30
IRRIGATION/ASPIRATION (I/A) MODE............................... 2.131 NGENUITY* Margin............................................................... 2.41
Irrigation Global Control......................................................... 2.63 NGENUITY* Menu................................................................. 2.30
IV Pole...................................................................................... 2.2 NGENUITY* Setup Screen..................................................... 2.54
IV pole extender....................................................................... 2.2 Nurse........................................................................................ 3.1
J O
No entries Operator Profile.......................................................................... ix
O-ring tool............................................................................. 2.165
K
Ozil™.................................................................................... 2.104
OZIL™ BURST..................................................................... 2.112
OZIL™ CUSTOM PULSE..................................................... 2.115
key tone.................................................................................. 2.14 OZil™/Phaco Sequence......................................................... 2.28
OZIL™ PULSE..................................................................... 2.119
L OZil™ Torsional Handpiece.................................................. 2.161
LABELING......................................................................... 1.7, 1.8

Label Opacity......................................................................... 2.40
P
Language............................................................................... 2.37 Paks....................................................................................... 1.24
Languages.............................................................................. 2.50 Patient Eye Level Offset......................................................... 2.23
Laser........................................................................................ 2.4 phaco handpieces................................................................ 2.160
LASER CALIBRATION VERIFICATION................................... 4.4 PHACO MODE..................................................................... 2.103
LASER INDIRECT OPHTHALMOSCOPE.................... 6.11, 6.21 Phaco Ultrasound Handpieces............................................. 2.160
Laser Indirect Ophthalmoscope (LIO)........................... 6.11, 6.21 PIN......................................................................................... 2.22
LASER MODE...................................................................... 2.138 Pneumatic Scissors.............................................................. 2.159
Lasers..................................................................................... 1.37 pole extender............................................................................ 2.2
7.2 8065753060 Rev. Y

Constellation™ Vision
ReferSystem
to the Product Lifecycle Management system for the latest revision.
Power Control and Ready Standby........................................ 2.35 sterilization instructions............................................................ 4.3
Power Control Only................................................................ 2.35 STERILIZATION INSTRUCTIONS........................................... 4.3
power cord.............................................................................. 1.17 Suction Prime......................................................................... 2.78
Power Module.......................................................................... 2.8 supplies..................................................................................... viii
Power switch............................................................................ 3.1 SURGERY SCREEN.............................................................. 2.79
POWER UP SEQUENCE......................................................... 3.1 Surgery screens..................................................................... 2.14
pps........................................................................................ 2.119 Surgery Steps panel............................................................... 2.19
Preload IOL button.................................................... 2.135, 2.136 Surgical Control Drop Lists..................................................... 2.84
PRESSURE SOURCE............................................................. 3.6 Surgical Control Options........................................................ 2.83
preventive maintenance........................................................... 4.1 Surgical Controls.................................................................... 2.82
PRINTING.............................................................................. 2.47 SURGICAL MODES AND SUBMODES................................. 2.88
PROBES AND HANDPIECES.............................................. 2.158 Surgical Procedures............................................................... 2.84
Probe Setup Panel................................................................. 2.68 Surgical Steps........................................................................ 2.84
Procedure Paks.................................................................... 2.170 Surgical Submode Buttons..................................................... 2.87
PRODUCT SERVICE............................................................. 1.27 S-Video In/Out................................................................... 2.7, 2.8
PROP SUBMODE................................................................ 2.145 SYSTEM SETTINGS.............................................................. 2.37
PROPVAC SUBMODE........................................................... 2.96 SYSTEM STATE AREA.......................................................... 2.65
PULSED SUBMODE................................................. 2.117, 2.119
T
PUREPOINT™ LASER SAFETY FEATURES....................... 1.33
Push Prime............................................................................. 2.78
tension adjustment knob........................................................ 2.10

Q TERMS..................................................................................... 1.6
Test Instrument....................................................................... 2.43
Tethered Laser Connection............................................... 2.7, 2.8
R
Timer...................................................................................... 2.81
timing configurations............................................................ 2.105
Tips....................................................................................... 2.162
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID)................................... 1.14 Toggle Video Recording................................................ 2.30, 2.41
Ramping................................................................................. 2.33 tone........................................................................................ 2.14
REAR PANEL........................................................................... 2.5 touch screen........................................................................... 2.14
Recover.................................................................................... 5.3 Touchscreen........................................................................... 2.14
Recovery Training.................................................................. 2.51 Touch Screen........................................................................... 2.1
Remote Battery Low............................................................... 2.13 Transparent Text..................................................................... 2.40
REMOTE CONTROL.............................................................. 2.11 treadle.................................................................................... 2.10
Remote Control Batteries....................................................... 2.13 Treatment Hazards................................................................. 1.36
REMOTE CONTROL BATTERIES........................................... 4.4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE............................................... 5.11
Remote Control Channel........................................................ 2.13 TurboSonics™...................................................................... 2.162
Remote Control Settings........................................................ 2.39 TurboSonics™ Tips.............................................................. 2.162
Remote Control Settings dialog.............................................. 2.13
Retract.................................................................................. 2.135
Retract button............................................................ 2.135, 2.136
Revert to Standby Timeout..................................................... 2.36
U
Ultraflow™* handpiece......................................................... 2.164
S
Ultraflow™* Handpieces and Tips........................................ 2.164
Ultraflow™* I/A handpiece.................................................... 2.164
uncrating.......................................................................... 1.10, 4.4
Scissors.................................................................................. 2.71 Universal Precautions............................................................ 1.12
Scissors mode...................................................................... 2.143 USB Connector................................................................. 2.7, 2.8
SCISSORS MODE............................................................... 2.143 User Manual........................................................................... 2.51
Screen Brightness.................................................................. 2.37 U/S) Handpiece.................................................................... 2.161
Scrub Nurse............................................................................. 3.1 U/S tips................................................................................. 2.162
SD-Card................................................................................. 2.46 Utility Requirements............................................................... 1.32
self-test..................................................................................... 2.1
self-test diagnostics.................................................................. 3.1
servicing issues........................................................................ 4.1
Settings Restoration............................................................... 1.10
V
Setup...................................................................................... 2.66 Vacuum mode vs. Flow mode................................................ 2.88
Setup Form........................................................................... 2.151 VFC mode............................................................................ 2.147
Setup screen.......................................................................... 2.14 VGA out.................................................................................... 2.8
silicone oil............................................................................. 2.147 Video Broadcast..................................................................... 2.40
sleeves................................................................................. 2.163 Video Connection.......................................................... 2.40, 2.41
Smart Pulse.......................................................................... 2.104 Video Overlay.................................................................. 2.8, 2.41
SOUND SETTINGS................................................................ 2.36 Video Overlay Connection............................................. 3.15, 3.16
source air pressure................................................................. 1.10 Video Overlay setting.................................................... 2.40, 2.41
SPECIAL TOOLS..................................................................... 4.5 Video Recorder.............................................................. 2.41, 3.14
SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................... 1.4 View All................................................................................... 2.19
Spectral Output...................................................................... 1.29 View/Copy/Delete................................................................... 2.46
STANDARD DEFINITION VIDEO OVERLAY......................... 2.40 View Favorites........................................................................ 2.19
Standard vs. Advanced mode................................................ 2.88 Viscous Fluid Control.............................................................. 2.71
Standby Power Switch............................................................. 2.9 VISCOUS FLUID CONTROL (VFC) MODE......................... 2.147
Standby switch......................................................................... 3.1 VIT: Proportional Vacuum submode....................................... 2.93
Start Prime............................................................................. 2.78 Vitrectomy Mode............................... 2.90, 2.93, 2.96, 2.99, 2.101
Startup Screen....................................................................... 2.14 Vitrectomy Probes................................................................ 2.159
Status Setup panel................................................................. 2.74
Step Filtering.......................................................................... 2.19
8065753060 Rev. Y 7.3

Constellation
™ Vision System
W
Warnings.................................................................................... ix
WARRANTY........................................................................... 1.28
WETANT SUBMODE.................................................. 2.99, 2.101
Wireless LAN device.............................................................. 1.14
X
No entries
Y
No entries
Z
No entries

905-2120-005 G, Text

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

905-2120-005 G, Text

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

905-2120-005 G, Text

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

REFERENCE COPY ONLY – DO NOT DISTRIBUTE

APPROVED DWG NO. REV

8065753060 Rev. Y, CATALOG NUMBER

MANUAL REVISION RECORD

** Trademarks are property of their respective owners.

SECTION TWO - DESCRIPTION PAGE #

SECTION THREE - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS PAGE #

SECTION FOUR - CARE AND MAINTENANCE PAGE #

SECTION SIX - ACCESSORIES AND PARTS PAGE #

SECTION SEVEN - INDEX PAGE #

To order supplies in U.S.A.:

Outside U.S.A.: Contact your local Alcon representative for supplies.

8065753060 Rev. Y vii

It is recommended that maintenance be performed by qualified Alcon Field Personnel.

Alcon reserves the right to change specifications without further notice.

viii 8065753060 Rev. Y

A qualified technician must perform a visual inspection of the following components

MAGNETIC AND ELECTRICAL INTERFERENCE - Magnetic and electrical fields are

Alcon Laboratories, Inc.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

x LAST PAGE OF THIS SECTION 8065753060 Rev. Y

SECTION ONE - GENERAL INFORMATION

Tray Arm Assembly

Figure 1-1 The Constellation™ Vision System

8065753060 Rev. Y 1.1

8065753060 Rev. Y 1.3

SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PRESSURIZED INFUSION/IRRIGATION @SEA LEVEL:

TABLETOP: Range: 0 to 120 mmHg1

Dimensions Accuracy: ±(2% of setpoint +5 mmHg)

BASE: Setpoint Transient

1.4 8065753060 Rev. Y

SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AUTO-GAS FILLING (AGF):

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS...continued Maximum Gas Pressure: 10 psig

Single Use Bipolar Cables: 846 Vpp AUTO-STOPCOCK:

1200 Vpp Response Time: <0.5 seconds

• 0-200 hrs: 16 ± 6 lumens at 115% set Submodes: Burst, Pulsed, Continuous

FRAGMENTATION: Submodes: Wet, Dry

8065753060 Rev. Y 1.5

1.6 8065753060 Rev. Y

Instrument Tray Maxiumum Load Label

Footswitch Max Load Label

Remote Control Label

Bottom of Remote Control

Figure 1-2 LABEL LOCATIONS ON THE CONSTELLATION™ VISION SYSTEM

8065753060 Rev. Y 1.7

System Product Label Unique Device Identification (UDI) Label

Tray Arm Warning Label

Laser Warning Label

Laser Conformity Label

Drawer Maximum Load Label

Figure 1-2 LABEL LOCATIONS ON THE CONSTELLATION™ VISION SYSTEM - continued

1.8 8065753060 Rev. Y

Forceps AutoSert™ IOL Laser Emergency

Scissors Dangerous Voltage Non-ionizing

Viscous Dr. Filter Off

Equipotentiality Displays the Help

Help Video Remote Door

Modify Remote Interlock

Figure 1-3 ICONS USED WITH THE CONSTELLATION™ VISION SYSTEM